Table of contents - McGraw-Hill Books

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Economics......................................................9 

Advanced Macroeconomics............................................ 43 

Advanced Microeconomics............................................. 44 

Asian Economics............................................................. 46 

Econometrics.................................................................. 34 

Economic Growth and Development.............................. 44 

Economics for Business................................................... 28 

Economics Issues............................................................ 28 

Environmental Economics............................................... 34 

History of Economic Thought.......................................... 40 

Industrial Organization.................................................... 40 

Intermediate Macroeconomics........................................ 30 

Intermediate Microeconomics......................................... 31 

International Economics.................................................. 38 

Labor Economics............................................................. 41 

Managerial Economics.................................................... 32 

Mathematical Economics................................................. 36 

Money and Banking........................................................ 37 

Principles of Economics - Software.................................. 17 

Principles of Economics - Supplementary........................ 17 

Principles of Economics - Textbooks................................ 11 

Principles of Macroeconomics - Textbooks...................... 19 

Principles of Microeconomics - Textbooks...................... 23 

Public Finance................................................................ 43 

Regional Economics........................................................ 45 

Statistics for Economics................................................... 46 

Survey of Economics....................................................... 26 

Urban Economics............................................................ 42 

Operations/Decision 

Sciences..........................................................47 

Business/Systems Dynamics............................................ 49 

Data Mining.................................................................... 65 

Enterprise Resource Planning.......................................... 65 

Global Operations Management..................................... 66 

Introductory Operations Management............................. 49 

Logistics & Supply Chain Management (Prof Ref.)........... 67 

Management Science - Text............................................. 54 

Operation Management Software.................................... 53 

Operation Management Supplement............................... 52 

Operation Research......................................................... 66 

Production / Inventory Control........................................ 57 

Project Management....................................................... 57 

Project Management (Prof Ref.)....................................... 67 

Purchasing and Supply Chain Management..................... 62 

Quality Control / Management........................................ 59 

Quantitative Method - Text............................................. 56 

Service Operations Management..................................... 61 

Upper Level Operations Management............................. 56 

Business Statistics.........................69 

Business Forecasting....................................................... 75 

Business Research Method.............................................. 76 

Business Statistics - Supplements..................................... 74 

Business Statistics - Textbook.......................................... 70 

Linear Statistics / Regression............................................ 77 

Others............................................................................. 78 

Business Math....................................79 

Business Math................................................................. 80 

Business Math Software................................................... 81 

Indexes...........................................................82 

Title Index....................................................................... 82 

Author Index................................................................... 85

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Economics ~ Contents 

2007-2008 NEW Economics Titles 

2007 New Titles 




Econometrics.................................................................. 34 
























• BALDWIN 

The Economics of European Integration, 2e..............45 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711119-9 / MHID: 0-07-711119-2 

[MH UK Title] 

• BEGG 

Economics for Business, 2e.......................................28 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711451-0 / MHID: 0-07-711451-5 

[MH UK Title] 

• BEGG 

Foundations of Economics, 3e...................................27 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711423-7 / MHID: 0-07-711423-X 

[MH UK Title] 

• BRICKLEY 

Managerial Economics and Organizational 

Architecture, 4e........................................................32 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352301-9 / MHID: 0-07-352301-1 

• BRUE 

Essentials of Economics............................................26 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301967-3 / MHID: 0-07-301967-4 

• COLE 

Annual Editions: Economics, 34e.............................17 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352843-4 / MHID: 0-07-352843-9 

• DORNBUSCH 

Macroeconomics, 2e..................................................30 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471568-0 / MHID: 0-07-471568-2 

[MH Australia Title] 

• FRANK 

Principles of Economics...........................................14 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710831-1 / MHID: 0-07-710831-0 

[MH UK Title] 

• FRANK 

Principles of Economics, 3e.....................................12 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312567-1 / MHID: 0-07-312567-9 

• FRANK 

Principles of Macroeconomics, 3e............................20 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323061-0 / MHID: 0-07-323061-8 

• FRANK 

Principles of Microeconomics, 3e.............................23 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323060-3 / MHID: 0-07-323060-X 

• GUELL 

Issues in Economics Today, 3e...................................28 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313752-0 / MHID: 0-07-313752-9 

• JACKSON 

Macroeconomics, 8e.................................................21 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471698-4 / MHID: 0-07-471698-0 


• O’SULLIVAN 

Urban Economics, 6e.................................................42 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298476-7 / MHID: 0-07-3298476-7 

• PUGEL 

International Economics, 13e.....................................38 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352302-6 / MHID: 0-07-352302-X



• RICHARD 

The Economics of Organizations and Strategy.........33 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710813-7 / MHID: 0-07-710813-2 

• SCHILLER 

Essentials of Economics, 6e......................................26 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340279-6 / MHID: 0-07-340279-6 


• BORJAS 

Labor Economics, 4e................................................41 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340282-6 / MHID: 0-07-340282-6 

• McCONNELL 

Economics, 17e........................................................11 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312663-0 / MHID: 0-07-312663-2 

• ROSEN 

Public Finance, 8e....................................................43 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351128-3 / MHID: 0-07-351128-5 

• SLAVIN 

Economics, 8e..........................................................12 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351127-6 / MHID: 0-07-351127-7 

• SLAVIN 

Microeconomics, 8e.................................................23 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328147-6 / MHID: 0-07-328147-6 

• SLAVIN 

Macroeconomics, 8e................................................19 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328148-3 / MHID: 0-07-328148-4 

• THOMAS 

Managerial Economics, 9e.......................................32 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340281-9 / MHID: 0-07-340281-8

2007-2008 NEW Operations/Decision Science Titles 

Operations/Decision Science 

~ Contents 


Data Mining.................................................................... 65 


















• BENTON 

Purchasing and Supply Management....................... 63 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352514-3 / MHID: 0-07-352514-6 

• BOWERSOX 

Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e.................. 63 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294788-5 / MHID: 0-07-294788-8 

• DEWHURST 

Quantitative Methods for Business, 2e..................... 56 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710902-8 / MHID: 0-07-710902-3 

[MH UK Title] 

• FINCH 

Interactive Models for Operations and Supply 

Chain Management..................................................52 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285710-8 / MHID: 0-07-285710-2 

• GRYNA 

Quality Planning and Analysis, 5e............................59 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296662-6 / MHID: 0-07-296662-9 

• HAYEN 

SAP R/3 Enterprise Software............................... 53, 65 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8 

• IRWIN/MH 

Operations Management Video Series Vol. 

XII DVD, 9e.............................................................50 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326881-X / MHID: 0-07-326881-X 

• OLSON 

Introduction to Business Data Mining...................... 65 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295971-0 / MHID: 0-07-295971-1 

• SCHROEDER 

Operations Management, 3e.................................... 50 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313706-3 / MHID: 0-07-313706-5 

• STEVENSON 

Introduction to Management Science...................... 54 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299066-9 / MHID: 0-07-299066-X 

• STEVENSON 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110916-1 / MHID: 0-07-110916-1 

• THOMKE 

Managing Project and Service Development: 

Text and Cases......................................................... 58 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302301-4 / MHID: 0-07-302301-9 

• VOHRA 

Quantitative Techniques in Management, 3e........... 55 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-061193-1 / MHID: 0-07-061193-9 

[Tata MH Title]

2007-2008 NEW Operations/Decision Science Titles 


• FINCH 

Operations Now, 3e.................................................49 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329705-7 / MHID: 0-07-329705-4 

• GRAY 

Project Management, 4e..........................................57 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352515-0 / MHID: 0-07-352515-4 

• JACOBS 

Operations and Supply Management.......................50 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329473-5 / MHID: 0-07-329473-X 

• SIMCHI-LEVI 

Designing and Managing the Supply 

Chain, 3e..................................................................62 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298239-8 / MHID: 0-07-298239-X

2007-2008 NEW Business Statistics Titles 

Business Statistics ~ Contents 







Others............................................................................. 78 

• BOWERMAN 

Business Statistics in Practice, 4e.............................71 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297747-9 / MHID: 0-07-297747-7 

• DOANE 

Applied Statistics in Business and Economics 

with Student CD-ROM.............................................72 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321575-4 / MHID: 0-07-321575-9 

• ORRIS 

Basic Statistics Using Excel and MegaStat................72 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321158-9 / MHID: 0-07-321158-3 

• WILSON 

Business Forecasting, 5e...........................................75 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320398-0 / MHID: 0-07-320398-X 


• BOWERMAN 

Essentials of Business Statistics, 2e.......................... 70 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297748-6 / MHID: 0-07-297748-5 

• LIND 

Basic Statistics Using Excel for use with 

Statistical Techniques in Business and 

Economics, 13e........................................................74 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303026-5 / MHID: 0-07-303026-0 

• LIND 


Economics, 13e........................................................ 70 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327296-2 / MHID: 0-07-327296-5

2007-2008 NEW Business Math Titles 

Business Math ~ Contents 

Business Math................................................................. 80 



• NELSON 

Essential of Math with Business 

Applications, Student Edition, 7e............................. 80 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298599-3 / MHID: 0-07-298599-2

Economics ~ Contents 






Econometrics.................................................................. 34 
























• BALDWIN 

The Economics of European Integration, 2e..............45 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711119-9 / MHID: 0-07-711119-2 

[MH UK Title] 

• BEGG 

Economics for Business, 2e.......................................28 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711451-0 / MHID: 0-07-711451-5 

[MH UK Title] 

• BEGG 

Foundations of Economics, 3e...................................27 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711423-7 / MHID: 0-07-711423-X 

[MH UK Title] 

• BRICKLEY 

Managerial Economics and Organizational 

Architecture, 4e........................................................32 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352301-9 / MHID: 0-07-352301-1 

• BRUE 

Essentials of Economics............................................26 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301967-3 / MHID: 0-07-301967-4 

• COLE 

Annual Editions: Economics, 34e.............................17 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352843-4 / MHID: 0-07-352843-9 

• DORNBUSCH 

Macroeconomics, 2e..................................................30 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471568-0 / MHID: 0-07-471568-2 


• FRANK 

Principles of Economics...........................................14 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710831-1 / MHID: 0-07-710831-0 

[MH UK Title] 

• FRANK 

Principles of Economics, 3e.....................................12 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312567-1 / MHID: 0-07-312567-9 

• FRANK 

Principles of Macroeconomics, 3e............................20 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323061-0 / MHID: 0-07-323061-8 

• FRANK 

Principles of Microeconomics, 3e.............................23 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323060-3 / MHID: 0-07-323060-X 

• GUELL 

Issues in Economics Today, 3e...................................28 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313752-0 / MHID: 0-07-313752-9 

• JACKSON 

Macroeconomics, 8e.................................................21 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471698-4 / MHID: 0-07-471698-0 


• O’SULLIVAN 

Urban Economics, 6e.................................................42 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298476-7 / MHID: 0-07-3298476-7 

• PUGEL 

International Economics, 13e.....................................38 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352302-6 / MHID: 0-07-352302-X



• RICHARD 

The Economics of Organizations and Strategy.........33 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710813-7 / MHID: 0-07-710813-2 

• SCHILLER 

Essentials of Economics, 6e......................................26 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340279-6 / MHID: 0-07-340279-6 


• BORJAS 

Labor Economics, 4e................................................41 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340282-6 / MHID: 0-07-340282-6 

• McCONNELL 

Economics, 17e........................................................11 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312663-0 / MHID: 0-07-312663-2 

• ROSEN 

Public Finance, 8e....................................................43 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351128-3 / MHID: 0-07-351128-5 

• SLAVIN 

Economics, 8e..........................................................12 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351127-6 / MHID: 0-07-351127-7 

• SLAVIN 

Microeconomics, 8e.................................................23 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328147-6 / MHID: 0-07-328147-6 

• SLAVIN 

Macroeconomics, 8e................................................19 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328148-3 / MHID: 0-07-328148-4 

• THOMAS 

Managerial Economics, 9e.......................................32 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340281-9 / MHID: 0-07-340281-8 

10

Principles of Economics 

- Textbooks 

International Edition 

New 

ECONOMICS 

17th Edition 

By Campbell McConnell, University of Nebraska and Stanley L Brue, 

Pacific Lutheran University 

2008 (November 2006) / 832 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312663-0 / MHID: 0-07-312663-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110143-1 / MHID: 0-07-110143-8 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mcconnell17.com 

McConnell and Brue’s Economics: Principles, Problems, and 

Policies is the leading Principles of Economics textbook because 

it is innovative and teaches students in a clear, unbiased way. 

The 17th Edition builds upon the tradition of leadership with 

three main goals: help the beginning student master the principles 

essential for understanding the economizing problem, 

specific economic issues, and the policy alternatives; help the 

student understand and apply the economic perspective and 

reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; 

and promote a lasting student interest in economics and the 

economy. 

New to this edition 

• New Analysis of Monetary Policy: The authors have revised the 

discussion of monetary policy to help the student understand the Fed’s 

focus on the federal funds rate, and how changes in that rate affect other 

interest rates and the overall economy. In Chapter 14, the authors demonstrate 

how the Fed targets a specific federal funds rate and then uses 

open-market operations to drive the rate to that level and hold it there 

(see Figure 14.3). This new analysis will help students interpret the news 

as it relates to Fed announcements about federal funds rates. 

• Technology Advantage: McGraw-Hill aims to help instructors save 

time and acknowledge that students study differently now. It is their 

goal to provide technology solutions that meet those goals. To that end, 

they have developed the following core set of products and services: 

homework management, rich course cartridges, Prep Center, iPod 

Content, and easy to use response system content. 

• Assessment-Ready Learning Objectives and Testing: Each chapter 

begins with measurable learning objectives. These learning objectives 

are cross-referenced to specific test bank questions to allow construction 

of measurement instruments. This direct link between objectives 

and content facilitates now common accreditation efforts necessary to 

meet assurance of learning requirements. 

• Internet Chapters: Two new Internet chapters, along with a fully 

updated preexisting web chapter covering The Economics of Developing 

Countries (16Web), are available for free use at our website, www. 

mcconnell17.com. The first of these, “Financial Economics” (Chapter 

14Web), examines ideas such as compound interest, present value, arbitrage, 

risk, diversification, and the risk-return relationship. The second 

new chapter, “Resource and Energy Economics” (Chapter 27Web) is 

particularly timely. It covers topics such as the optimal rate of extraction, 

resource substitution, resource sustainability, and oil prices. 

• Consolidated Chapters: With overwhelming support of reviewers, 

the authors have consolidated the first two chapters of the prior edition 

into a single chapter, “Limits, Alternatives, and Choices” (Chapter 

1). This new chapter quickly and directly moves the student into the 

subject matter of economics, demonstrating its methodology. We also 

combined the prior edition’s separate chapters on fiscal policy and 

the public debt into single chapter, “Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and Debt” 

(Chapter 11). The topics are closely related, and consolidation integrates 

them into a smooth flow. 

Economics 

• Updated Consider This Boxes: These boxes are used to provide 

analogies, examples, or stories that help drive home central economic 

ideas in a student-oriented, real-world manner. New boxes include 

such disparate topics as fast food lines (Chapter 1), the Fed as a sponge 

(Chapter 14), art for art’s sake (Chapter 28), and many more. 

• Updated Last Word Boxes: These applications and case studies 

are located toward the end of each chapter. In this edition, we have 

included photos to pique student interest. New or relocated Last Words 

include those on pitfalls to sound economic reasoning (Chapter 1), the 

diminishing impact of oil prices on the overall economy (Chapter 10), 

and mandatory health insurance (Chapter 33), and many more. 

• Updated Last Word Boxes: These applications and case studies 

are located toward the end of each chapter. In this edition, we have 

included photos to pique student interest. New or relocated Last Words 

include those on pitfalls to sound economic reasoning (Chapter 1), the 

diminishing impact of oil prices on the overall economy (Chapter 10), 

and mandatory health insurance (Chapter 33), and many more. 

• Contemporary Discussions and Examples: The seventeenth edition 

references and discusses many current topics: the economics of the 

war in Iraq, China’s rapid growth rate, large Federal budget deficits, 

recent Fed monetary policy, the debate over inflation targeting, the 

productivity acceleration, the recent profit paths of Wal-Mart and 

General Motors, rising oil prices, Health Savings Accounts (HSAs), 

immigration impacts, large U.S. trade deficits, off shoring of American 

jobs, and many more. 

Features 

• A Patient, Step-by-Step Approach: Realizing that this is the first 

introduction to economics for most students, the authors take a patient, 

step-by step approach to teaching the material. The authors explain the 

theory and models slowly and thoroughly. This approach is easier to 

follow than that of many other texts on the market which make assumptions 

and jump through material quickly, leaving students behind. 

• Balanced Coverage: McConnell and Brue have stayed the number 

one selling text over the years because of their thorough and neutral 

coverage of the material—they present both sides and let instructors 

and students make up their own minds. 

• Two-Path Macro: Because different teachers teach macro in different 

ways, the authors organized Chapters 8, 9, and 10 to provide two 

alternative paths through the macro. This way, instructors who focus 

exclusively on Aggregate Demand-Aggregate Supply Model can easily 

skip the Aggregate Expenditure (Keynesian) model, while those who 

teach both the AD/AS and AE models can do so in a logical manner. 

• Multiple-choice “Quick Quizzes” to accompany the Key Graphs. 

Graphs that have special relevance are labeled “Key Graphs,” and each 

includes a multiple-choice quiz. These 4-question quizzes allow students 

to test their understanding in the multiple-choice format. Answers 

are provided on the page, but upside down. 

• Extensive Glossary: Over 30 pages with 1000 entries. 

• Figure Legends: Legends accompanying diagrams are often in-depth 

self-contained analyses of the concepts. The legends are quick synopses 

of important ideas. They help the students understand the visual 

representations more fully. 

• Study Questions: 10-12 questions follow every chapter, one of 

which refers to the Last Word Essay; several of the questions are designated 

“key questions”, are cited in the body of text, and answered 

at the book’s end. 

• Quick Review Boxes: 3-4 mini lists interspersed in each chapter 

used to review content. Students get a chance to review what they’ve 

read and as a result, retain more. 

11

Economics 

New 


New 

ECONOMICS 

8th Edition 

By Stephen Slavin, Union College 

2008 (August 2006) / 832 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351127-6 / MHID: 0-07-351127-7 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/slavin8e 

Steve Slavin’s lively and comprehensive Economics has a 

student-friendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a 

built-in Workbook/Study Guide. Instructors and students like 

the author’s humorous anecdotes, direct language, and easy 

conversational style. The text encourages active rather than 

passive reading. 


• A Chapter Issues section at the end of each chapter gives practical 

application to at least one of the concepts covered in the chapter. Issues 

discussed include “The Internet Effect: A more perfect knowledge 

and lower prices,” in Chapter 21 and “Will Social Security be there for 

you?” in Chapter 30. 

• New discussions have been added to provide yet more practical 

application to the overall text, including a “Sports Strikes and Lockouts” 

box in Ch. 27 and “A College Degree Is the Ticket Out of Poverty” 

box in Ch. 28. 

• The discussion of comparative advantage in Chapter 31 has 

been written for simplicity and clarity, making it easier for students 

to learn. 

Features 

• Value Price: Slavin’s low price continues to make it one of the best 

values on the market. It’s approximately $25 less than other principles 

texts. 

• Fun Writing Style: The author’s humorous writing style and historical 

approach to economics are a hit with students who might otherwise 

find the subject dry or intimidating. Steve Slavin is an experienced 

and respected author--in addition to having over 30 years experience 

teaching the principles course, he has written 11 other math and economics 

books. 

• Streamlined Text: The streamlined basis of the text has been retained 

from the previous version, and the more obscure passages have 

been simplified. 

• Special In-Text Boxes: Dozens of self-help boxes anticipate and 

answer frequently asked questions. The book reviews math that students 

should have learned before college. The better prepared students can 

skip this material, but this review enables all students to start on a level 

playing field in the course. Many advanced work boxes provide more 

challenging material, giving adventurous students an opportunity to 

learn and master difficult material. This optional material can be easily 

skipped by instructors. 

CONTENTS 

1 A brief economic history of the united states. 2 Resource utilization. 3 

Supply and demand. 4 The mixed economy. The household-consumption 

sector. 6 The business-investment sector. 7 The government sector. 

8 The export-import sector. 9 Gross domestic product. 10 Economic 

fluctuations, unemployment, and inflation. 11 Classical and keynesian 

economics. 12 Fiscal policy and the national debt. 13 Money and 

banking. 14 The federal reserve and monetary policy. 15 A century of 

economic theory. 16 Economic growth and productivity. 17 Demand, 

supply, and equilibrium. 18 The elasticities of demand and supply. 19 

The theory of consumer behavior. 20 Cost. 21 Profit, loss, and perfect 

competition. 22 Monopoly. 23 Monopolistic competition. 24 Oligopoly. 

25 Corporate mergers and antitrust. 26 Demand in the factor market. 

27 Labor unions. 28 Labor markets and wage rates. 29 Rent, interest, 

and profit. 30 Income distribution and poverty. 31 International trade. 

32 International finance. 

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS 

3rd Edition 

By Robert H. Frank, Cornell University-Ithaca and Ben Bernanke, 

Princeton University 

2007 (December 2005) / 896 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312567-1 / MHID: 0-07-312567-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323059-7 / MHID: 0-07-323059-6 

(with DiscoverEcon Code Card) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110815-7 / MHID: 0-07-110815-7 

[IE with Discover Econ Code Card] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/frankbernanke3 

In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, 

foreign languages, and other fields have achieved dramatic 

pedagogical gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic 

approach in favor of attempting to teach a short list 

of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and 

researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that 

the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory 

economics. Although recent editions of a few other texts have 

paid lip service to this new approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far 

the best thought out and best executed principles text in this 

mold. Avoiding excessive reliance on formal mathematical 

derivations, it presents concepts intuitively through examples 

drawn from familiar contexts. The authors introduce a 

well-articulated short list of core principles and reinforcing 

them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. 

Students are periodically asked to apply these principles to 

answer related questions and exercises. The text also encourages 

students to become “Economic Naturalists,” people who 

employ basic economic principles to understand and explain 

what they observe in the world around them. An economic 

naturalist understands, for example, that infant safety seats 

are required in cars but not in airplanes because the marginal 

cost of space to accommodate these seats is typically zero in 

cars but often hundreds of dollars in airplanes. Such examples 

engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature 

of their economic landscape as the reflection of an implicit or 

explicit cost-benefit calculation. 

NEW TO THIS EDITION 

• “Incentives matter” is a new core principle: If we asked a thousand 

economists to provide their own versions of the most important economic 

principles, we’d get a thousand different lists. Yet to dwell on 

their differences would be to miss their essential similarities. It is less 

important to have exactly the best short list of principles than it is to 

use some well-thought-out list of this sort. New to our short list is the 

“incentives matter” principle, which we added to emphasize that costbenefit 

comparisons are relevant not only for identifying the decisions 

that rational people should make, but also for predicting the actual 

decisions they do make across numerous diverse domains. 

• International trade chapter moved forward: Because the topic is so 

important, the chapter on international trade (Chapter 16 in our Second 

Edition) has been moved forward to appear at the end of the Part 2 

(Competition and the Invisible Hand). This chapter (now Chapter 9) 

has been extensively rewritten to incorporate explicit analysis of how 

producer and consumer surplus are affected by trade and by policies 

such as tariffs and quotas. A new section addresses the question of 

which jobs are most vulnerable to outsourcing. 

• More emphasis on monopolistic competition and oligopoly: In our 

Second Edition, the chapter on imperfect competition (Chapter 9 in that 

edition) briefly defined the three forms of imperfect competition and 

then focused exclusively on pure monopoly. In this edition, we have 

added more detailed descriptive accounts of monopolistic competition 

and oligopoly to this chapter (now Chapter 10). We have also added 

numerous additional examples involving these industry structures in 

the succeeding chapter on strategic choice (now Chapter 11). 

12

Economics 

• Added material on indifference curves: In our second edition, we 

offered an appendix on the indifference curve approach to the consumer 

choice problem on the text web site. But because a number of reviewers 

felt strongly that this material should me more accessible for those 

who want to use it, we’ve added it an extensively revised appendix to 

Chapter 5. This topic can be skipped at no compromise to the material 

in the succeeding chapters. 

• Algebra appendixes added: To the basic review of the algebra and 

geometry of straight lines presented in the mathematical appendix to 

Chapter 1, we have added a basic primer on how to solve simple systems 

of two equations with two unknowns. In this edition, the treatment of 

supply and demand in the main text is carried out exclusively in verbal 

and graphical terms. But we have added an appendix to Chapter 3 that 

presents an algebraic treatment of supply and demand. We have also 

added a brief appendix to Chapter 10 showing how monopoly profit 

maximization can be treated in an algebraic framework. 

• Additional Economic Naturalist drawings: For reasons best explained 

by educational psychologists, illustrations can be an enormously 

effective pedagogical tool, in part because of their ability to trigger rich 

networks of cognitive association. To exploit this tool more effectively, 

we commissioned line drawings by the renowned New Yorker cartoonist 

Mick Stevens and other artists to accompany many of the economic 

naturalist examples. For this edition, all of the economic naturalist 

examples are accompanied by such drawings. 

• Expanded Discussion of Macroeconomic Policy: The revised 

monetary policy reaction function we introduce in Chapter 27 is a 

more realistic description of how the Fed actually conducts monetary 

policy and clarifies the Taylor rule. In Chapter 28 we use this policy 

reaction function to help students distinguish between a move along 

the aggregate demand curve and a shift in the aggregate demand curve 

resulting from a change in monetary policy. 

• In a new Chapter 29, we provide a more complete analysis of the 

interaction between fiscal and monetary policy, illustrating the crucial 

role of the central bank in any long-run inflation. We also discuss how 

enhanced credibility can help to anchor inflationary expectations and 

explain the contributions of central bank independence, inflation targeting, 

and central bank reputation. In the last section of Chapter 29 

we expand our discussion of the real-world difficulties in conducting 

macroeconomic policy. 

• More Patient Presentation of Models: In Chapter 26 we explain the 

effects of tax cuts on planned aggregate expenditure more carefully. In 

an optional box we also solve a simple Keynesian model, leaving the 

full model in the appendix, as in the second edition. In the diagrams 

in Chapter 28 we include the transitional short-run aggregate supply 

lines to illustrate how the short-run aggregate supply line shifts when 

actual output deviates from potential output. 

• Expanded Discussion of Supply-Side Economics: Most economists 

agree that changes in marginal tax rates can affect both aggregate demand 

and aggregate supply, but they disagree on the size of the effects. 

In Chapter 28 we describe this controversy in greater detail and present 

both the theoretical and empirical evidence of the effects of changes in 

marginal tax rates on aggregate supply. 

• Greater Attention to Asset Prices: In Chapter 21 we provide a clearer 

explanation of the inverse relationship between bond prices and interest 

rates. We also discuss the effects of changes in asset prices (especially 

stocks and houses) on aggregate demand. 

• Simpler Presentation of Exchange Rates: We use supply and demand 

curves to illustrate the determination of nominal exchange rates before 

we introduce the real exchange rate and purchasing-power-parity. 

• Additional Material on China: At its current rate of growth the Chinese 

economy may become the largest economy in the world within 

the next generation. In this edition we expand our discussion of China 

in the world economy. We discuss the determinants of its success and 

its management of its exchange rate. 

• New Material on the Acceleration of Productivity Growth: The 

productivity slowdown of 1973-1995 has been followed by surprisingly 

strong productivity growth. We present and discuss the reasons 

for this acceleration. 

• Updated Discussion of Saving and Investment: In addition to emphasizing 

the importance of public and private saving and the relationship 

between the budget deficit, national saving, and capital flows, we discuss 

the recently divergent trends in business and household saving. 

• Modern Macroeconomics: Recent developments have renewed 

interest in cyclical fluctuations while still paying attention to such 

long-run issues as growth, productivity, the evolution of real wages, 

and capital formation. Thus, we offer the following organization: A 

5-chapter treatment of long-run issues prior to an analysis of short-run 

fluctuations followed by a modern treatment of short-term fluctuations 

and stabilization policy, emphasizing the important distinction between 

short- and long-run behavior of the economy. Consistent with both media 

reporting and recent research on the central bank reaction function, 

we treat the interest rate rather than the money supply as the instrument 

of Fed policy. The analysis of aggregate demand and aggregate supply 

relates output to inflation, rather than to the price level, sidestepping 

the necessity of a separate derivation of the link between the output 

gap and inflation. This book places a heavy emphasis on globalization, 

starting with an analysis of its effects on real wage inequality and progressing 

to such issues as the benefits of trade, the causes and effects of 

protectionism, the role of capital flows in domestic capital formation, 

the link between exchange rates and monetary policy, and the sources 

of speculative attacks on currencies. 

Features 

• An Emphasis on Core Principles: A few core principles do most 

of the work in economics. By focusing on these principles, the text 

assures that students leave the course with a deep mastery of them. 

In contrast, traditional encyclopedic texts so overwhelm students 

with detail that they often leave the course with little useful working 

knowledge at all. 

• Economic Naturalism Introduced: The authors’ ultimate goal is to 

produce “economic naturalists” –people who see each human action 

as the result of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation. The 

economic naturalist sees mundane details of ordinary existence in a 

new light and becomes actively engaged in the attempt to understand 

them. Why don’t auto manufacturers make cars without heaters? Why 

are whales, but not chickens, threatened with extinction? Why do movie 

theaters give student discounts on the price of admission but not on 

the price of popcorn? 

• Active Learning Stressed: The only way to lean to hit an overhead 

smash in tennis or to speak a foreign language is through repeated 

practice. The same is true for learning economics. Thus, the authors 

consistently introduce new ideas in the context of simple examples and 

then follow them with applications showing how they work in familiar 

settings. And frequently, the text poses exercises that both test and reinforce 

the understanding of these ideas. The end-of-chapter questions and 

problems are carefully crafted to help students internalize and extend 

core concepts. Students are prepared to apply the important concepts 

to solve “economic riddles” drawn from the real world. 

• Well-Known Authors: Robert Frank and Ben Bernanke are renowned 

experts in their fields (micro and macro, respectively). Frank’s research 

has looked at rivalry and cooperation in economic and social behavior. 

He is the author of a best-selling intermediate economics text, Microeconomics 

and Behavior, (McGraw-Hill/Irwin), and has published such 

award-winning books as The Winner-Take-All-Society and Luxury Fever. 

Bernanke is the co-author of a best-selling intermediate macroeconomics 

text and has done significant research on the causes of the Great 

Depression, the role of financial markets and institutions in the business 

cycle, and measuring the effects of monetary policy on the economy. 

He was a member of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors for more 

than two years and is now the Chairman of the President’s Council of 

Economic Advisers. 

• Modern Microeconomics: Economic surplus, introduced in Chapter 

1 and applied repeatedly thereafter, is more fully developed here than 

in any other text. This concept underlies the argument for economic 

efficiency as an important social goal. Rather than speak of tradeoffs 

between efficiency and other goals, the authors stress that maximizing 

economic surplus facilitates the achievement of all goals. The tendency 

to ignore opportunity costs, the tendency not to ignore sunk costs, and 

13

Economics 

the tendency to confuse average and marginal costs and benefits—common 

decision pitfalls identified by 2002 Nobel Laureate Daniel Kahneman 

and others—are introduced early in Chapter 1. The book devotes a 

chapter to the economics of information, making available in intuitively 

accessible form key insights that earned the 2001 Nobel Prize in economics 

for George Akerlof, Joseph Stiglitz, and Michael Spence. 

• Web site: Developed by Scott Simkins of North Carolina A & T State 

University, an expert in the growing field of Economics education on the 

World Wide Web, the ambitious web site contains a host of features that 

will enhance the principles classroom, including dynamic graphs, video 

lectures, e-mail updates, microeconomic experiments, current news 

articles, information about the text, an eLearning session, and more. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Introduction. 1. Thinking Like an Economist. 2. Comparative 

Advantage: The Basis for Exchange. 3. Supply and Demand: An Introduction. 

Part 2 Competition and the Invisible Hand. 4. Elasticity. 

5. Demand: The Benefit Side of the Market. 6. Perfectly Competitive 

Supply: The Cost Side of the Market. 7. Efficiency and Exchange. 8. The 

Quest for Profit and the Invisible Hand. 9. International Trade. Part 3 

Market Imperfections. 10. Monopoly and Other Forms of Imperfect 

Competition. 11. Thinking Strategically: A Further Look at Monopolistic 

Competition and Oligopoly. 12. Externalities and Property Rights. 13. 

The Economics of Information. Part 4 Economics of Public Policy. 14. 

Labor Markets, Poverty, and Income Distribution. 15. The Environment, 

Health, and Safety. 16. Public Goods and Tax Policy. Part 5 

Macroeconomics: Issues and Data. 17. Macroeconomics: The Bird’s- 

Eye View of the Economy . 18. Measuring Economic Activity: GDP 

and Unemployment. 19. Measuring the Price Level and Inflation. Part 

6 The Economy in the Long Run. 20. Economic Growth, Productivity, 

and Living Standards. 21. Workers, Wages, and Unemployment in the 

Modern Economy. 22. Saving and Capital Formation. 23. Money and 

the Federal Reserve. 24. Financial Markets and International Capital 

Flow. Part 7 The Economy in the Short Run. 25. Short-term Economic 

Fluctuations: An Introduction. 26. Spending Output in the Short Run. 27. 

Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Fed. 28. Inflation, Aggregate 

Supply, and Aggregate Demand. 29. The Practice and Pitfalls of Macroeconomic 

Policy. Part 8 The International Economy. 30. Exchange 

Rates and the Open Economy 


ECONOMICS 

6th Edition 

By David C Colander, Middlebury College 

2006 / 936 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297883-4 / MHID: 0-07-297883-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322297-4 / MHID: 0-07-322297-6 

(with Paul Solman Videos Code Card) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111569-8 / MHID: 0-07-111569-2 [IE] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110611-5 / MHID: 0-07-110611-1 

[IE with DiscoverEcon and Paul Solman Video Code Card] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/colander6 

Written in an informal colloquial style, this student-friendly 

Principles of Economics textbook does not sacrifice intellectual 

depth in its quest for accessibility. The author’s primary concern 

is to instill “economic sensibility” in the student. Colander 

emphasizes the intellectual and historical context to which the 

economic models are applied. This new edition offers improvements 

to this established and respected text including special 

Questions from Alternate Perspectives end-of-chapter questions 

that facilitate class discussion of differing views of thought in 

the discipline, and access to over 250 minutes of new videos 

from Paul Solman of the Lehrer NewsHour. 

Contents 

I: Introduction: Thinking Like An Economist Chapter 1: Economics and 

Economic Reasoning Chapter 2: Trade, Trade-off’s and Government 

Policy Chapter 3: The Evolving U.S. Economy in Perspective Chapter 

4: Supply and Demand Chapter 5: Using Supply and Demand II: Microeconomics 

I: Microeconomics: The Basics Chapter 6: Describing 

Supply and Demand: Elasticities Chapter 7: Taxation and Government 

Intervention II: Foundations of Supply and Demand Chapter 8: The 

Logic of Individual Choice: The Foundation of Supply and Demand 

Chapter 9: Production and Cost Analysis I Chapter 10: Production and 

Cost Analysis II III: Market Structure and Policy Chapter 11: Perfect 

Competition Chapter 12: Monopoly Chapter 13: Monopolistic Competition, 

Oligopoly, and Strategic Pricing Chapter 14: Real-World Competition 

and Technology Chapter 15: Antitrust Policy and Regulation IV: 

Factor Markets Chapter 16: Work and the Labor Market Chapter 17: 

Who Gets What? The Distribution of Income V: Applying Economic 

Reasoning to Policy Chapter 18: Government Policy and Market Failures 

Chapter 19: Politics and Economics: The Case of Agriculture Markets 

Chapter 20: Microeconomic Policy, Economic Reasoning, and Beyond 

Chapter 21: International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and 

Outsourcing III: Macroeconomics I: Macroeconomic Problems Chapter 

22: Economic Growth, Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation 

Chapter 23: National Income Accounting II: The Macroeconomic 

Framework Chapter 24: Growth, Productivity, and the Wealth of Nations 

Chapter 25: Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Modern 

Macroeconomics Chapter 26: The Multiplier Model III: Money, Inflation, 

and Monetary Policy Chapter 27: Money, Banking, and the Financial 

Sector Chapter 28: Monetary Policy and the Debate about Macro 

Policy Chapter 29: Inflation and Its Relationship to Unemployment 

and Growth IV: Macro Policy in Perspective Chapter 30: Aggregate 

Demand Policy in Perspective Chapter 31: Politics, Deficits,and Debt 

Chapter 32: Macro Policies in Developing Countries V: International 

Policy Issues Chapter 33: International Financial Policy Chapter 34: 

Macro Policy in a Global Setting 

New 


By Robert Frank, Cornell University, Moore McDowell and Rodney 

Thom of University College Dublin and Ben Bernanke, Princeton 

University 

2006 (March 2006) / 912 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710831-1 / MHID: 0-07-710831-0 

McGraw-Hill UK Title 

Principles of Economics, European Edition, develops the well 

regarded US textbook by Frank and Bernanke to reflect the issues 

and context of economics in Europe. The book presents concepts 

intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. It 

relies throughout on a well articulated shortlist of 12 core principles 

which are reinforced by real-world examples. Review 

questions, exercises and problems encourage students to apply 

these principles in a variety of contexts. The text encourages 

students to become “economic naturalists”, people who employ 

basic economic principles to understand and explain what they 

observe in the world around them. The “economic naturalist” 

approach helps students develop concepts and illustrates their 

applications in a real world setting. 

Features 

• European content throughout, including a new chapter on the economics 

of the European Union and an extended chapter on oligopoly 

theory within the microeconomics section 

• A revised and expanded macroeconomics section, addressing key 

issues within a European context 

• Advanced technical analysis in appendices to demonstrate elements 

of working with equations, supply, and the Keynesian model 

• Up-to-date European Economic Naturalist examples that place economics 

in a relevant and contemporary context 

• Core Principles emphasised throughout the text to reinforce key 

ideas 

14

• An Active Learning Approach, with exercises, review questions and Contents 

problems included in every chapter, to encourage students to apply 

their knowledge as they work through the topics 

CONTENTS 

Preface. PART 1: Introduction. 1 Thinking Like an Economist. Appendix 

A: Working with Equations, Graphs and Tables. Appendix B: Elements 

of Calculus for use in Economics. 2 Comparative Advantage: The Basis 

for Exchange. 3 Supply and Demand: An Introduction. PART 2: Competition 

and the Invisible Hand. 4 Elasticity. 5 Demand: The Benefit 

Side of the Market. 6 Perfectly Competitive Supply: The Cost Side of 

the Market. Appendix: Supply. 7 Efficiency and Exchange. 8 The Quest 

for Profit and the Invisible Hand. PART 3: Market Imperfections. 9 Imperfect 

Competition and Consequences of Market Power. 10 Thinking 

Strategically: Competition among the Few. 11 Externalities and Property 

Rights: External Costs and Benefits. 12 The Economics of Information. 

PART 4: Government in the Economy: Distribution, Regulation and the 

Provision of Public Goods. 13 Labour Markets, Income Distribution, 

Wealth and Poverty. 14 Government in the Market Economy: Regulation 

and Production of Public Goods and Other Services. PART 5: Trade and 

Integration. 16 Trade, Factor Flows and Economic Integration: The Basic 

Economics of the European Union. PART 6: Macroeconomics: Issues 

and Data. 17 Macroeconomics: The Bird’s-Eye View of the Economy. 18 

Measuring Economic Activity: GDP and Unemployment. 19 Measuring 

the Price Level and Inflation. PART 7: The Economy in the Long Run. 

20 Economic Growth, Productivity, and Living Standards. 21 Workers, 

Wages, and Unemployment in the Modern Economy. 22 Saving 

and Capital Formation. 23 Money, Prices, and the European Central 

Bank. 24 Financial Markets and International Capital Flows. PART 8: 

The Economy in the Short Run. 25 Short-Term Economic Fluctuations. 

Appendix: The Multiplier in the Basic Keynesian Model. 26 Stabilising 

the Economy: The Role of Fiscal Policy. 27 Stabilizing the Economy: 

The Role of Monetary Policy. Appendix: Monetary Policy in the Basic 

Keynesian Model. 28 Inflation and Aggregate Supply. Appendix: The 

Algebra of Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. PART 9: The 

International Economy. 29 Exchange Rates and the Open Economy. 

30 Monetary Union: The Theory of Optimum Currency Areas 


THE ECONOMY TODAY 

10th Edition 

By Bradley R. Schiller, American University 

2006 / 912 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297911-4 / MHID: 0-07-297911-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313775-9 / MHID: 0-07-313775-8 

(with DiscoverEcon with Paul Solman Videos) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111790-6 / MHID: 0-07-111790-3 

[IE with DiscoverEcon with Paul Solman Videos] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/schiller10 

Brad Schiller’s text, The Economy Today, 10/e, is noted for three 

great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and pedagogy. 

His accessible writing style engages students and brings some of 

the excitement of domestic and global economic news into the 

classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers must choose 

between government intervention and market reliance to resolve 

the core issues of what, how, and for whom to produce. This 

strategic choice is highlighted throughout the full range of micro, 

macro, and international issues. Every chapter ends with a policy 

issue that emphasizes the markets vs. government dilemma. And 

Schiller packs his chapters with the facts of economic life—real 

stories and applications, not fables. This is a book that teaches 

economics in a relevant context with careful pedagogy. It is 

also the only principles text that presents all macro theory in 

the single consistent context of the AS/AD framework. Schiller 

10e is for students motivated by real-world policy issues who 

want to become economically literate. This is a book students 

actually READ. Schiller is also known for its cutting-edge and 

current coverage of today’s issues. 

Economics 

Part 1 BASIC CONCEPTS Chapter 1 Economics: The Core Issues Appendix: 

Using Graphs Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View Chapter 

3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Public Sector Part 2 MEASURING 

MACRO OUTCOMES Chapter 5 National-Income Accounting Chapter 

6 Unemployment Chapter 7 Inflation Part 3 CYCLICAL INSTABILITY 

Chapter 8 The Business Cycle Chapter 9 Aggregate Demand Appendix: 

The Keynesian Cross Chapter 10 Self-Adjustment or Instability? Part 4 

FISCAL POLICY LEVERS Chapter 11 Fiscal Policy Chapter 12 Deficits, 

Surpluses, and Debts Part 5 MONETARY POLICY OPTIONS Chapter 

13 Money and Banks Chapter 14 The Federal Reserve System Chapter 

15 Monetary Policy Part 6 SUPPLY-SIDE OPTIONS Chapter 16 Supply-Side 

Policy: Short-Run Options Chapter 17 Growth and Productivity: 

Long-Run Possibilities Part 7 POLICY CONSTRAINTS Chapter 

18 Global Macro Chapter 19 Theory and Reality Part 8 PRODUCT 

MARKETS: THE BASICS Chapter 20 The Demand for Goods Appendix: 

Indifference Curves Chapter 21: The Costs of Production Part 9 MARKET 

STRUCTURE Chapter 22 The Competitive Firm Chapter 23 Competitive 

Markets Chapter 24 Monopoly Chapter 25 Oligopoly Chapter 26 

Monopolistic Competition Part 10 REGULATORY ISSUES Chapter 

27 (De)Regulation of Business Chapter 28 Environmental Protection 

Chapter 29 The Farm Problem Part 11 FACTOR MARKETS: BASIC 

THEORY Chapter 30 The Labor Market Chapter 31 Labor Unions Chapter 

32 Financial Markets Part 12 DISTRIBUTIONAL ISSUES Chapter 

33 Taxes: Equity vs. Efficiency Chapter 34 Transfer Payments: Welfare 

and Social Security Part 13 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Chapter 

35 International Trade Chapter 36 International Finance / Glossary / 

Index / Student Problem Sets 

ECONOMICS 

8th Edition 

By David Begg, Birkbeck College, London, Stanley Fischer, International 

Monetary Fund and Rudiger Dornbusch of Massachusetts 

Institute of Technology 

2005 / 560 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710775-8 / MHID: 0-07-710775-6 


Website: www.mcgraw-hill/textbooks/begg 

Begg, Fischer and Dornbusch, Economics, is the definitive economics 

textbook. The new edition of the best selling “student 

bible” aims to teach students how economics really works in 

the world today. The new edition continues to engage with the 

latest theoretical developments in economics. With a host of 

new boxes, data, and examples throughout, the new revision 

brings economics right up-to-date. Careful revisions to key topics 

and explanations also help to ensure the new edition retains 

its relevance to contemporary teaching in economics. A brand 

new feature of this edition is free access to Power Web, an online 

database of refereed articles, news stories and features about 

economics topics, kept right up-to-date with daily news feeds. 

Accompanied by a fantastic range of extra resources for students 

and lecturers, the new edition provides the complete package 

of materials for students of economics and their lecturers. 

CONTENTS 

Part One: Introduction / 1. Economics and the economy / 2. Tools of 

economic analysis / 3. Demand, supply, and the market / 4. Elasticities 

of demand and supply / Part Two: Microeconomics / 5. Consumer 

choice and demand decisions / 6. Introducing supply decisions / 7. 

Costs and supply / 8. Perfect competition and pure monopoly / 9. 

Market structure and imperfect competition / 10. The labour market / 

11. Different types of labour / 12. Factor markets and income distribution 

/ 13. Risk and information / 14. The information economy / Part 

Three: Welfare Economics / 15. Welfare economics / 16. Government 

spending and revenue / 17. Industrial policy and competition policy / 

18. Natural monopoly: public or private? / Part Four: Macroeconomics 

/ 19: Intro to macroeconomics / 20: Output and aggregate demand / 21: 

Fiscal policy and foreign trade / 22. Money and Banking / 23. Interest 

rates and monetary transmission / 24. Monetary and fiscal policy / 25. 

Aggregate supply, prices and the adjustment to shocks / 26. Inflation, 

15

Economics 

expectations, and credibility / 27. Unemployment / 28. Exchange rates 

and the balance of payments / 29: Open economy macroeconomics 

/ 30. Economic Growth / 31. Business cycles / 32. Macroeconomics: 

taking stock / Part Five: The World Economy / 33: International trade 

/ 34: Exchange rate regimes / 35: European integration / 36: Less developed 

countries 


ECONOMICS 

16th Edition 

By Campbell R. McConnell, University of Nebraska, Emeritus and 

Stanley L. Brue, Pacific Lutheran University 

2005 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298271-8 / MHID: 0-07-298271-3 

(with Discover Econ Online and Paul Solman Videos) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124914-0 / MHID: 0-07-124914-1 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mcconnell16.com 

McConnell-Brue’s Principles of Economics, 16e is the best-selling 

Principles of Economics textbook and has been teaching 

students in a clear, unbiased way for 40 years. The 15th edition 

grew market share because of its clear and careful treatment of 

principles of economics concepts, its balanced coverage, and its 

patient explanations. More students have learned their principles 

of Economics from McConnell-Brue than any other text; 12 million 

of them. The 16th edition is a revision that delivers a tight 

and modern book. We are also please to introduce an exciting 

fully-integrated software system called DiscoverEcon featuring 

Paul Solman: DiscoverEcon software, brand-new videos that 

teach economic concepts in a fun and engaging way, and more, 

all in one convenient software package. 

CONTENTS 

Part One: An Introduction to Economics and the Economy 1 The Nature 

and Method of Economics 2 The Economizing Problem 3 Individual 

Markets: Demand and Supply 3Web Applications and Extension of Supply 

and Demand Analysis [Internet only chapter] 4 The Market System 

5 The U.S. Economy: Private and Public Sectors 6 The United States 

in the Global Economy Part Two: Macroeconomic Measurement and 

Basic Concepts 7 Measuring Domestic Output and National Income 

8 Introduction to Economic Growth and Instability 9 Basic Macroeconomic 

Relationships Part Three: Macroeconomic Models and Fiscal 

Policy 10 The Aggregate Expenditures Model 11 Aggregate Demand 

and Aggregate Supply 12 Fiscal Policy Part Four: Money, Banking, and 

Monetary Policy 13 Money and Banking 14 How Banks and Thrifts 

Create Money 15 Monetary Policy Part Five: Long-Run Perspectives 

and Macroeconomic Debates 16 Extending the Analysis of Aggregate 

Supply 17 Economic Growth 18 Deficits, Surpluses, and the Public Debt 

19 Disputes over Macro Theory and Policy Part Six: Microeconomics 

of Product Markets 20 Elasticity of Demand and Supply 21 Consumer 

Behavior and Utility Maximization 22 The Costs of Production 23 Pure 

Competition 24 Pure Monopoly 25 Monopolistic Competition and 

Oligopoly 26 Technology, R&D, and Efficiency Part Seven: Microeconomics 

of Resource Markets 27 The Demand for Resources 28 Wage 

Determination 29 Rent, Interest, and Profit Part Eight: Microeconomics 

of Government 30 Government and Market Failure 31 Public Choice 

Theory and the Economics of Taxation Part Nine: Microeconomic Issues 

and Policies 32 Antitrust Policy and Regulation 33 Agriculture: Economics 

and Policy 34 Income Inequality and Poverty 35 Labor Market 

Institutions and Issues: Unionism, Discrimination, Immigration 36 Labor 

Market institutions and Issues Part Ten: International Economics and the 

World Economy 37 International Trade 38 Exchange Rates, the Balance 

of Payments, and Trade Deficits 39 Web The Economics of Developing 

Countries [Internet only chapter] 40Web Transition Economies: Russia 

and China [Internet only chapter] 


ECONOMICS 

18th Edition 

By Paul A Samuelson, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and 

William D Nordhaus, Yale University 

2005 / 832 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287208-7 / MHID: 0-07-287205-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123932-5 / MHID: 0-07-123932-4 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/economics/ 

samuelson18e 

Samuelson’s text was first published in 1948, and it immediately 

became the authority for the principles of economics courses. 

The book continues to be the standard-bearer for principles 

courses, and this revision continues to be a clear, accurate, and 

interesting introduction to modern economics principles. Bill 

Nordhaus is now the primary author of this text, and he has 

revised the book to be as current and relevant as ever. 

contents 

Part One: Basic Concepts 1 The Fundamentals of Economics Appendix 1 

How to Read Graphs 2 Markets and Government in a Modern Economy 

3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand Part Two: Microeconomics: 

Supply, Demand, and Product Markets 4 Applications of Supply and 

Demand 5 Demand and Consumer Behavior Appendix 5 Geometrical 

Analysis of Consumer Equilibrium 6 Production and Business Organization 

7 Analysis of Costs Appendix 7 Production, Cost Theory, and 

Decision of the Firm 8 Analysis of Perfectly Competitive Markets 9 

Competition and Its Polar Case of Monopoly 10 Oligopoly and Monopolistic 

Competition 11 Uncertainty and Game Theory Part Three: Factor 

Markets: Labor, Land, and Capital 12 How Markets Determine Incomes 

13 The Labor Market 14 Land and Capital Appendix 14 Markets and 

Economic Efficiency Part Four: Applied Microeconomics: International 

Trade, Government, and the Environment 15 Comparative Advantage 

and Protectionism 16 Government Taxation and Expenditure 17 Promoting 

More Efficient Markets 18 Protecting the Environment 19 Efficiency 

vs. Equality: The Big Tradeoff Part Five: Macroeconomics: Economic 

Growth and Business Cycles 20 Overview of Macroeconomics Appendix 

20 Macroeconomic Data 21 Measuring Economic Activity 22 

Consumption and Investment 23 Business Fluctuations and the Theory 

of Aggregate Demand 24 The Multiplier Model 25 Money, Banking, 

and Financial Markets 26 Central Banking and Monetary Policy Part 

Six: Economic Growth and Macroeconomic Policy 27 The Process of 

Economic Growth 28 The Challenge of Economic Development 29 Exchange 

Rates and the International Financial System 30 Open-Economy 

Macroeconomics Part Seven: Unemployment, Inflation, and Economic 

Policy 31 Unemployment and the Foundations of Aggregate Supply 32 

Ensuring Price Stability 33 The Warring Schools of Macroeconomics 

34 Policies for Growth and Stability 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 

Complimentary desk copies are available 

for course adoption only. Kindly contact your 

local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the 

Examination Copy Request Form available 

on the back pages of this catalog. 

Visit McGraw-Hill Education 

Website: www.mheducation.com 

16

Economics 

Principles of 

Economics - Software 

Principles of Economics 

– Supplementary 


THE POWER OF MACROECONOMICS CD-ROM 

By Peter Navarro, University of California - Irvine 

2000 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-238087-3 / MHID: 0-07-238087-X 

(Out of Print) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118311-6 / MHID: 0-07-118311-6 [IE] 

Website: www. powerofeconomic.com 

CONTENTS 

Lecture 1. An Overview of Modern Macroeconomics Lecture 2. The 

Aggregate Supply - Aggregate Demand Model and the Classic-Keynesian 

Debate Lecture 3. The Keynesian Model and Fiscal Policy Lecture 4. 

The Federal Reserve and Monetary Policy Lecture 5. Unemployment, 

Inflation, and Stagflation Lecture 6. The Warring Schools of Macroeconomics 

Lecture 7. Economic Growth and Productivity Lecture 8. 

Budget Deficits and the Public Debt Lecture 9. International Trade and 

Protectionism Lecture 10. Exchange Rates, the Balance of Payments, 

and Trade Deficits Lecture 11. The Economics of Developing Countries 

and Transition Economies 

New 

ANNUAL EDITIONS: ECONOMICS 

34rd Edition 

By Don Cole, Drew University 

2007 (October 2006) / 240 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352843-4 / MHID: 0-07-352843-9 

McGraw-Hill Duskin Title 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/text-data-catalog/0073528439.mhtml 

This thirty-fourth of ANNUAL EDITIONS: ECONOMICS 

provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles 

selected from the best of the public press. Organizational features 

include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web 

sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a general 

introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index; 

and an instructor’s resource guide with testing materials. US- 

ING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as 

a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are 

supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online. 


THE POWER OF MICROECONOMICS CD-ROM 

By Peter Navarro, University of California - Irvine 

2000 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-228314-3 / MHID: 0-07-228314-9 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116621-8 / MHID: 0-07-116621-1 [IE] 

Website: www.powerofeconomics.com 

CONTENTS 

1. An Introduction to Macroeconomics 2. Supply, Demand, and Equilibrium 

3. Demand and Consumer Behavior 4. Supply and Production 

Theory 5. Perfect Competition 6. Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition 

7. Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior 8. Land and Rent 9. The Labor 

Market and Wage Determination 10. The Capital Market, Interest, and 

Profit 11. Income and Wealth, Poverty and Discrimination 12. Public 

Goods and Externalities 13. Government Taxation and Expenditures and 

Public Choice Theory 14. International Trade and Protectionism 

INVITATION TO PUBLISH 

McGraw-Hill is interested 

in reviewing manuscript 

for publication. Please 

contact your local 

McGraw-Hill office or email to 

asiapub@mcgraw-hill.com 

Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 

Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 

economics is everywhere 

2nd Edition 

By Daniel S. Hamermesh, University of Texas at Austin 

2006 / 264 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298260-2 / MHID: 0-07-298260-8 

The purpose of Economics Is Everywhere by Daniel S. Hamermesh 

is to illustrate the wide range of daily activities to which 

an economic way of thinking can be applied. The 400 vignettes 

were inspired by news stories, television shows, movies, music, 

family events, and other facets of daily life. Some vignettes were 

suggested by students or colleagues. The book is organized into 

three parts to follow the topical arrangement of a typical introductory 

microeconomic textbook. These vignettes apply what 

students learn in their introductory microeconomics textbook. 

They focus on the student’s ability to apply formal analysis with 

myriad of examples that come out of their daily activities. After 

studying this applications/issues book, students will be able to 

read a newspaper or magazine and understand their own daily 

activities in a new, economic way—and as a result, understand 

the economics at work around them. 

CONTENTS 

Introduction. Thinking About Economics Everywhere / Part I. Trade- 

Offs, Demand and Supply, and the Consumer Chapter 1. Trade-offs and 

Opportunity Cost Chapter 2. Demand and Supply Curves Chapter 3. 

Demand and Supply Together—Quantity and Price in Unrestricted Markets 

Chapter 4. Demand and Supply—Quantity and Price in Restricted 

Markets Chapter 5. The Consumer—Elasticity and Incentives Chapter 

6. The Consumer—How to Choose /Tips on Hunting for Economics 

Everywhere in Part I / Part II. Costs, Production, and Markets Chapter 

7. Cost and Production Chapter 8. The Firm in the Short Run—Fixed and 

Variable Costs Chapter 9. Competitive Markets in the Long Run Chapter 

10. Competitive Markets—Responses to Shocks Chapter 11. Social Optima 

Chapter 12. Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition Chapter 13. 

Price Discrimination Chapter 14. Oligopoly (including Game Theory) 

/ Tips on Hunting for Economics Everywhere in Part II / Part III. Input 

Markets, the Public Sector, and International Markets Chapter 15. 

Present Value and Discounting Chapter 16. Wage Differences Chapter 

17. Labor Market Behavior and Poverty Chapter 18. Externalities, Public 

Goods, and Property Rights Chapter 19. Taxes and Public Expenditures 

17

Economics 

Chapter 20. International Economics / Tips on Hunting for Economics 

Everywhere in Part III / Glossary / Index (combined) 

THE ECONOMICS OF WAR 

By Paul Poast, Ohio State University 

2006 / 240 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313399-7 / MHID: 0-07-313399-X 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/poast1e 

With the costs of war dominating our economic news and 

discussions, Paul Poast’s new text is a needed, relevant and 

thought-provoking new offering. Written in an extremely accessible 

manner, the book is an interesting addition to a course at 

any level. The book’s low price makes it a perfect complement 

to a Principles text, a Social Issues book, or any upper-level 

course on war or international security into which an instructor 

would like to add some economic data or theory. 

Contents 

UNIT I: The Economic Impact of War Chapter 1: The War Economy in 

Theory 1.1 Introduction 1.2 The Iron Law of War 1.3 Four Point Scheme 

for Evaluating the Economic Effects of War 1.4 Key Points Chapter 2: 

The War Economy in Reality: Case Studies of Major Wars 2.1 Introduction 

2.2 Cases That Support the Iron Law of War (World War I, World 

War Ii, and Korea) 2.3 Cases That Do Not Support the Iron Law of War 

(Vietnam, 1991 Persian Gulf, and Iraq) 2.4 Key Points UNIT II: Modern 

Military Economics Chapter 3: Defense Spending and the Economy 3.1 

Introduction 3.2 U.S. Military Expenditures 3.3 U.S. Military Expenditures 

and Macroeconomic Performance 3.4 Global Military Expenditures 

3.5 Exploring the Causes of Militarization 3.6 Key Points Chapter 4: 

Military Labor 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Comparing Military Manpower 4.3 

All Volunteer Force (AVF) v. Conscription 4.4 Case Study: The Vietnam 

Transition from Conscription to an AVF 4.5 U.S. Military Compensation: 

Is It Enough? 4.6 Private Military Forces/Companies (PMF/PMC) 

4.7 Key Points Chapter 5: Weapons Procurement 5.1 Introduction 5.2 

Overview of the Arms Market 5.3 The Domestic Weapons Market 5.4 

The Global Weapons Market 5.5 Case Study: The Joint Strike Fighter 

5.6 Key Points UNIT III: The Economics of Modern Security Threats 

Chapter 6: Civil Conflicts in the Developing World 6.1 Introduction 6.2 

Economic Consequences of Civil Wars 6.3 Economic Causes of Civil 

Wars 6.4 Case Studies of Conflict And Underdevelopment in Africa 

6.5 Peace Operations: An Economically Inefficient Response? 6.6 Key 

Points Chapter 7: Terrorism 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Definition of Terrorism 

7.3 Incidents and Trends in International Terrorism 7.4 Is Terrorism 

Rational? 7.5 Terrorist Financing 7.6 Economic Impact of Terrorism 

7.7 Key Points Chapter 8: Weapons of Mass Destruction Proliferation 

8.1 Introduction 8.2 Overview of Biological, Chemical, and Nuclear 

Weapons 8.3 Basics of Constructing Nuclear Weapons Material 8.4 

Demand for Nuclear Weapons 8.5 Supply of Nuclear Weapons 8.6 

Treaties: An Effective Response? 8.7 Key Points 

ECONOMICS STUDY WORKBOOK 

8th Edition 

By David Begg, Principal of Tanaka Business School-Imperial College, 

University of London and Damian Ward, Bradford University 

2005 / 364 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710780-2 / MHID: 0-07-710780-2 


This student study guide supports Begg, Economics 8th edition. 

It gives students a chance to apply their knowledge to a large 

selection of problems and to test their understanding of what 

they have read. 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF EASY OUTLINE OF 


By Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University in New York and Eugene 

Diulio 

2003 / 144 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-139873-2 / MHID: 0-07-139873-2 

A Schaum Publication 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Introduction to Economics / Chapter 2: Demand, Supply, and 

Equilibrium / Chapter 3: Unemployment, Inflation, and National Income 

/ Chapter 4: Consumption, Investment, Net Exports, and Government 

Expenditures / Chapter 5: Traditional Keynesian Approach to Equilibrium 

Output / Chapter 6: Fiscal Policy / Chapter 7: Money, Banking, and the 

Federal Reserve / Chapter 8: Monetary Policy / Chapter 9: Economic 

Growth and Productivity / Chapter 10: International Trade and Finance 

/ Chapter 11: Theory of Consumer Demand and Utility / Chapter 12: 

Production Costs / Chapter 13: Perfect Competition / Chapter 14: 

Monopoly / Chapter 15: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly / 

Chapter 16: Demand for Economic Resources / Chapter 17: Pricing of 

Wages, Rent, Interest, and Profits / Index 


A GUIDE TO THE WEB FOR ECONOMICS 

By D. Scott Bellamy and Edward P. Kardas of Southern Arkansas 

University 

2000 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-236208-4 / MHID: 0-07-236208-1 

(CD-ROM) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118369-7 / MHID: 0-07-118369-8 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/economics/bellamy/ 

CONTENTS 

1. Locating Web Resources 2. Evaluating Web Resources 3. General 

Resources in Economics 4. Fundamentals of Economics 5. The Market 

System 6. Macroeconomic Measures 7. AD/AS and Schools of Economic 

Thought 8. Fiscal Policy 9. Money and the Federal Reserve System 10. 

International Economics 11. Taxes, Deficits, and Debt 12. Consumer 

Choice 13. Elasticities14. Firms, Production and Cost 15. Product Markets 

16. Factor Markets 17. Market Failure 18. Public Choice 


EXPERIMENTS WITH ECONOMIC PRINCIPLES 

Microeconomics, 2nd Edition 

By Theodore C. Bergstrom, University of California-Santa Barbara 

and John H Miller, Carnegie Mellon University 

2000 / 448 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-229518-4 / MHID: 0-07-229518-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116172-5 / MHID: 0-07-116172-4 [IE] 

Website: www.econ.ucsb.edu/~tedh/eep/eep.html 

CONTENTS 

I Competitive Markets 1. Supply and Demand 2. Shifting Supply and 

Demand II Market Intervention and Public Policy 3. A Sales Tax 4. 

Prohibition 5. A Minimum Wage III. Imperfect Markets 6. Externalities 

7. Monopolies and Cartels IV Firms and Technology 8. Entry and Exit 

9. Network Externalities 10. Entry and Exit 11. Measuring Productivity 

12. Comparative Advantage V Information, Auctions, and Bargaining 

13. Adverse selection 14. Auctions 15. Fundamental Concepts VI Essential 

Economic Concepts 

18

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MACROECONOMICS 

3rd Edition 

By Eugene Diulio 

1999 / 333 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-017053-7 / MHID: 0-07-017053-3 


CONTENTS 

1. Introduction to Macroeconomic Analysis. 2. Measures of Output, 

Prices, and Employment. 3. Output in the Short and Long Run. 4. Models 

of Spending Equilibrium. 5. The IS-LM Framework. 6. Monetary and 

Fiscal Policy in a Closed Economy. 7. Monetary and Fiscal Policy in 

an Open Economy. 8. Schedules of Aggregate Demand and Aggregate 

Supply. 9. Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand Analysis. 10. 

Aggregate Supply, Aggregate Demand, and Inflation. 11. Economic 

Growth. 12. The Supply of and Demand for Money. 13. Consumption. 

14. Theories of Investment. 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PRINCIPLES OF 

ECONOMICS 

2nd Edition 

By Dominick Salvatore and Eugene A. Diulio 

1996 / 368 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-054629-5 / MHID: 0-07-054629-0 


CONTENTS 

1. Introduction to Economics. 2. The Economic Problem. 3. Demand, 

Supply, and Equilibrium. 4. Introduction to Macroeconomics. 5. Unemployment, 

Inflation, and National Income. 6. Consumption, Investment, 

and Net Exports. 7. Keynesian Approach to Equilibrium Output. 8. 

Fiscal Policy. 9. Money and Banking. 10. The Federal Reserve and the 

Money Supply. 11. Monetary and Fiscal Policy. 12. Inflation, Unemployment, 

Deficits, and Debt. 13. Economic Growth and Productivity. 14. 

Demand, Supply and Elasticity. 15. The Theory of Consumer Demand 

and Utility. 16. Costs of Production. 17. Price and Output. 18. Perfect 

Competition. 19. Price and Output: Monopoly. 20. Price and Output: 

Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 21. Production and the 

Demand for Economic Resources. 22. Wage Determination.23. Rent, 

Interest, and Profits. 

Principles of Macroeconomics 

- Textbooks 

New 

Economics 

MACROECONOMICS 

8th Edition 


2008 (September 2006) / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328148-3 / MHID: 0-07-328148-4 


Steve Slavin’s lively and comprehensive Macroeconomics has 

a student-friendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a 







application to at least one of the concepts covered in the chapter. 

• New discussions have been added to provide yet more practical application 

to the overall text. 

• The discussion of comparative advantage in Chapter 18 has been written 

for simplicity and clarity, making it easier for students to learn. 

Features 



texts. 






books. 


from the previous version, and the more obscure passages have been 

simplified. 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








• Special In-Text Boxes: Dozens of self-help boxes anticipate and answer 

frequently asked questions. The book reviews math that students 







CONTENTS 

1 A Brief Economic History of the United States. 2 Resource Utilization. 

3 Supply and Demand. 4 The Mixed Economy. 5 The Household-Consumption 

Sector. 6 The Business-Investment Sector. 7 The Government 

Sector. 8 The Export-Import Sector. 9 Gross Domestic Product. 10 

Economic Fluctuations, Unemployment, and Inflation. 11 Classical 

and Keynesian Economics. 12 Fiscal Policy and National Debt. 13 

Money and Banking. 14 The Federal Reserve and Monetary Policy. 15 

A Century Of Economic Policy. 16 Economic Growth and Productivity. 

17 Income Distribution and Poverty. 18 International Trade. 19 

International Finance 

19

Economics 


New 

PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS 

3rd Edition 

By Robert H. Frank, Cornell University-Ithaca and Ben 

Bernanke, Princeton University 

2007 (January 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323061-0 / MHID: 0-07-323061-8 

(with Discover Econ Code Card) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110820-1 / MHID: 0-07-110820-3 



In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign 

languages, and other fields have achieved dramatic pedagogical 

gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach 

in favor of attempting to teach a short list of core principles in 

depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank 

and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach 

affords similar gains in introductory economics. Although recent 

editions of a few other texts have paid lip service to this new 

approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far the best thought out and best 

executed principles text in this mold. Avoiding excessive reliance 

on formal mathematical derivations, it presents concepts 

intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. The 

authors introduce a well-articulated short list of core principles 

and reinforcing them by illustrating and applying each in numerous 

contexts. Students are periodically asked to apply these 

principles to answer related questions and exercises. The text 

also encourages students to become “Economic Naturalists,” 

people who employ basic economic principles to understand 

and explain what they observe in the world around them. An 

economic naturalist understands, for example, that infant safety 

seats are required in cars but not in airplanes because the marginal 

cost of space to accommodate these seats is typically zero 

in cars but often hundreds of dollars in airplanes. Such examples 

engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature 

of their economic landscape as the reflection of an implicit or 

explicit cost-benefit calculation. 


• Expanded Discussion of Macroeconomic Policy: The revised monetary 

policy reaction function we introduce in Chapter 27 is a more 

realistic description of how the Fed actually conducts monetary policy 

and clarifies the Taylor rule. In Chapter 28 we use this policy reaction 

function to help students distinguish between a move along the aggregate 

demand curve and a shift in the aggregate demand curve resulting 

from a change in monetary policy. In a new Chapter 29, we provide a 

more complete analysis of the interaction between fiscal and monetary 

policy, illustrating the crucial role of the central bank in any long-run 

inflation. We also discuss how enhanced credibility can help to anchor 

inflationary expectations and explain the contributions of central bank 

independence, inflation targeting, and central bank reputation. In the 

last section of Chapter 29 we expand our discussion of the real-world 

difficulties in conducting macroeconomic policy. 

• More Patient Presentation of Models: In Chapter 26 we explain the 

effects of tax cuts on planned aggregate expenditure more carefully. In 

an optional box we also solve a simple Keynesian model, leaving the 

full model in the appendix, as in the second edition. In the diagrams 

in Chapter 28 we include the transitional short-run aggregate supply 

lines to illustrate how the short-run aggregate supply line shifts when 

actual output deviates from potential output. 

• Expanded Discussion of Supply-Side Economics: Most economists 

agree that changes in marginal tax rates can affect both aggregate demand 

and aggregate supply, but they disagree on the size of the effects. 

In Chapter 28 we describe this controversy in greater detail and present 

both the theoretical and empirical evidence of the effects of changes in 

marginal tax rates on aggregate supply. 

• Greater Attention to Asset Prices: In Chapter 21 we provide a clearer 

explanation of the inverse relationship between bond prices and interest 

rates. We also discuss the effects of changes in asset prices (especially 

stocks and houses) on aggregate demand. 

• Simpler Presentation of Exchange Rates: We use supply and demand 

curves to illustrate the determination of nominal exchange rates before 

we introduce the real exchange rate and purchasing-power-parity. 

• Additional Material on China: At its current rate of growth the Chinese 

economy may become the largest economy in the world within 

the next generation. In this edition we expand our discussion of China 

in the world economy. We discuss the determinants of its success and 

its management of its exchange rate. 

• New Material on the Acceleration of Productivity Growth: The 

productivity slowdown of 1973-1995 has been followed by surprisingly 

strong productivity growth. We present and discuss the reasons 

for this acceleration. 

• Updated Discussion of Saving and Investment: In addition to emphasizing 

the importance of public and private saving and the relationship 

between the budget deficit, national saving, and capital flows, we discuss 

the recently divergent trends in business and household saving. 

features 

• An Emphasis on Core Principles: A few core principles do most 

of the work in economics. By focusing on these principles, the text 

assures that students leave the course with a deep mastery of them. 

In contrast, traditional encyclopedic texts so overwhelm students 

with detail that they often leave the course with little useful working 

knowledge at all. 


produce “economic naturalists”--people who see each human action as 

the result of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation. The economic 

naturalist sees mundane details of ordinary existence in a new light and 

becomes actively engaged in the attempt to understand them. 

o Why don’t auto manufacturers make cars without heaters? 

o Why are whales, but not chickens, threatened with extinction? 

o Why do movie theaters give student discounts on the price of admission 

but not on the price of popcorn? 

• Active Learning Stressed: The only way to lean to hit an overhead 














and Behavior, (McGraw-Hill/Irwin), and has published such 

award-winning books as The Winner-Take-All-Society and Luxury Fever. 

Bernanke is the co-author of a best-selling intermediate macroeconomics 

text and has done significant research on the causes of the Great 

Depression, the role of financial markets and institutions in the business 

cycle, and measuring the effects of monetary policy on the economy. 

He was a member of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors for more 

than 2 years and is now the Chairman of the President’s Council of 

Economic Advisers. 

• Modern Macroeconomics: Recent developments have renewed 

interest in cyclical fluctuations while still paying attention to such 

long-run issues as growth, productivity, the evolution of real wages, 

and capital formation. Thus, we offer the following organization: A 

5-chapter treatment of long-run issues prior to an analysis of short-run 

fluctuations followed by a modern treatment of short-term fluctuations 

and stabilization policy, emphasizing the important distinction between 

short- and long-run behavior of the economy. Consistent with both media 

reporting and recent research on the central bank reaction function, 

we treat the interest rate rather than the money supply as the instrument 

of Fed policy. The analysis of aggregate demand and aggregate supply 

20

Economics 

relates output to inflation, rather than to the price level, sidestepping 

the necessity of a separate derivation of the link between the output 

gap and inflation. This book places a heavy emphasis on globalization, 

starting with an analysis of its effects on real wage inequality and progressing 

to such issues as the benefits of trade, the causes and effects of 

protectionism, the role of capital flows in domestic capital formation, 

the link between exchange rates and monetary policy, and the sources 

of speculative attacks on currencies. 







CONTENTS 

Part 1 Introduction. 1. Thinking Like an Economist. 2. Comparative 

Advantage: The Basis for Exchange. 3. Supply and Demand: An Introduction. 

Part 2 Macroeconomics: Issues and Data. 4. Macroeconomics: The 

Bird’s-Eye View of the Economy. 5. Measuring Economic Activity: GDP 

and Unemployment. 6. Measuring the Price Level and Inflation. Part 3 

The Economy in the Long Run. 7. Economic Growth, Productivity, and 

Living Standards. 8. Workers, Wages, and Unemployment in the Modern 

Economy. 9. Saving and Capital Formation. 10. Money and the Federal 

Reserve. 11. Financial Markets and International Capital Flow. Part 4 The 

Economy in the Short Run. 12. Short-term Economic Fluctuations: An 

Introduction. 13. Spending and Output in the Short Run. 14. Stabilizing 

the Economy: The Role of the Fed. 15. Inflation, Aggregate Supply, and 

Aggregate Demand. 16. The Practice and Pitfalls of Macroeconomic 

Policy. Part 5 The International Economy. 17. International Trade. 18. 

Exchange Rates and the Open Economy 


6th Edition 

By David Colander, Middlebury College 

2006 / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297885-8 / MHID: 0-07-297885-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322295-0 / MHID: 0-07-322295-X 

(with Paul Solman Videos Code Card) 



Principles of Macroeconomics textbook does not sacrifice 

intellectual depth in its quest for accessibility. The author’s primary 

concern is to instill “economic sensibility” in the student. 

Colander emphasizes the intellectual and historical context to 

which the economic models are applied. This new edition offers 

improvements to this established and respected text including 

special Questions from Alternate Perspectives end-of-chapter 

questions that facilitate class discussion of differing schools of 

thought in the discipline, and access to over 250 minutes of new 

videos from Paul Solman of the Lehrer NewsHour. 

Contents 



Policy Chapter 3: The Evolving U.S. Economy in Perspective Chapter 4: 

Supply and Demand Chapter 5: Using Supply and Demand Chapter 6: 

Economic Growth, Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Chapter 

7: National Income Accounting II: The Macroeconomic Framework 

Chapter 8: Growth, Productivity, and the Wealth of Nations Chapter 9: 

Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Modern Macroeconomics 

Chapter 10: The Multiplier Model III: Money, Inflation, and Monetary 

Policy Chapter 11: Money, Banking, and the Financial Sector Chapter 

12: Monetary Policy and the Debate about Macro Policy Chapter 13: 

Inflation and Its Relationship to Unemployment and Growth IV: Macro 

Policy in Perspective Chapter 14: Aggregate Demand Policy in Perspective 

Chapter 15: Politics, Deficits,and Debt Chapter 16: Macro Policies 

in Developing Countries V: International Policy Issues Chapter 17: 

International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and Outsourcing 

Chapter 18: International Financial Policy Chapter 19: Macro Policy in 

a Global Setting / Glossary / Colloquial Glossary / Index 

MICROECONOMICS DEMYSTIFIED 

By Craig Depken 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145911-2 / MHID: 0-07-145911-1 

A Professional Reference Title 

Microeconomics Demystified features a clear and easy-tounderstand 

presentation of the concepts and principles of microeconomics, 

with generous applications and examples. This 

self-teaching guide comes complete with key points, background 

information, quizzes at the end of each chapter, and even a final 

exam. Simple enough for beginners but challenging enough for 

advanced students, this is a lively and entertaining brush-up, 

introductory text, or classroom supplement. 

New 


8th Edition 

By John Jackson and Ron McIver, University of South Australia 

2006 (September 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471698-4 / MHID: 0-07-471698-0 

McGraw-Hill Australia Title 

CONTENTS 

Part 1, Introduction to Economics Ch 1, The nature and method of 

economics /Appendix: Graphs and their meaning Ch 2, The economising 

problem Ch 3, Demand and supply Part 2, Macroeconomic 

Activity and Fiscal Policy Ch 4, Australia’s national and international 

accounts/Appendix: Other national accounting concepts Ch 5, The 

macroeconomic environment Ch 6, Aggregate expenditures model and 

multipliers/Appendix: Derivation of the multipliers Ch 7, Aggregate 

demand and aggregate supply Ch 8, Fiscal policy and the public debate 

Part 3, Monetary Policy and Economic Stability Ch 9, Money, banking 

and the financial system Ch 10, How banks create money Ch 11, 

Monetary policy Ch 12, Macroeconomic ideas--evolution and debates 

Ch 13, Inflation Ch 14, Aggregate supply and the labour market Part 

4, Growth and Development Ch 15, The economics of growth Ch 16, 

Growth and the developing countries Part 5, Exchange Rates and the 

International Monetary System Ch 17, Models of the exchange rate 

Ch 18, The international monetary system 










21

Economics 

THE MACRO ECONOMY TODAY 

10th Edition 

By Bradley R Schiller, American University 

2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313783-4 / MHID: 0-07-313783-9 

(with Solman Videos DVD) 


Brad Schiller’s text, The Macroeconomy Today, 10/e, is noted 

for three great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and 

pedagogy. His accessible writing style engages students and 

brings some of the excitement of domestic and global economic 

news into the classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers 

must choose between government intervention and market 

reliance to resolve the core issues of what, how, and for whom 

to produce. This strategic choice is highlighted throughout 

the full range of micro, macro, and international issues. Every 

chapter ends with a policy issue that emphasizes the markets vs. 

government dilemma. And Schiller packs his chapters with the 

facts of economic life—real stories and applications, not fables. 

This is a book that teaches economics in a relevant context with 

careful pedagogy. It is also the only principles text that presents 

all macro theory in the single consistent context of the AS/AD 

framework. Schiller 10e is for students motivated by real-world 

policy issues who want to become economically literate. This 

is a book students actually READ. Schiller is also known for its 

cutting-edge and current coverage of today’s issues. 

Contents 


Using Graphs Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View Chapter 

3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Public Sector Part 2 MEASURING 

MACRO OUTCOMES Chapter 5 National-Income Accounting Chapter 

6 Unemployment Chapter 7 Inflation Part 3 CYCLICAL INSTABILITY 

Chapter 8 The Business Cycle Chapter 9 Aggregate Demand Appendix: 

The Keynesian Cross Chapter 10 Self-Adjustment or Instability? Part 4 

FISCAL POLICY LEVERS Chapter 11 Fiscal Policy Chapter 12 Deficits, 

Surpluses, and Debts Part 5 MONETARY POLICY OPTIONS Chapter 

13 Money and Banks Chapter 14 The Federal Reserve System Chapter 

15 Monetary Policy Part 6 SUPPLY-SIDE OPTIONS Chapter 16 Supply-Side 

Policy: Short-Run Options Chapter 17 Growth and Productivity: 

Long-Run Possibilities Part 7 POLICY CONSTRAINTS Chapter 18 

Global Macro Chapter 19 Theory and Reality Part 8 INTERNATIONAL 

ECONOMICS Chapter 20 International Trade Chapter 21 International 

Finance / Glossary / Index / Student Problem Sets 

PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS 

By Ben Bernanke, Princeton University, Nilss Olekalns, University of 

Melbourne and Robert H Frank, 

Cornell University 

2005 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471480-5 / MHID: 0-07-471480-5 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/au/bernanke 

This new Australian adaptation is based on the highly successful 

US Principles of Macroeconomics 2e, by Robert Frank and 

Ben Bernanke. The authors believe that the best way to acquire 

any skill – an overhead smash or a new language – is through 

repeated practice and the same active learning approach is used 

in this book. New ideas and concepts are introduced through 

simple examples which are repeated and reinforced through 

illustrations, examples and background notes. Students are 

challenged to think critically and analytically, applying core 

economic principles to each scenario. The result is a text that 

is motivating to students, effective and enjoyable to teach and 

which provides an exciting first course in macroeconomics. 

This Australian edition includes a wealth of new data, research, 

background and examples pertinent to the region. New chapters 

also cover important regional issues. The first two parts of the 

book recap key economic principles and examine some of the 

issues in macroeconomics, after which our Australian adaptation 

moves away from the more traditional structure of the US 

book, covering short-run macroeconomics first and then moving 

logically into the long run. The final two parts of the book cover 

open economy macroeconomics – so important to our global 

region – and conclude with a new capstone chapter. 


Part I: Core Principles of Economics Chapter 1: Economics and the 

market Chapter 2: Comparative advantage: the basis for trade Part II: 

Issues in Macroeconomics Chapter 3: Measuring macroeconomic 

performance: output and prices Chapter 4: Measuring macroeconomic 

performance: savings and wealth Chapter 5: Measuring macroeconomic 

performance: unemployment and the labour market Part III: Short-run 

Macroeconomics: The Analysis of the Business Cycle Chapter 6: Shortterm 

economic fluctuations Chapter 7: Spending and output in the short 

run Chapter 8: Money, prices and the Reserve Bank Chapter 9: The Reserve 

Bank and the economy Chapter 10: Inflation and aggregate supply 

Part IV: Long-run Macroeconomics: The Analysis of Economic Growth 

Chapter 11: The economy in the long run: an introduction to economic 

growth Chapter 12: The production function approach to understanding 

growth Chapter 13: Savings, capital formation and comparative economic 

growth Part V: Open Economy Macroeconomics Chapter 14: 

An introduction to the open economy Chapter 15: Exchange rates and 

the open economy Chapter 16: The balance of payments – net export 

and international capital flows Part VI : Concluding Thoughts Chapter 

17: Macroeconomics: what have we learnt? 



18th Edition 

By Paul Samuelson, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and William 

Nordhaus, Yale University 

2005 / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287206-4 / MHID: 0-07-287206-3 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111188-1 / MHID: 0-07-111188-3 [IE] 


samuelson18e 









PART ONE: BASIC CONCEPTS 1 The Fundamentals of Economics 

Appendix 1 How to Read Graphs 2 Markets and Government in a 

Modern Economy 3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand PART 

TWO: MACROECONOMICS: ECONOMIC GROWTH AND BUSI- 

NESS CYCLES Chapter 4 Overview of Macroeconomics Appendix 4 

Macroeconomic Data Chapter 5 Measuring Economic Activity Chapter 

6 Consumption and Investment Chapter 7 Business Fluctuations and the 

Theory of Aggregate Demand Chapter 8 The Multiplier Model Chapter 

9 Money, Banking, and Financial Markets Chapter 10 Central Banking 

and Monetary Policy PART THREE: ECONOMIC GROWTH AND 

MACROECONOMIC POLICY Chapter 11 The Process of Economic 

Growth Chapter 12 The Challenge of Economic Development Chapter 

13 Exchange Rates and the International Financial System Chapter 14 

Open-Economy Macroeconomics PART FOUR: UNEMPLOYMENT, 

INFLATION, AND ECONOMIC POLICY Chapter 15 Unemployment 

and the Foundations of Aggregate Supply Chapter 16 Ensuring Price 

Stability Chapter 17 The Warring Schools of Macroeconomics Chapter 

18 Policies for Growth and Stability 

22

Economics 



7th Edition 

By John Jackson, RMIT University, Melbourne and Ron Mclver, 

University of South Australia 

2003 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471323-5 / MHID: 0-07-471323-X 

(with Online Learning Center) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124264-6 / MHID: 0-07-124264-3 

[IE with Online Learning Center] 


Website: www.mhhe.com/jackson_macro7e 

CONTENTS 

Part One: Introduction to Economics Chapter 1 The nature and 

method of economics Chapter 2 The economising problem Chapter 

3 The mechanics of individual prices: demand and supply Part Two: 

Macroeconomic Activity and Fiscal Policy Chapter 4 Australia’s national 

and international accounts Chapter 5 Macroeconomic instability: 

unemployment, inflation and the current account deficit Chapter 6 

The aggregate expenditures model Chapter 7 Multipliers, government 

budgets and net exports Chapter 8 Aggregate demand and aggregate 

supply Chapter 9 Fiscal policy and the public debt Part Three: Monetary 

Policy and Economic Stability Chapter 10 Money, banking and 

the financial system Chapter 11 How banks create money Chapter 

12 The Reserve Bank of Australia and monetary policy Chapter 13 

Macroeconomic debates Chapter 14 Inflation Chapter 15 Aggregate 

supply and the labour market Part Four: Growth and Development 

Chapter 16 The economics of growth Chapter 17 Growth and the less 

developed countries Part Five: Exchange Rates and the International 

Monetary System Chapter 18 Models of the exchange rate Chapter 19 

The international monetary system 

Features 



texts. 






books. 


from the previous version, and the more obscure passages have been 

simplified. 

• Special In-Text Boxes: Dozens of self-help boxes anticipate and answer 

frequently asked questions. The book reviews math that students 







CONTENTS 

1 A Brief Economic History of the United States 2 Resource Utilization 

3 Supply and Demand 4 The Mixed Economy 5 Demand, Supply, and 

Equilibrium 6 Elasticities of Supply and Demand 7 Theory of Consumer 

Behavior 8 Cost 9 Profit, Loss, and Perfect Competition 10 Monopoly 

11 Monopolistic Competition 12 Oligopoly 13 Corporate Mergers and 

Antitrust 14 Demand in the Factor Market 15 Labor Unions 16 Labor 

Markets and Wage Rates 17 Rent, Interest, and Profit 18 Income Distribution 

and Poverty 19 International Trade 20 International Finance 

Principles of Microeconomics 

- Textbooks 

New 

MICROECONOMICS 

8th Edition 


2008 (September 2006) / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328147-6 / MHID: 0-07-328147-6 


Steve Slavin’s lively and comprehensive Microeconomics has 

a student-friendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a 







application to at least one of the concepts covered in the chapter. 

• New discussions have been added to provide yet more practical 

application to the overall text. 

• The discussion of comparative advantage in Chapter 19 has been written 

for simplicity and clarity, making it easier for students to learn. 


New 

PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS 

3rd Edition 

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University and Ben Bernanke, Princeton 

University 

2007 (November 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323060-3 / MHID: 0-07-323060-X 

(with Discover Econ Code Card) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110657-3 / MHID: 0-07-110657-X 



In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign 

languages, and other fields have achieved dramatic pedagogical 

gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach 

in favor of attempting to teach a short list of core principles in 

depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank 

and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach 

affords similar gains in introductory economics. Although recent 

editions of a few other texts have paid lip service to this 

new approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far the best thought out 

and best executed principles text in this mold. Avoiding excessive 

reliance on formal mathematical derivations, it presents 

concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar 

contexts. The authors introduce a well-articulated short list of 

core principles and reinforcing them by illustrating and applying 

each in numerous contexts. Students are periodically asked to 

apply these principles to answer related questions, exercises, 

and problems. The text also encourages students to become 

“Economic Naturalists,” people who employ basic economic 

principles to understand and explain what they observe in the 

world around them. An economic naturalist understands, for 

example, that infant safety seats are required in cars but not in 

23

Economics 

airplanes because the marginal cost of space to accommodate 

these seats is typically zero in cars but often hundreds of dollars 

in airplanes. Such examples engage student interest while teaching 

them to see each feature of their economic landscape as the 

reflection of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation. 


• A new core principle has been added to Chapter 1 that says “A 

person [or a firm or a society] is more likely to take an action if its 

benefit rises, and less likely to take it if its cost rises. In short, incentives 

matter.” Also the discussion of positive vs. normative economics 

has been expanded. 

• The supplements package has been extensively revised and improved. 

We have new authors for the Test Bank and the Study Guide. 

This material has also been extensively checked for accuracy. These 

improvements should help in the difficult tasks of learning and of teaching 

Principles of Microeconomics. 

• The international trade chapter [now Chapter 9] has been made 

more robust and moved forward. Because international trade involves 

important micro principles and policy issues, students will benefit greatly 

from this expanded coverage early in the book. 

• The strategy chapter [now Chapter 11] has been revised to include 

more on oligopoly and monopolistic competition--two topics that are 

typically used to present game theory. 

• Indifference curve material has been added as an appendix to 

Chapter 5. In the Second Edition this material was placed on the web 

site; in this edition, it is a part of the text, making it easier for students 

to access it. 

• DiscoverEcon with Solman Videos: We now have an interactive 

software program for homework management, tutorials, videos, and 

assessment. This software houses both the best-selling tutorial software 

for Principles of Economics, and brand-new videos featuring Paul Solman 

of the NewsHour with Jim Lehrer on PBS. This product includes 

250 minutes of video that explains introductory economic concepts in 

a real-world, student-friendly manner. DiscoverEcon includes updated 

graphing applets, interactive exercises, animated tutorials, and hundreds 

of multiple-choice questions to test student comprehension in each book 

chapter. The videos are integrated into the website and are available 

web streaming or on DVD. 

FEATURES 

• An Emphasis on Core Principles: A few core principles do most of the 

work in economics. By focusing on these principles, the text assures that 

students leave the course with a deep mastery of them. In contrast, traditional 

encyclopedic texts so overwhelm students with detail that they 

often leave the course with little useful working knowledge at all. 


produce “economic naturalists” –people who see each human action as 

the result of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation. The economic 

naturalist sees mundane details of ordinary existence in a new light and 

becomes actively engaged in the attempt to understand them. 

• Why don’t auto manufacturers make cars without heaters? 

• Why are whales, but not chickens, threatened with extinction? 

• Why do movie theaters give student discounts on the price of admission 

but not on the price of popcorn? 

• Active Learning Stressed: The only way to learn to hit an overhead 














and Behavior, (McGraw-Hill/Irwin), and has published 

such award-winning books as The Winner-Take-All-Society and Luxury 

Fever. Bernanke is the co-author of a best-selling intermediate macroeconomics 

text and has done significant research on the causes of the 

Great Depression, the role of financial markets and institutions in the 

business cycle, and measuring the effects of monetary policy on the 

economy. He is a member of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors 

under Alan Greenspan. 

• Modern Microeconomics: Economic surplus, introduced in Chapter 

1 and applied repeatedly thereafter, is more fully developed here than 

in any other text. This concept underlies the argument for economic 

efficiency as an important social goal. Rather than speak of tradeoffs 

between efficiency and other goals, the authors stress that maximizing 

economic surplus facilitates the achievement of all goals. The tendency 

to ignore opportunity costs, the tendency not to ignore sunk costs, and 

the tendency to confuse average and marginal costs and benefits—common 

decision pitfalls identified by 2002 Nobel Laureate Daniel Kahneman 

and others—are introduced early in Chapter 1. The book devotes a 

chapter to the economics of information, making available in intuitively 

accessible form key insights that earned the 2001 Nobel Prize in economics 

for George Akerlof, Joseph Stiglitz, and Michael Spence. 







• Introductory Material Refined: The material in chapter 1 is presented 

in such a way as to launch these important concepts as clearly and 

efficiently as possible. From the very beginning, the focus is on how 

rational people make choices among alternative courses of action. 

• Cost Curve Coverage: The authors introduce average total cost 

and average variable cost curves in Chapter 6. Taking great pains to 

make the presentation as simple and uncluttered as possible, no single 

diagram ever portrays more than three cost curves at once, and most 

employ only two. This treatment remains faithful the authors’ belief 

that a full-blown treatment of production functions and cost curves is 

ill advised at the principles level while providing teachers with greater 

flexibility. For example, it enables instructors to discuss a firm’s shut 

down condition graphically and to portray profits and losses graphically. 

It also facilitates an enriched discussion of the invisible hand process by 

which profit and loss signals drive resource allocation in competitive 

markets (Chapter 8). 

• Streamlined Discussion of Labor Markets and Income Redistribution: 

Frank and Bernanke’s Chapter 13 condenses coverage on Labor Markets 

and Income Redistribution, eliminating sections on monopsony and 

comparable worth, utilitarianism, tax policy and occupational choice, 

progressive consumption taxation, and redistribution and cost-benefit 

analysis. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Introduction 1. Thinking Like an Economist 2. Comparative Advantage: 

The Basis for Exchange 3. Supply and Demand: An Introduction 

Part 2 Competition and the Invisible Hand 4. Elasticity 5. Demand: 

The Benefit Side of the Market 6. Perfectly Competitive Supply: The 

Cost Side of the Market 7. Efficiency and Exchange 8. The Quest for 

Profit and the Invisible Hand Part 3 International Trade 9. International 

Trade and Trade Policy Part 4 Market Imperfections 10. Monopoly 

and Other Forms of Imperfect Competition 11. Thinking Strategically: 

A Further Look at Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly 12. Externalities 

and Property Rights 13. The Economics of Information Part 5 

Economics of Public Policy 14. Labor Markets, Poverty, and Income 

Distribution 15. The Environment, Health, and Safety 16. Public Goods 

and Tax Policy 

24

Economics 


6th Edition 

By David Colander, Middlebury College 

2006 / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297884-1 / MHID: 0-07-297884-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322296-7 / MHID: 0-07-322296-8 

(with DiscoverEcon with Paul Solman Videos Code Card) 



Principles of Microeconomics textbook does not sacrifice 

intellectual depth in its quest for accessibility. The author’s primary 

concern is to instill “economic sensibility” in the student. 

Colander emphasizes the intellectual and historical context to 

which the economic models are applied. This new edition offers 

improvements to this established and respected text including 

special Questions from Alternate Perspectives end-of-chapter 

questions that facilitate class discussion of differing school of 

thought in the discipline, and access to over 250 minutes of new 

videos from Paul Solman of the Lehrer NewsHour. 

Contents 



Policy Chapter 3: The Evolving U.S. Economy in Perspective Chapter 

4: Supply and Demand Chapter 5: Using Supply and Demand II: Microeconomics 

I: Microeconomics: The Basics Chapter 6: Describing 

Supply and Demand: Elasticities Chapter 7: Taxation and Government 

Intervention II: Foundations of Supply and Demand Chapter 8: The 

Logic of Individual Choice: The Foundation of Supply and Demand 

Chapter 9: Production and Cost Analysis I Chapter 10: Production and 

Cost Analysis II III: Market Structure and Policy Chapter 11: Perfect 

Competition Chapter 12: Monopoly Chapter 13: Monopolistic Competition, 

Oligopoly, and Strategic Pricing Chapter 14: Real-World Competition 

and Technology Chapter 15: Antitrust Policy and Regulation IV: 

Factor Markets Chapter 16: Work and the Labor Market Chapter 17: 

Who Gets What? The Distribution of Income V: Applying Economic 

Reasoning to Policy Chapter 18: Government Policy and Market Failures 

Chapter 19: Politics and Economics: The Case of Agriculture Markets 

Chapter 20: Microeconomic Policy, Economic Reasoning, and Beyond 

Chapter 21: International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and 

Outsourcing 

THE MICRO ECONOMY TODAY 

10th Edition 


2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313784-1 / MHD: 0-07-313784-7 

(with DiscoverEcon with Solman Videos DVD) 


Brad Schiller’s text, The Microeconomy Today, 10/e, is noted 

for three great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and 

pedagogy. His accessible writing style engages students and 

brings some of the excitement of domestic and global economic 

news into the classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers 

must choose between government intervention and market reliance 

to resolve the core issues of what, how, and for whom to 

produce. This strategic choice is highlighted throughout the full 

range of micro, macro, and international issues. Every chapter 

ends with a policy issue that emphasizes the markets vs. government 

dilemma. And Schiller packs his chapters with the facts of 

economic life—real stories and applications, not fables. This is a 

book that teaches economics in a relevant context with careful 

pedagogy. Schiller 10e is for students motivated by real-world 

policy issues who want to become economically literate. This 

is a book students actually READ. Schiller is also known for its 

cutting-edge and current coverage of today’s issues. 

Contents 


Using Graphs Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View 

Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Public Sector Part 2 

PRODUCT MARKETS: THE BASICS Chapter 5 The Demand for Goods 

Appendix: Indifference Curves Chapter 6: The Costs of Production Part 

3 MARKET STRUCTURE Chapter 7 The Competitive Firm Chapter 

8 Competitive Markets Chapter 9 Monopoly Chapter 10 Oligopoly 

Chapter 11 Monopolistic Competition Part 4 REGULATORY ISSUES 

Chapter 12 (De)Regulation of Business Chapter 13 Environmental 

Protection Chapter 14 The Farm Problem Part 5 FACTOR MARKETS: 

BASIC THEORY Chapter 15 The Labor Market Chapter 16 Labor Unions 

Chapter 17 Financial Markets Part 6 DISTRIBUTIONAL ISSUES Chapter 

18 Taxes: Equity vs. Efficiency Chapter 19 Transfer Payments: Welfare 

and Social Security Part 7 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Chapter 

20 International Trade Chapter 21 International Finance / Glossary / 

Index / Student Problem Sets 



18th Edition 

By Paul Samuelson, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and William 

Nordhaus, Yale University 

2005 / 464 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287207-1 / MHID: 0-07-287207-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111298-7 / MHID: 0-07-111298-7 [IE] 


samuelson18e 








CONTENTS 

Part One: Basic Concepts 1 The Fundamentals of Economics Appendix 1 

How to Read Graphs 2 Markets and Government in a Modern Economy 

3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand Part Two: Microeconomics: 

Supply, Demand, and Product Markets 4 Applications of Supply and 

Demand 5 Demand and Consumer Behavior Appendix 5 Geometrical 

Analysis of Consumer Equilibrium 6 Production and Business Organization 

7 Analysis of Costs Appendix 7 Production, Cost Theory, and 

Decision of the Firm 8 Analysis of Perfectly Competitive Markets 9 

Imperfect Competition and Monopoly 10 Oligopoly and Monopolistic 

Competition 11 Uncertainty and Game Theory Part Three: Factor 

Markets: Labor, Land, and Capital 12 How Markets Determine Incomes 

13 The Labor Market 14 Land and Capital Appendix 14 Markets and 

Economic Efficiency Part Four: Applied Microeconomics: International 

Trade, Government, and the Environment 15 Comparative Advantage 

and Protectionism 16 Government Taxation and Expenditure 17 Promoting 

More Efficient Markets 18 Protecting the Environment 19 Efficiency 

vs. Equality: The Big Tradeof 

25

Economics 



7th Edition 

By John Jackson, RMIT University, Melborne and Ron Mclver, 

University of South Australia 

2003 / 568 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471324-2 / MHID: 0-07-471324-8 

(with Online Learning Center) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124268-4 / MHID: 0-07-124268-6 

[IE with Online Learning Center] 


Website: www.mhhe.com/jackson_micro7e 

CONTENTS 

PART ONE: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS Chapter 1 The nature 

and method of economics Chapter 2 The economising problem Chapter 

3 The mechanics of individual prices: demand and supply PART TWO: 

AN OVERVIEW OF MICROECONOMICS Chapter 4 Allocation and the 

market system Chapter 5 The organisation of production in the Australian 

economy PART THREE: THE ECONOMICS OF MARKETS Chapter 

6 Demand and supply: elasticity and its applications Chapter 7 Consumer 

behaviour Chapter 8 An overview of market structures Chapter 

9 The costs of production Chapter 10 Price and output determination: 

pure competition Chapter 11 Pure monopoly Chapter 12 Price and 

output determination: monopolistic competition Chapter 13 Price and 

output determination: oligopoly Chapter 14 The demand for economic 

resources Chapter 15 The pricing and employment of resources: wage 

determination Chapter 16 Rent, interest and profits PART FOUR: THE 

ROLE OF GOVERNMENT Chapter 17 Market failure and resource allocation 

Chapter 18 The economics of income distribution: inequality 

and poverty PART FIVE: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Chapter 19 

Australia’s trade, and the economics of free trade and protection 

• Many Real World Examples. Brue/McConnell places a strong emphasis 

on real-world examples. “Illustrating the Idea” features use analogies 

to illustrate theory discussed in the book. For example, a ratchet wrench 

analogy describes the asymmetry of price-level changes. In the essentials 

course where there is limited time to linger over topics, such discussions 

help students learn more quickly and breathe some life into what can 

otherwise be rather tedious discussions. 

• Interesting Memorable Applications. “Applying the Analysis” sections 

walk students through economic theories and ideas and help cement 

comprehension. For example, the basics of the economic perspective 

are applied to why customers tend to try to wait in the shortest checkout 

lines. Differences in elasticity of supply are contrasted by the changing 

prices of antiques versus reproductions. 

• Same High Quality Supplements As McConnell and Brue. The Study 

Guide is written by Bill Walstad at the University of Nebraska and the 

Testbank and Instructor’s Manual are written by Randy Grant at Linfield 

College in close collaboration with text author Stan Brue. 

CONTENTS 

Part One: Introduction Chapter 1: Limits, Alternatives, and Choices 

Chapter 2: The Market System and the Circular Flow Part Two: Price, 

Quantity, and Efficiency Chapter 3: Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium 

Chapter 4: Elasticity of Demand and Supply Chapter 5: Market 

Failure: A Role for Government Part Three: Product Markets Chapter 

6: Businesses and Their Costs Chapter 7: Pure Competition Chapter 8: 

Pure Monopoly Chapter 9: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly 

Chapter 10: Wage Determination Chapter 11: Income Inequality and 

Poverty Part Four: Macroeconomic Measurement, Models, and Fiscal 

Policy Chapter 12: Introduction to GDP, Growth, and Instability Chapter 

13: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Chapter 14: Fiscal Policy, 

Deficits, and Debt Part Five: Money, Banking, and Monetary Policy 

Chapter 15: Money and Banking Chapter 16: Monetary Policy Part Six: 

Economic Growth and International Economics Chapter 17: Economic 

Growth Chapter 18: International Trade / Glossary 

Survey of Economics 


New 


New 

ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMICS 

By Stanley L Brue, Pacific Lutheran University and Campbell R Mc- 

Connell 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301967-3 / MHID: 0-07-301967-4 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110634-4 / MHID: 0-07-110634-0 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/brueonline.com 

Building on the tremendous success of their best-selling Principles 

of Economics text, Brue and McConnell have written a new 

one semester text to provide a fresh alternative. This new, 18- 

chapter textbook will appeal to anyone teaching a one-semester 

introductory course. Brue/McConnell is a patient, substantive 

treatment of micro and macro economics for the one-semester 

course with many, up-to-date, motivating examples. 

Features 

• An Entirely New Book, Not a “Cut and Paste” of McConnell/Brue. 

Many other textbooks in the principles markets create essentials books 

by simply providing a smaller number of the exact same chapters found 

in their companion, two-semester principles text. While this is quick and 

easy for the author, the student suffers from the bad transitions between 

topics and struggles with rigor that is often too high for the one-semester 

course. Brue/McConnell thoroughly reworks all topics so that chapter 

order, level of difficulty, and readability are more appropriate for the 

faster-paced essentials course. 

ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMICS 

6th Edition 


2007 (June 2006) / 448 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340279-6 / MHID: 0-07-340279-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110146-2 / MHID: 0-07-110146-2 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/schilleressentials6 

Essentials of Economics is the market leader for the one-semester 

survey course. In just about 400 pages, it provides a solid introduction 

to the core concepts of economics with an emphasis on 

real-world examples and current events. Essentials has earned its 

popular success because, unlike other books on the market, it is 

free of the abstract and complex theory that requires more time 

than this course allows. Instead, the text is clean and concise, 

with many examples of significance to students today, including 

Headlines and Policy Perspectives that use current events 

to help illustrate the topics discussed. This real-world policy 

emphasis is a distinctive feature of Schiller’s text and is integral 

to its dominance of the survey text market. 


• Full Updates Throughout the Text. Every chapter of the Sixth Edition 

of Schiller’s Essentials of Economics includes a myriad of updates 

including new and updated Policy Perspective discussions, recent 

headlines, and the latest data on topics such as college graduate salaries 

and growth and productivity. 

• New Discussions. The Sixth edition includes discussions on key 

topics of current economic interest, such as the redistributive role 

of the tax/transfer system in Chapter 9, and the Greenspan-Bernanke 

26

Economics 

transition and alternative strategies for monetary policy in Chapter 14, 

among others. 

• Current Headlines. New articles on the impact of Hurricane Katrina 

on gasoline prices, transportation costs, and SUV sales; monopoly 

pricing at hub airports; the competitive price squeeze on laptop computers; 

the debate over arctic drilling; the earnings of college coaches; 

unrelenting tuition inflation; and the sugar lobby’s opposition to 

CAFTA have all been added to the Sixth edition. These new headlines 

will help to underscore the importance and relevance of economics 

in everyone’s lives and will motivate non-majors into conscientious 

study of the material. 

Features 

• Policy Emphasis: Brad Schiller teaches economic principles in the 

context of the decisions that state, local, and federal governments face, 

thereby teaching students that the principles are relevant to the realworld 

and that they impact their lives every day. The book includes 

Policy Perspectives that demonstrate how economics influences policy. 

What the students learn in the course directly relates to what they hear 

on the news, and they are more motivated to learn as they see this 

real-world connection. 

• “Living Econ” Feature: Building on the real-world emphasis of Essentials, 

Living Econ is a end-of-chapter section that promotes economic 

literacy by relating the chapter concepts to what is most important 

to every student: his or her own life. Created by Linda Wilson of the 

University of Texas at Arlington and Mark Maier of Glendale Community 

College, Living Econ explores provocative and relevant questions 

such as: How much will I earn? Why should I care about interest rates? 

Should I vote my pocketbook? How can I communicate with a large 

corporation? How come there aren’t enough levees? 

• By bringing the concepts alive, this section gives students the opportunity 

to consider why economics matters to them. This glimpse 

into the big picture will help them see what it takes to think like an 

economically-literate citizen. For those who want a bit more discussion 

of the topics in Living Econ, additional material can be found in 

the Study Guide. 

• Bulleted Chapter Summaries at the end of each chapter. These help 

students digest and review what they’ve read. 

• Terms to Remember appear at the end of each chapter to aid student 

retention. 

• End-of-chapter Questions for Discussion and Problems provide 

student feedback and reinforce concepts. 

• Web Activities send students out to the web to find real-life data and 

solve economic problems. 

Contents 

Section I: Basics Chapter 1 The Challenge of Economics Chapter 2 The 

U.S. Economy Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Section II: Microeconomics 

Chapter 4 Consumer Demand Chapter 5 Supply Decisions Chapter 6 

Competition Chapter 7 Monopoly Chapter 8 The Labor Market Chapter 9 

Government Intervention Section III: Macroeconomics Chapter 10 The 

Business Cycle Chapter 11 Aggregate Supply and Demand Chapter 12 

Fiscal Policy Chapter 13 Money and Banks Chapter 14 Monetary Policy 

Chapter 15 Economic Growth Chapter 16 Theory and Reality Section 

IV: International Chapter 17 International Trade / Glossary / Index 

New 

FOUNDATIONS OF ECONOMICS 

3rd Edition 

By David Begg, Principal of Tanaka Business School, Imperial 

College, University of London 

2006 (March 2006) / 352 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711423-7 / MHID: 0-07-711423-X 


Foundations of Economics, third edition is ideal for students 

taking introductory economics modules as part of an interdisciplinary 

course. Building on the success of the second edition, 

the book provides accessible overviews of key economic topics, 

interweaving these with real-world examples and practical 

activities to equip students to think for themselves. 

Features 

• Topical and up-to-date material, presented alongside real-world 

examples and policy problems 

• Mini case studies taken from disciplines such as construction, sport 

and computing, to demonstrate the practical application of economics 

• Increased microeconomic coverage; including separate chapters 

on supply, demand and markets, to provide students with a thorough 

grounding in these fundamental areas 

• A revised structure to the macroeconomics section, beginning with 

growth, cycles, and issues, before introducing analysis and explanations 

• Learning outcomes and recaps in each chapter, allowing students to 

track their progress and understanding through the text 

• Key terms, clearly defined throughout each chapter 

• Review questions and answers in each chapter, to test understanding 

and application of the topics covered 

• An easy-to-navigate layout and design, with clearly signposted features 

and photos and figures to illustrate important concepts 

CONTENTS 

Preface. 1 What is economics? 2 Demand. 3 Supply. 4 Costs, supply 

and perfect competition. 5 Market structure and imperfect competition. 

6 Input markets and income distribution. 7 Governing the market. 8 The 

income and output of nations. 9 Short-run fluctuations in income and 

output. 10 Interest rates, money, and inflation. 11 Aggregate supply, 

inflation, and unemployment. 12 Exchange rates and the balance of 

payments. 13 The global economy. Answers to Questions. Glossary 

27

Economics 

Economics for Business 

Economics Issues 

New 


New 

ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS 

2nd Edition 

By David Begg, University of London and Damian Ward, Bradford 

University 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711451-0 / MHID: 0-07-711451-5 


Economics for Business, second edition is an essential introduction 

to economics, tailor-made for business students. The text 

demonstrates the relevance of applying economic principles to 

solve business problems, using a unique approach that starts 

with the business problem before employing economics as the 

solution. Key economic theories are therefore clearly explained 

within the context of modern business, drawing on a wealth of 

contemporary examples to bring the topics to life. The supporting 

features and exercises allow students to consolidate their 

learning and equip them with the economic tools to confront 

real business situations. 

Features 

• New coverage of auction theory, addressing this increasingly prolific 

topic with reference to the impact of internet auction sites such 

as eBay 

• Revised macroeconomic coverage, signposting the major issues 

within a business orientation 

• Fully updated European and international examples and cases, that 

allow students to engage with topics in a relevant context 

• Improved pedagogical features, which integrate economic theory and 

business issues and check students’ learning as they progress through 

the text. A variety of exercises are provided to cater for different learning 

environments and abilities 

CONTENTS 

Part I: Introduction Chapter 1: Economics for business Part II: Understanding 

markets Chapter 2: Consumers in the market place Chapter 

3: Firms in the market place Chapter 4: Markets in action Part III: 

Competition and profitability Chapter 5: Market structure and firm 

performance Chapter 6: Strategic rivalry Chapter 7: Growth strategies 

Chapter 8: Governing business Part IV: Domestic macroeconomics 

Chapter 9: Introduction to the macroeconomy Chapter 10: Measuring 

macroeconomic variables and policy issues Chapter 11: Economic 

stability and demand side policies Chapter 12: Supply side policies and 

economic growth Part V: Global economics Chapter 13: Exchange rates 

and the balance of payments Chapter 14: Globalization 

ISSUES IN ECONOMICS TODAY 

3rd Edition 

By Robert Guell, Indiana State University 

2007 (January 2006) / 448 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313752-0 / MHID: 0-07-313752-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110664-1 / MHID: 0-07-110664-2 [IE] 

Issues in Economics Today is a modern issues book that presents 

the latest and most interesting topics. Most importantly, this title 

was developed to allow instructors the maximum flexibility to 

teach this material in a manner that fits their personal style. Some 

professors like to intertwine theory and issues while others like 

to lay the theoretical foundation first before heading into the 

issues. Some faculty will choose to set a theme for their course 

and pick issues consistent with that theme while others will 

let their students decide what issues interest them. Beginning 

with eight intensive core theory chapters and followed by 33 

shorter issues chapters, there is no right way to use the book. 

The 33 issues chapters are divided into the following categories: 

Macroeconomic Issues, International Issues, Externalities 

and Market Failure, Health Issues, Government Solutions to 

Societal Problems, Discrimination Issues, Price Control Issues, 

and Miscellaneous Markets. These groupings help instructors 

navigate through the Table of Contents when looking for a 

particular topic. This book also has the benefit of having timely 

web-available chapters that allow students to study issues as 

they happen. Between the time the first edition went to press 

and this edition became available, the accounting scandals of 

2002 occurred. During the book’s first year the U.S. went to 

war in Iraq. Before this edition hit college bookstores, the Housing 

Bubble was of significant concern. Chapters discussing the 

economic impact of these events were available within a month 

of these events on the web. 


• New Chapters— New chapters examine the economic impact of 

Wal-Mart, the economic impact of casino gambling, and why college 

textbooks cost so much. These chapters, originally posted as web chapters 

to accompany the second edition, have been updated and expanded 

for inclusion in the textbook. Chapter 37: The Cost of War, uses the 

example of the recent War on Iraq and updates the material to focus on 

the occupation costs rather than simply the invasion. Similarly, Chapter 

38: The Economics of Terrorism, uses the example of the September 

11 attacks to examine the effects of terrorism on the national economy 

and how the government responded. In its revised form this chapter 

discusses subsequent terrorist acts, like the London bombings of July 

2005 to emphasize important points. 

• Combined Chapters— In response to reviewer feedback, the Gender 

and Race and Affirmative Action chapters from the second edition have 

been combined as Chapter 26: Gender, Race and Affirmative Action. 

In addition, the content of chapter on the Consumer Price Index was 

folded into Chapter 6’s discussion of problems with the measurement 

of inflation. 

• Kick It up a Notch— This popular feature has been expanded to more 

chapters and encourages students to challenge themselves with slightly 

more advanced concepts. For those who want extra practice, this section 

contains additional material that can be found in the Study Guide. 

• All new Quiz Yourself Questions— To counter homework banks, 

the text’s “Quiz Yourself,” “Talk About This,” and “Think About This” 

questions have been changed for chapters that date back to the first 

edition. 

28

Economics 

• Frequent Web Updates— New economic issues arise all the time 

and these Web chapters are posted throughout the life of the edition. 

The author is committed to continually posting issues that matter to 

today’s students. 

Features 

• Conversational Writing Style— Students not majoring in economics 

appreciate and connect with the text’s writing style. Students feel at ease 

with the material allowing them to feel more confident. 

• Chapter Outline and Chapter Objectives— Setting the stage at the 

beginning of each chapter, these features show students how the chapter 

is organized and what to anticipate in each chapter. 

• Key Terms— Defined throughout the text in the margins, these terms 

are also included in the text’s Glossary. 

• Summaries— Found at the end of each chapter, this material reinforces 

the chapter lessons. 

• Issue Chapters You Are Ready for Now— This section can be found 

at the end of each theory chapter, and it directs students to the issues 

chapters that may interest them once they’ve mastered the necessary 

theoretical principles. 

• Quiz Yourself— These questions are perfect for self-quizzing at the 

end of each chapter. 

• Think About This— Provocative questions throughout the text encourage 

students to think about how economic theories apply to the 

real world. 

• Talk About This— Several questions are included to trigger in-class 

or group discussions. 

• For More Insight See— This feature guides readers to outside websites 

and publications to find additional material on a given topic. This feature 

keeps the course as fresh and current as today’s newspaper. 

Contents 

Chapter 1 Economics: The Study of Opportunity Cost. Chapter 2 Supply 

and Demand. Chapter 3 The Concept of Elasticity and Consumer 

and Producer Surplus. Chapter 4 Firm Production, Cost, and Revenue. 

Chapter 5 Perfect Competition, Monopoly, and Economic versus Normal 

Profit. Chapter 6 Every Macroeconomic Word You Ever Heard: Gross 

Domestic Product, Inflation, Unemployment, Recession, and Depression. 

Chapter 7 Interest Rates and Present Value. Chapter 8 Aggregate 

Demand and Aggregate Supply. Chapter 9 Federal Spending. Chapter 

10 Federal Deficits, Surpluses, and the National Debt. Chapter 11 

Fiscal Policy. Chapter 12 Monetary Policy. Chapter 13 International 

Trade: Does it Jeopardize American Jobs? Chapter 14 The International 

Monetary Fund: Doctor or Witch Doctor? Chapter 15 NAFTA, CAFTA, 

GATT, WTO: Are Trade Agreements Good for Us? Chapter 16 Tobacco, 

Alcohol, Drugs, and Prostitution. Chapter 17 The Environment. Chapter 

18 Health Care. Chapter 19 Government Provided Health Insurance: 

Medicaid, Medicare, and the Child Health Insurance Program. Chapter 

20 The Economics of Prescription Drugs. Chapter 21 The Economics of 

Crime. Chapter 22 Education. Chapter 23 Poverty and Welfare. Chapter 

24 Social Security. Chapter 25 Head Start. Chapter 26 The Economics 

of Race and Sex Discrimination. Chapter 27 Farm Policy. Chapter 28 

Minimum Wage. Chapter 29 Rent Control. Chapter 30 Ticket Brokers 

and Ticket Scalping. Chapter 31 Personal Income Taxes. Chapter 32 

Antitrust. Chapter 33 Energy Prices. Chapter 34 If We Build It, Will They 

Come? And Other Sports Questions. Chapter 35 The Stock Market and 

Crashes. Chapter 36 Unions. Chapter 37 The Cost of War. Chapter 38 

The Economics of Terrorism. Chapter 39 Wal-Mart: Always Low Prices 

(And Low Wages) – Always. Chapter 40 The Economic Impact of Casino 

Gambling. Chapter 41 Why College Textbooks Cost So Much. Chapter 

42 Housing Bubble 


ECONOMICS OF SOCIAL ISSUES 

17th Edition 

By Ansel M. Sharp, University of the South, Charles A. Register, 

Florida Atlantic University—Boca Raton and Paul W. Grimes, Mississippi 

State University – Mississippi State 

2006 / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298435-4 / MHID: 0-07-298435-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111654-1 / MHID: 0-07-111654-0 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/sharp17 

Designed as an introduction to general economics for non-majors, 

Sharp/Register/Grimes’ Economics of Social Issues presents 

economic concepts as useful tools to analyze contemporary 

social issues. Each chapter presents economic concepts then 

places them within the context of very current issues facing 

society. The book may also be used to supplement principles 

courses with lively social issues to add relevance to the economic 

principles being taught. 

Contents 

1. Alleviating Human Misery: The Role of Economic Reasoning 2. 

Economic Systems, Resource Allocation, and Social Well-Being: Lessons 

from China’s Transition 3. Government Control of Prices in Mixed 

Systems: What Are the Actual Outcomes 4. Pollution Problems: Must 

We Foul Our Own Nests? 5. Economics of Crime and Its Prevention: 

How Much Is Too Much? 6. The Economics of Education: Crisis and 

Reform 7. Poverty Problems and Discrimination: Why Are So Many 

Still So Poor? 8. The Economics of Big Business: Who Does What to 

Whom?9. The Economics of Professional Sports: What Is the Real Score? 

10. Protectionism Versus Free Trade: Can We Restrict Ourselves into 

Prosperity? 11. Unemployment Issues: Why Do We Waste Our Labor 

Resources? 12. Inflation: How to Gain and Lose at the Same Time13. 

Economic Growth: Are We Living in a “New Economy”? 14. Government 

Spending, Taxing, and the National Debt: Who Wins and Who 

Loses? 15. Social Security and Medicare: How Secure Is Our Safety 

Net for the Elderly? 

TAKING SIDES: Clashing Views on 

Controversial Economic Issues 

12th Edition 

By Frank J Bonello, University of Notre Dame 

2006 / 448 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312952-5 / MHID: 0-07-312952-6 

A McGraw-Hill/Dushkin Title 

Website: http://www.dushkin.com/text/catalog/0073129526 

This debate-style reader is designed to introduce students to 

controversies in global issues through readings that reflect a 

variety of viewpoints. Each issue is framed with an issue summary, 

an issue introduction, and a postscript. The Taking Sides 

readers feature annotated listings of selected World Wide Web 

sites. Taking Sides is supported by our student website at www. 

dushkin.com/online/. 

Contents 

PART 1. Microeconomic Issues ISSUE 1. Are Profits the Only Business 

of Business? New! ISSUE 2. Should the Regulations Regarding Overtime 

Pay Be Changed? ISSUE 3. Is There Discrimination in U.S. Labor 

Markets? New! ISSUE 4. Will the Medicare Modernization Act of 2003 

and Its Drug Discount Cards Lower the Cost of Prescription Drugs for 

Seniors? ISSUE 5. Should Markets Be Allowed to Solve the Shortage in 

Body Parts? ISSUE 6. Is It Time to Reform Medical Malpractice Litigation? 

PART 2. Macroeconomic Issues New! ISSUE 7. Is Wal-Mart Good 

for the Economy? New! ISSUE 8. Should Social Security Be Changed 

to Include Personal Retirement Accounts? New! ISSUE 9. Should the 

Double Taxation of Corporate Dividends Be Eliminated? New! ISSUE 

10. Are Credit Card Companies Exploiting American Consumers? ISSUE 

29

Economics 

11. Is It Time to Abolish the Minimum Wage? ISSUE 12. Are Declining 

Caseloads a Sign of Successful Welfare Reform? PART 3. The World 

Around Us ISSUE 13. Are Protectionist Policies Bad for America? ISSUE 

14. Should We Sweat About Sweatshops? ISSUE 15. Are the Costs of 

Global Warming Too High to Ignore? New! ISSUE 16. Do Living Wage 

Laws Improve Economic Conditions in Cities? ISSUE 17. Has the North 

American Free Trade Agreement Hurt the American Economy? New! 

ISSUE 18. Is the No Child Left Behind Act Working? 

Intermediate Macroeconomics 


macroeconomics 

2nd Edition 

By Bradford DeLong, University of California—Berkeley 

2006 / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287758-8 / MHID: 0-07-287758-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111113-3 / MHID: 0-07-111113-1 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/delong2 

Macroeconomics 2e offers a new approach to the subject. 

Drawing upon vast experience teaching, researching, and advising 

the U.S. government on policy has enabled the authors to 

write an intermediate macroeconomics book that will set the 

standard for books in this area for years to come. For example, 

DeLong/Olney focuses on the interest rate rather than the AS/AD 

diagram and includes expanded coverage of the crucial topic of 

long-run growth. This lively text is modern, provides extensive 

insight into economic policy, incorporates a strong international 

perspective, and offers a broad historical perspective. 

Contents 

Part I Preliminaries 1 Introduction to Macroeconomics 2 Measuring 

the Macroeconomy 3 Thinking Like an Economist Part II Long-Run 

Economic Growth 4 The Theory of Economic Growth 5 The Reality of 

Economic Growth: History and Prospect Part III Flexible-Price Macroeconomics 

6 Building Blocks of the Flexible-Price Model 7 Equilibrium 

in the Flexible-Price Model 8 Money, Prices, and Inflation Part IV 

Sticky-Price Macroeconomics 9 The Sticky-Price Income-Expenditure 

Framework: Consumption and the Multiplier 10 Investment, Net Exports, 

and Interest Rates: The IS Curve 11 The Money Market and the LM 

Curve 12 The Phillips Curve and Expectations Part V Macroeconomic 

Policy 13 Stabilization Policy: The Budget Balance, the National Debt, 

and Investment International Economic Policy 14 Changes in the Macroeconomy 

and Changes in Macroeconomic Policy 15 The Future of 

Macroeconomics / Epiloge 

New 


2nd Edition 

By Rudiger Dornbusch (deceased), Philip Bodman, University of 

Queensland, Mark Crosby, Melbourne Business School, Stanley 

Fischer, Mass Institute of Tech and Richard Startz, University of 

Washington 

2006 (February 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471568-0 / MHID: 0-07-471568-2 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/au/dornbusch2e 

This new edition of Macroeconomics has been thoroughly 

revised and updated by respected author team Philip Bodman 

and Mark Crosby. The book maintains many of the bestselling 

features of its US counterpart, such as the focus on models 

and methodological frameworks for economic analysis, while 

including currently policy issues using a blend of theory and 

data, combined with new examples and real world material. 

Pedagigical features are significantly enhanced and material is 

presented in a clear and accessible manner. 


• Two New Chapters: In response to market feedback, two entirely 

new chapters have been added--Chapter 17 on Inflation and Chapter 

18 on Unemployment. 

• International Perspective: This edition retains its international 

perspective with particular focus on the economies of Asia. Extensive 

analysis is given to the interactions and interdependencies of the Australian 

economy with those overseas. Additionally, two detailed chapters 

(Cahpters 10 and 11) are devoted to discussing international linkages. 

• Models and Data: Students are provided with a rich toolbox of simple 

models for analysing today’s economic events. In addition to the already 

extensive examples and data, cutting-edge research has been included 

to add depth and breadth to their study. 

• Pedagogical Enhancement 

Contents 

Part 1, Introduction and National Income Accounting Ch 1, An introduction 

to macroeconomics Ch 2, National income accounting Part 2, 

Growth and Aggregate Supply and Demand Ch 3, Growth and accumulation 

Ch 4, Growth and policy Ch 5, Aggregate supply and demand 

Ch 6, Aggregate supply: wages, prices and unemployment Part 3, Early 

Models Ch 7, Income and Spending Ch 8, Money, interest and income 

Ch 9, Monetary and fiscal policy in the closed economy Part 4, Open 

Economy Macroeconomics Ch 10, Internatioanl linkages Ch 11, International 

adjustment and interdependence Part 5, Behavioural Foundations 

Ch 12, Consumption and saving Ch 13, Investment spending Ch 14, The 

demand for money Ch 15, The RBA, money and credit Ch 16, Financial 

markets Part 6, Big Issues, Economic Policy and Advanced Topics Ch 

17, Big issues #1: Inflation Ch 18, Big issues #2: Unemployment Ch 

19, Policy in an uncertain world Ch 20, Advanced topics 

30

Economics 



9th Edition 

By Rudiger Dornbusch(Deceased), Stanley Fischer, Massachusetts 

Institute of Technology and Richard Startz, 

University of Washington 

2004 / 550 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293917-0 / MHID: 0-07-293917-6 

(with Economagic, Mandatory Package) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123237-1 / MHID: 0-07-123237-0 

[IE with Economagic Card] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/dornbusch9 

Dornbusch, Fischer, and Startz has been a long-standing, 

leading intermediate macroeconomic theory text since its 

introduction in 1978. This revision retains most of the text’s 

traditional features, including a middle-of-the-road approach 

and very current research, while updating and simplifying the 

exposition. This revision focuses on making the text even easier 

to teach from. The only pre-requisite continues to be principles 

of economics. 

CONTENTS 

Part I: Introduction and National Income Accounting Chapter 1: 

Introduction Chapter 2: National Income Accounting Part II: Growth, 

Aggregate Supply and Demand, and Policy Chapter 3: Growth and Accumulation 

Chapter 4: Growth and Policy Chapter 5: Aggregate Supply 

and Demand Chapter 6: Aggregate Supply: Wages, Prices, and Unemployment 

Chapter 7: The Anatomy of Inflation and Unemployment 

Chapter 8: Policy Part III: First Models Chapter 9: Income and Spending 

Chapter 10: Money, Interest, and Income Chapter 11: Monetary and 

Fiscal Policy Chapter 12: International Linkages Part IV: Behavioral 

Foundations Chapter 13: Consumption and Saving Chapter 14: Investment 

Spending Chapter 15: The Demand for Money Chapter 16: The 

Fed, Money, and Credit Chapter 17: Financial Markets and Asset Prices 

Part V: Big Events, International Adjustments, and Advanced Topics 

Chapter 18: Big Events: The Economics of Depression, Hyperinflation, 

and Deficits Chapter 19: International Adjustment and Interdependence 

Chapter 20: Advanced Topics 

Intermediate Microeconomics 


MICROECONOMICS AND BEHAVIOR 

6th Edition 

By Robert H. Frank, Cornell University 

2006 / 720 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297745-5 / MHID: 0-07-297745-0 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111549-5 / MHID: 0-07-111549-8 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/frank6 

Robert Frank’s Microeconomics and Behavior covers the essential 

topics of microeconomics while exploring the relationship 

between economics analysis and human behavior. The book’s 

clear narrative appeals to students, and its numerous examples 

help students develop economic intuition. This book introduces 

modern topics not often found in intermediate textbooks. Its 

focus throughout is to develop a student’s capacity to “think 

like an economist.” 

Contents 

Part 1: Introduction 1 Thinking Like an Economist 2 Supply and Demand 

Appendix: How Do Taxes Affect Equilibrium Prices and Quantities? 

Part 2: The Theory of Consumer Behavior 3 Rational Consumer 

Choice Appendix: The Utility Function Approach to the Consumer 

Budgeting Problem 4 Individual and Market Demand Appendix: Additional 

Topics in Demand Theory 5 Applications of Rational Choice and 

Demand Theories 6 The Economics of Information and Choice Under 

Uncertainty Appendix: Search Theory and the Winner’s Curse 7 Explaining 

Tastes: The Importance of Altruism and Other Non-egoistic Behavior 

8 Cognitive Limitations and Consumer Behavior Part 3: The Theory of 

the Firm and Market Structure 9 Production Appendix: Mathematical 

Extensions of Production Theory 10 Costs Appendix: Mathematical 

Extensions of the Theory of Costs 11 Perfect Competition 12 Monopoly 

13 Imperfect Competition: A Game-Theoretic Approach Part 4: Factor 

Markets 14 Labor Appendix: The Economics of Workplace Safety 15 

Capital Appendix: A More Detailed Look at Exhaustible Resource Allocation 

Part 5: General Equilibrium and Welfare 16 General Equilibrium 

and Market Efficiency 17 Externalities, Property Rights, and the Coase 

Theorem 18 Government 


By Katz Morgan, University of Nottingham, Michael L Katz, University 

of California-Berkeley and Harvey S Rosen, Princeton University 

2005 / 650 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710907-3 / MHID: 0-07-710907-4 


Website: http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/morgan 

Microeconomics, European Edition offers comprehensive coverage 

of microeconomic theory, explaining how this is used 

to analyse and evaluate contemporary market systems. This 

European edition has been adapted from the well-established US 

text, to provide a thoroughly European approach to the subject. 

The book draws on relevant real world examples to highlight 

how theory can help to solve or understand a range of problems 

and is a central basis for thinking like an economist. 


Chapter 1: The Market Economy. Part One: The Household. Chapter 2: 

Consumer Choice. Chapter 3: Comparative Statics and Demand. Chapter 

4: Price Changes and Consumer Welfare. Chapter 5: The Household 

as Supplier. Chapter 6: Choice under Uncertainty. Part Two: The firm. 

Chapter 7: The Firm and It’s Goal. Chapter 8: Technology and Production. 

Chapter 9: Cost. Part Three: The Competitive Model. Chapter 10: 

The Price-Taking Firm. Chapter 11: Equilibrium in Competitive Markets. 

Chapter 12: General Equilibrium and Welfare Economics. Part Four: 

Market Power. Chapter 13: Monopoly. Chapter 14: More on Price- 

Making Firms. Chapter 15: Oligopoly and Strategic Behaviour. Chapter 

16: Game Theory. Part Five: Missing Markets. Chapter 17: Asymmetric 

Information. Chapter 18: Externalities and Public Goods 

31

Economics 



New 


3rd Edition 

By Michael L Katz, University of California, Berkeley, and Harvey S 

Rosen, Princeton University 

1998 / 672 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-256-17176-1 / MHID: 0-256-17176-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124327-8 / MHID: 0-07-124327-5 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 The Market Economy. Part I The Household: Chapter 2 

Consumer Choice. Chapter 3 Comparative Statics and Demand. Chapter 

4 Price Changes and Consumer welfare. Chapter 5 The Household 

as Supplier. Chapter 6 Choice Under Uncertainty. Part II The Firm: 

Chapter 7 The Firm and Its Goals. Chapter 8 Technology and Production. 

Chapter 9 Cost. Part III The Competitive Model: Chapter 10 The 

Price-Taking Firm. Chapter 11 Equilibrium in Competitive Markets. 

Chapter 12 General Equilibrium and Welfare Economics. Part IV Market 

Power: Chapter 13 Monopoly. Chapter 14 More on Price-Making 

Firms. Chapter 15 Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior. Chapter 16 Game 

Theory. Chapter 17 Asymmetric Information. Chapter 18 Externalities 

and Public Goods. 

Managerial Economics 


New 

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 

9th Edition 

By Christopher R Thomas, University of South Florida and S Charles 

Maurice (Deceased) 

2008 (March 2007) / 704 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340281-9 / MHID: 0-07-340281-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110148-6 / MHID: 0-07-110148-9 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/thomas9 

(Details unavailable at press time) 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS AND 

ORGANIZATIONAL ARCHITECTURE 

4th Edition 

By James Brickley, and Clifford Smith, University of Rochester, and 

Jerold Zimmerman, University of Rochester 

2007 (May 2006) / 704 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352301-9 / MHID: 0-07-352301-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110633-7 / MHID: 0-07-110633-2 [IE] 

With two distinct objectives, this text’s approach to managerial 

economics takes models from recent economics research and 

applies the research to the internal structure of a firm. After 

teaching basic applied economics, the authors look inside 

the firm and apply this analysis to management decision making. 

Authors Brickley, Smith, and Zimmerman contend that 

organizational architecture consists of three aspects of corporate 

organization: the assignment of decision rights within the 

company; methods of rewarding individuals; the structure of 

systems to evaluate the performance of both individuals and 

business units. These three components can be likened to a 

stool with three legs. If one of the legs is shorter, the stool is 

out of balance. These three elements must be in balance in the 

organization as well. 


• A new chapter on Corporate Governance: This new chapter uses 

the organizational architecture framework to provide an integrated and 

comprehensive analysis of corporate governance. The chapter covers 

the causes and implications of contemporary governance scandals, 

provides examples of international corporate governance models, 

and explores the effects of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. Boxed examples 

include the WorldCom and Tyco scandals, Hewlett Packard’s firing of 

former CEO Carly Fiorina, and commercial bank prepay transactions. 

The chapter includes an appendix entitled, Choosing Among the Legal 

Forms of Organization. 

• A basic microeconomics focus is maintained and enhanced: Through 

the use of applied, real-world management problems, coverage of important 

topics in managerial economics is increased to include examples 

such as: consumer behavior and demand, comparative advantage, 

consumer and producer surplus, and supply and demand analysis. 

• Organizational Economics topics have been updated: These updates 

reflect the review of economic literature on incentives as well as expanded 

analysis of self selection in labor markets. New applications 

include a mini-case on Apple Computer’s pricing policies for digital 

music and examples of the effects of Hurricane Katrina and increased 

gasoline prices. 

Features 

• Creating and Capturing Value: A unique feature for managerial 

economics texts, this edition continues to address the fundamental question 

of how firms capture value, what industries they should compete 

in, and how they should compete. It is particularly useful to business 

students and managers. 

• Game Theory: Both theoretically sound and replete with realistic 

examples, virtually all the game theory discussions featured are framed 

in managerial terms and the game theory tools are explicitly used to 

understand business problems. This is a topic all modern applied economics 

texts include and will be popular with instructors. 

• Choosing the Legal Form of Organization: The legal form of organization 

is a policy choice. For example, nonprofit hospitals sometimes 

change to for-profit organizations (and vice versa), mutual companies 

become stock companies, franchised units become company-owned 

units and so on. This appendix presents an economic analysis of the 

legal form of organization. 

32

Economics 

• Extended case study on Arthur Anderson: The extensive examples 

throughout the book have dozens of recent business applications. A 

capstone case study on Arthur Anderson provides a format for integrative 

discussion. 

• Integrated website: The book website includes experiential activities, 

online auctions, in-class games, PowerPoint presentations, 

and fill-in-the-blank exercises, teaching tips, and links to additional 

case studies. 

Contents 

Part 1: Basic Concepts. Chapter 1 Introduction. Chapter 2 Economist’s 

View of Behavior. Chapter 3 Markets, Organizations, and the Role 

of Knowledge. Part 2: Managerial Economics. Chapter 4 Demand. 

Chapter 5 Production and Cost. Chapter 6 Market Structure. Chapter 7 

Pricing with Market Power. Chapter 8 Economics of Strategy: Creating 

and Capturing Value. Chapter 9 Economics of Strategy: Game Theory. 

Chapter 10 Incentive Conflicts and Contracts. Part 3: Designing Organizational 

Architecture. Chapter 11 Organizational Architecture. 

Chapter 12 Decision Rights: The Level of Empowerment. Chapter 13 

Decision Rights: Bundling Tasks into Jobs and Subunits. Chapter 14 

Attracting and Retaining Qualified Employees. Chapter 15 Incentive 

Compensation. Chapter 16 Individual Performance Evaluation. Chapter 

17 Divisional Performance Evaluation. Capstone Case Study on Organizational 

Architecture: Arthur Anderson LLP. Part 4: Applications 

of Organizational Architecture. Chapter 18 Corporate Governance. 

Chapter 19 Vertical Integration and Outsourcing. Chapter 20 Leadership: 

Motivating Change within Organizations. Chapter 21 Understanding 

the Business Environment: The Economics of Regulation. Chapter 22 

Ethics and Organizational Architecture. Chapter 23 Organizational 

Architecture and the Process of Management Innovation 


MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 

STRATEGY 

5th Edition 

By Michael Baye, Indiana University-Bloomington 

2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305019-5 / MHID: 0-07-305019-9 

(with Data Disk) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124421-3 / MHID: 0-07-124421-2 

[IE with Disk] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/baye5e 

Baye’s Managerial Economics and Business Strategy has become 

the best-selling managerial economics textbook. It was the 

first textbook to blend tools from intermediate microeconomics, 

game theory, and industrial organization for a managerial 

economics text. Baye is known for its balanced coverage of 

traditional and modern topics, and the Fifth Edition continues 

to offer the diverse managerial economics marketplace a flexible 

and up-to-date textbook. Baye offers coverage of both the 

basic concepts of managerial economics as well as frontier 

research in his chapter on advanced topics. The Fifth Edition 

also offers a detailed, real-world case study that explains how 

book theory translates into action in the business world. And the 

Data CD that comes with each book also contains eight “mini 

cases” that cover such high-profile businesses as Microsoft, 

Visa, and Staples. 

Contents 

1 The Fundamentals of Managerial Economics 2 Market Forces: Demand 

and Supply 3 Quantitative Demand Analysis 4 The Theory of Individual 

Behavior 5 The Production Process and Costs 6 The Organization of the 

Firm 7 The Nature of Industry 8 Managing in Competitive, Monopolistic, 

and Monopolistically Competitive Markets 9 Basic Oligopoly Models 

10 Game Theory: Inside Oligopoly 11 Pricing Strategies for Firms 

with Market Power 12 The Economics of Information 13 Advanced 

Topics in Business Strategy 14 A Manager’s Guide to Government 

in the Marketplace 15 Challenges at Time Warner: A Case Study in 

Business Strategy 

New 

THE ECONOMICS OF ORGANIZATIONS AND 

STRATEGY 

By Sean Richard, Cranfield 

2006 (March 2006) / 512 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710813-7 / MHID: 0-07-710813-2 


To operate as a successful manager requires an economic way of 

thinking, in particular a clear focus on efficiency and the working 

of markets. The Economics of Organizations and Strategy 

integrates business strategy within an economics framework, 

to give an economic perspective on areas of business such as 

organizational behaviour, marketing, finance, human resources 

and operations management. The book opens with an in-depth 

treatment of key microeconomic theories and concepts. It then 

builds on these introductory topics to show how a firm’s external 

business environment influences and constrains strategy 

formulation and behaviour, before moving on to analyse the firm 

as an organization. Drawing on microeconomic theories and 

concepts, variations in management structures are explained; 

for example, decision making hierarchies, reward systems and 

organizational boundaries. 

FEATURES 

• Coverage of European competition policy 

• Integration of economic and game theoretic models to demonstrate 

strategic conflict and cooperation 

• Up-to-date business examples to demonstrate the application of 

theory in a ‘real-world’ context 

• Exercises that encourage students to work through business problems 

relevant to a prospective management role 

• A clear writing style that presents complex ideas in an accessible 

manner 

CONTENTS 

Part 1: Introduction Chapter 1 ~ Economic Organisations, Games and 

Strategies Part 2: The Firm and the Creation of Value Chapter 2 ~ 

Alternative Approaches to the Firm Chapter 3 ~ Vertical and Virtual 

Boundaries Chapter 4 ~ Horizontal boundaries and Diversification 

Chapter 5 ~ Growth and Entrepreneurship Chapter 6 ~ Corporate 

Control and Organisational Design Chapter 7 ~ Incentives and Human 

Resource Management Part 3: Capturing Value from the Market 

Chapter 8 ~ Market Structure and the Strategic Environment Chapter 9 

~ Imperfect Competition and Government Intervention Chapter 10 ~ 

The Dominant Firm and Predation Chapter 11 ~ Price Discrimination 

and Bundling Chapter 12 ~ Reputation and Vertical Restraints Chapter 

13 ~ Product Differentiation and Advertising Chapter 14 ~ Invention, 

Innovation and Competitive Advantage 

33

Economics 


MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 

8th Edition 

By Christopher R Thomas, University of South Florida and S Charles 

Maurice (Deceased) 

2005 / 720 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287174-6 / MHID: 0-07-287174-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123834-2 / MHID: 0-07-123834-4 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/thomas8 

Thomas and Maurice’s Managerial Economics teaches students 

how to use microeconomic theory to analyze business decisions. 

In a clear and engaging writing style, Christopher Thomas carries 

on the tradition he and Charles Maurice shepherded for seven 

previous editions in the 8th edition. The 8th Edition explores 

the current market forces that create both opportunities and 

constraints for business enterprises. The book has enjoyed success 

in part because of its mid-level of rigor. 

CONTENTS 

PREFACE / Part I: Some Preliminaries CHAPTER 1 Managers, Profits, 

and Markets CHAPTER 2 Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium 

CHAPTER 3 Marginal Analysis for Optimal Decision Making CHAPTER 

4 Basic Estimation Techniques Part II: Demand Analysis CHAPTER 

5 Theory of Consumer Behavior CHAPTER 6 Elasticity and Demand 

CHAPTER 7 Demand Estimation and Forecasting Part III: Production 

and Cost Analysis CHAPTER 8 Production and Cost in the Short Run 

CHAPTER 9 Production and Cost in the Long Run CHAPTER 10 Production 

and Cost Estimation On the website: Special Topic Module 1: 

Linear Programming Part IV: Profit-Maximization in Various Market 

Structures CHAPTER 11 Managerial Decisions in Competitive Markets 

CHAPTER 12 Managerial Decisions for Firms with Market Power 

CHAPTER 13 Strategic Decision Making in Oligopoly Markets Part 

V: Advanced Managerial Decision Making CHAPTER 14 Advanced 

Techniques for Profit Maximization CHAPTER 15 Decisions Under Risk 

and Uncertainty On the website: Special Topic Module 2: Investment 

Decisions / APPENDIX: STATISTICAL TABLES ANSWERS TO TECHNI- 

CAL PROBLEMS INDEX 

Environmental Economics 


ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 

4th Edition 

By Barry C. Field, University of Massachusetts-Amherst and Martha K 

Field, Greenfield Comm College 

2006 / 528 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313751-3 / MHID: 0-07-313751-0 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125585-1 / MHID: 0-07-125585-0 [IE] 

Twenty-one chapters covering Cost and Benefits of Environmental 

Policy, Environmental Analysis, Policy Analysis, US 

Policy (Air Pollution, Toxic Wastes, State and Local Issues), and 

International Environmental Issues. 

CONTENTS 

Section 1 – Introduction 1 What is Environmental Economics? 2 The 

Economy and the Environment Section 2 – Analytical Tools 3 Benefits 

and Costs, Supply and Demand 4 Economic Efficiency and Markets 5 

The Economics of Environmental Quality Section 3 – Environmental 

Analysis 6 Frameworks of Analysis 7 Benefit-Cost Analysis: Benefits 8 

Benefit-Cost Analysis: Costs Section 4 – Environmental Policy Analysis 

9 Criteria for Evaluating Environmental Policies 10 Decentralized 

Policies: Liability Laws, Property Rights, Voluntary Action 11 Command-and-Control 

Strategies: The Case of Standards 12 Incentive- 

Based Strategies: Emission Charges and Subsidies 13 Incentive-Based 

Strategies: Transferable Discharge Permits Section 5 – Environmental 

Policy in the United States 14 Federal Water Pollution – Control Policy 

15 Federal Air Pollution – Control Policy 16 Federal Policy on Toxic 

and Hazardous Substances 17 State and Local Environmental Issues 

Section 6 – International Environmental Issues 18 Comparative Environmental 

Policies 19 Economic Development and the Environment 20 

The Global Environment 21 International Environmental Agreements 

/ Appendix: Abbreviations and Acronyms Used in the Book / Name 

Index / Subject Index 


Econometrics 

ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMETRICS 

3rd Edition 

By Damodar N Gujarati, United States Military Academy West Point 

2006 / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313594-6 / MHID: 0-07-313594-1 

(with Data Disk CD) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124448-0 / MHID: 0-07-124448-4 

[IE with Data CD] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/gujaratiess3 

This text provides a simple and straightforward introduction 

to econometrics for the beginner. The author’s intent is to 

provide the student with a “user friendly,” non-intimidating 

introduction to econometric theory and techniques. The book 

motives students to understand econometric techniques through 

extensive examples, careful explanations, and a wide variety of 

problem material. The audience is undergraduate economics, 

agricultural economics, and business administration majors, 

MBA students and others in the social and behavioral sciences 

where econometric techniques, especially the techniques of 

linear regression analysis, are used. 

Contents 

Chapter 1 The Nature and Scope of Econometrics PART I Basics of 

Probability and Statistics Chapter 2 Review of Statistics I: Probability 

and Probability Distributions Chapter 3 Characteristics of Probability 

Distributions Chapter 4 Some Important Probability Distributions Chapter 

5 Statistical Inference: Estimation and Hypothesis Testing PART II 

The Linear Regression Model Chapter 6 Basic Ideas of Linear Regression: 

The Two-Variable Model Chapter 7 The Two-Variable Model: 

Hypothesis Testing Chapter 8 Multiple Regression: Estimation and 

Hypothesis Testing Chapter 9 Functional Forms of Regression Models 

Chapter 10 Dummy Variable Regression Models Chapter 11 Model 

Selection: Criteria and Tests PART III Regression Analysis In Practice 

Chapter 12 Multicollinearity: What Happens if Explanatory Variable Are 

Correlated Chapter 13 Heteroscedasticity: What Happens If The Error 

Variance Is Nonconstant Chapter 14 Autocorrelation: What Happens 

If Error Terms Are Correlated PART IV Introduction to Simultaneous 

Equation Models Chapter 15 Simultaneous Equation Models Chapter 

16 Selected Topics in Single Equation Regression Models 

34

Economics 

ECONOMETRICS 

By Cameron 

2005 / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710428-3 / MHID: 0-07-710428-5 

(with CD and Online Learning Center) 


Website: www.mcgraw-hill/textbooks/cameron 

Econometrics aims to introduce students with little or no previous 

experience in econometrics to this important discipline. 

This text focuses on explaining why econometrics exists and 

how it can be used in everyday life. This text adopts a strong 

student-focused approach to the discipline. In doing so, it aims 

to address fundamental issues in econometrics in an accessible 

manner for students, who are often put off by the difficult nature 

of econometrics. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Introducing Econometrics Chapter 2: Statistical Testing and 

Modelling: The Basics Chapter 3: The Classical Linear Regression Model 

Introduced Chapter 4: Preparing and Using Data Chapter 5: What do all 

these tests and statistics mean? Chapter 6: Making Regression Analysis 

More Useful I: Transformation Chapter 7: Making Regression Analysis 

More Useful II: Dummies and Trends Chapter 8: Predicting and Explaining 

Discrete Events: Logit and Probit Models Chapter 9: More Tests: 

Diagnosing the results of basic models Chapter 10: Multicollinearity: 

Serious Worry or Minor Nuisance? Chapter 11: Problem Solving: Heteroscedasticity 

Chapter 12: Multiple equation models: Specification 

and the Identification Problem Chapter 13: Multiple equation models: 

Methods of Estimation Chapter 14: Problem Solving: Time-Series Chapter 

15: Conclusion Appendices: Blank Template of Summary Sheet for 

Review Studies./ Brief Description of the Excel files of Data Sets./ The 

Notion of Causality / 4 Statistical Tables / 5 Probability / 6 Standard 

error of the regression coefficient / 7 Derivation of the normal equations 

for a multiple regression mode 


ECONOMETRICS 

By Stephen Schmidt, Union College 

2005 (March 2004) / 524 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298316-6 / MHID: 0-07-298316-7 

(with Data CD) - Out of print 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320030-9 / MHID: 0-07-320030-1 

(Revised, with Data CD) - Out of Print 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111396-0 / MHID: 0-07-111396-7 

[IE with Data CD] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/schmidt1 

Stephen Schmidt is a superb and dedicated professor at a very 

good, liberal arts college, (Union in Schenectady, NY). After 

obtaining a PhD in Economics from Stanford University and 

teaching for 8 years, he has now written the book he has always 

wanted to write and use—an econometrics book that excites 

and motivates students about the value of statistical analysis 

in economics and gives them all of the tools they will need to 

do this analysis themselves. The goal of this book is to show 

students that econometric analysis is the bridge that connects 

economic theory with economic policy. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1: Econometric Analysis Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Designing 

an econometric project Part 2: Probability and Statistics Chapter 3 

Random variables Chapter 4 Estimation Chapter 5 Hypothesis testing 

Part 3: Linear Regression Chapter 6 Least Squares Regression Chapter 

7 Properties of the least squares estimator Chapter 8 Multivariate regression 

Part 4: Topics in Linear Regression Chapter 9 Selecting a Functional 

Form Chapter 10 Determining the econometric specification Chapter 11 

Instability of the regression equation Part 5: Violations of the Regression 

Model Chapter 12 Autocorrelation Chapter 13 Heteroskedasticity 

Chapter 14 Estimating multiple equations Part 6: Advanced Topics 

Chapter 15 Endogenous variables Chapter 16 Forecasting Chapter 17 

Time series analysis Chapter 18 Nonlinear models Chapter 19 Dummy 

dependent variables Chapter 20 General discrete choice models 


BASIC ECONOMETRICS 

4th Edition 

By Damodar N Gujarati, United States Military Academy West Point 

2003 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247852-5 / MHID: 0-07-247852-7 

(with Data Disk, Mandatory Pacakge) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123017-9 / MHID: 0-07-123017-3 

[IE with CD] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/gujarati4 

CONTENTS 

1. The Nature of Regression Analysis. 2. Two-Variable Regression Analysis: 

Some Basic Ideas. 3. Two Variable Regression Model: The Problem 

of Estimation. 4. The Normality Assumption: Classical Normal Linear 

Regression Model. 5. Two-Variable Regression: Interval Estimation and 

Hypothesis Testing. 6. Extensions of the Two-Variable Linear Regression 

Model. 7. Multiple Regression Analysis: The Problem of Estimation. 8. 

Multiple Regression Analysis: The Problem of Inference. 9. Regression 

on Dummy variables. 10. Multicollinearity: What happens if the Regressor 

are correlated. 11. Heteroscedasticity. 12. Autocorrelation. 13. 

Econometric Modeling I: Traditional Econometric Methodology. 14. 

Econometric Modeling II: Alternative Econometric Methodologies. 15. 

Regression on Dummy Dependent Variable: The LPM, Probit, and Tobit 

Models 16. Nominal Ordinal and other Limited Dependent Variable 

regression models. 17. Dynamic Econometric Model: Autoregressive 

and Distributed Lag Models. 18. Simultaneous-Equation Models. 19. 

The Identification Problem. 20. Simultaneous-Equation Methods. 21. 

Time Series Econometrics I: Stationarity, Unit Roots, and Cointegration. 

22. Time Series Econometrics II: ARIMA and VAR Models. 23. Nonlinear 

in the Parameter Regression Models 24. Panel Data Regression 

Models Appendixes A. A Review of Some Statistical Concepts B. 

Rudiments of Matrix Algebra C. Linear Regression Model in Matrix 

Notation D. Statistical Tables Selected Bibliography Indexes: Name 


SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF STATISTICS AND 

ECONOMETRICS 

2nd Edition 

By Dominick Salvatore and Derrick Reagle of Fordham University 

2002 / 256 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-134852-2 / MHID: 0-07-134852-2 


CONTENTS 

Introduction. / Descriptive Statistics. / Probability and Probability Distributions. 

/ Statistics Inference: Estimation. / Statistical Inference: Testing 

Hypothesis. / Statistics Examination. / Simple Regression Analysis. / Multiple 

Regression Analysis. / Problems in Regression Analysis. / Further 

Techniques and Applications in Regression Analysis. / Simultaneous- 

Equations Methods. / Time Series Econometrics. / Statistics Examination. 

/ Bionomial Distribution. / Poisson Distribution. / Standard Normal 

Distribution. / Table of Random Numbers. / Student t Distribution. / 

Chi-Square Distribution. / F Distribution. / Durbin-Watson Statistics. / 

Critical Values of Runs in the Run Tests. 

35

Economics 


ECONOMETRIC MODELS AND ECONOMIC 

FORECASTS 

4th Edition 

By Robert S Pindyck, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and 

Daniel L Rubinfeld, University of California, Berkeley 

1998 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-913292-5 / MHID: 0-07-913292-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115836-7 / MHID: 0-07-115836-7 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

The Basics of Regression Analysis: Chapter 1. Introduction to the 

Regression Model. Chapter 2. Elementary Statistics. Chapter 3. The 

Two-Variable Regression Model. Chapter 4. The Multiple Regression 

Model. Chapter 5. Using the Multiple Regression Model. Chapter 6. Serial 

Correlation and Heterosedasticity. Chapter 7. Instrumental Variables 

and Model Specification. Chapter 8. Forecasting with a Single-Equation 

Regression Model. Chapter 9. Single-Equation Estimation. Chapter 10. 

Nonlinear and Maximum-Likelihood Estimation. 

Mathematical Economics 

SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF INTRODUCTION TO 

MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS 

By Edward T Dowling, Fordham University 

2006 / 160 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145534-3 / MHID: 0-07-145534-5 

A Schaum Professsional Publication 

When you are looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview, 

there’s no series that does it better. Schaum’s Easy Outline of 

Introduction to Mathematical Economics is a pared-down, simplified, 

and tightly focused version of its predecessor. 

• Designed to appeal to underprepared students and readers 

turned off by dense text 

• Cartoons, sidebars, icons, and other graphic pointers get the 

material across fast 

• Concise text focuses on the essence of the subject 


ECONOMETRIC METHODS 

4th Edition 

By John Johnston, University of California, Irvine and John DiNardo, 

Massachusetts Institute of Technology 

1997 / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-913121-8 / MHID: 0-07-913121-2 

(with 3.5” disk) - (Out of Print) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115342-3 / MHID: 0-07-115342-X 

[IE with 3.5” Disk] 

CONTENTS 

1 Relationships Between Two Variables 2 Further Aspects of Two Variable 

Relationships 3 The k-Variable Linear Equation 4 Some Tests of the 

k-Variable Linear Equation for Specification Error 5 Maximum Likelihood 

(ML), Generalized Least Squares (GLS), and Instrumental Variable (IV) 

Estimators 6 Heteroscedasticity and Autocorrelation 7 Single Equation 

Modeling I: The Univariate Case 8 Single Equation Modeling II: The 

Multivariate Case 9 Multiple Equation Models 10 Generalized Method 

of Moments 11 A Smorgasbord of Computationally Intensive Methods 

12 Limited Dependent Variable and Related Models 13 Panel Data 










• Delivers expert help from teachers who are authorities in 

their fields 

• Perfect for last-minute test preparation 


FUNDAMENTAL METHODS OF MATHEMATICAL 

ECONOMICS 

4th Edition 

By Alpha C Chiang, University of Connecticut and Kevin Wainwright, 

Simon Fraser University 

2005 / 696 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-010910-0 / MHID: 0-07-010910-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123823-6 / MHID: 0-07-123823-9 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/economics/chiang4e 

It has been 20 years since the last edition of this classic text. 

Kevin Wainwright, a long time user of the text (British Columbia 

University and Simon Fraser University), has executed the perfect 

revision¿-he has updated examples, applications and theory 

without changing the elegant, precise presentation style of Alpha 

Chiang. Readers will find the wait was worthwhile. 

CONTENTS 

PART 1 Introduction Chapter 1: The Nature of Mathematical Economics 

Chapter 2: Economic Models PART 2 Static (or Equilibrium) Analysis 

Chapter 3: Equilibrium Analysis in Economics Chapter 4: Linear Models 

and Matrix Algebra Chapter 5: Linear Models and Matrix Algebra (continued) 

PART 3 Comparative-Static Analysis Chapter 6: Comparative 

Statics and the Concept of the Derivative Chapter 7: Rules of Differentiation 

and their use in Comparative Statics Chapter 8: Comparative-Static 

Analysis of General-Function Models PART 4 Optimization Problems 

Chapter 9: Optimization: A Special Variety of Equilibrium Analysis 

Chapter 10: Exponential and Logarithmic Functions Chapter 11: The 

Case of More Than One Choice Variable Chapter 12: Optimization with 

Equality Constraints NEW Chapter 13: Further Topics in Optimization 

(includes Envelope Theorem and Duality PART 5 Dynamic Analysis 

Chapter 14 Economic Analysis and Integral Calculus Chapter 15 Continuous 

Time: First Order Differential Equations Chapter 16 Higher-Order 

Differential Equations Chapter 17 DiscreteTime: First Order Difference 

Equations Chapter 18 Higher Order Difference Equations Chapter 19 

Simultaneous Differential Equations and Difference Equations NEW 

Chapter 20: Introduction to Optimal Control Theory 

36

Economics 


SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF INTRODUCTION TO 

MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS 

3rd Edition 

By Edward T. Dowling, Fordham University 

2001 / 523 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135896-5 / MHID: 0-07-135896-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118871-5 / MHID: 0-07-118871-1 [IE] 

A Schaum Professional Publication 

CONTENTS 

Review. / Economic Applications of Graphs and Equations. / The Derivative 

and the Rules of Differentiation. / Uses of the Derivative in 

Mathematics and Economics. / Calculus of Multivariable Functions. / 

Caculus of Multivariable Functions in Economics. / Exponential and 

Logarithmic Functions in Economics. / Differentiation of Exponential 

and Logarithmic Functions. / The Fundamentals of Linear (or Matrix) 

Algebra. / Matrix Inversion. / Special Determinants and Matrices and 

Their Use in Economics. / Comparative Statics and Concave Programming. 

/ IUntegral Calculus: The Indefinite Integral. / Integral Calculus: 

The Definite Integral. / First-Order Differential Equations. / First Order 

Difference Equations. / Second-Order Differential Equations and Difference 

Equations. / Simultaneous Differential and Difference Equations. 

/ The Calculus of Variations. / Optimal Control Theory. 


THE STRUCTURE OF ECONOMICS 

A Mathematical Analysis, 3rd Edition 

By Eugene Silberberg, University of Washington and Wing Suen 

2001 / 688 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234352-6 / MHID: 0-07-234352-4 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118136-5 / MHID: 0-07-118136-9 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

1. Comparative Statics and the Paradigm of Economics 2. Review of 

Calculus (One Variable) 3. Functions of Several Variables 4. Profit 

Maximization 5. Matrices and Determinants 6. Comparative Statics: 

The Traditional Methodology 7. The Envelope Theorem and Duality 

8. The Derivation of Cost functions 9. Cost and Production Functions: 

Special Topics 10. The Derivation of Consumer Demand Functions 

11. Special topics in Consumer Theory 12. Intertemporal Choice 13. 

Behavior under Uncertainty 14. Maximization with Inequality and 

Nonnegativity Constraints 15. Contracts and Incentives 16. Markets 

with Imperfect Information 17. General Equilibrium I: Linear Models 

18. General Equilibrium II: Nonlinear Models 19. Welfare Economics 

20. Resource Allocation over Time: Optimal Control theory 


ELEMENTS OF DYNAMIC OPTIMIZATION 

By Alpha C Chiang, University of Connecticut 

1992 / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-010911-7 / MHID: 0-07-010911-7 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112568-0 / MHID: 0-07-112568-X [IE] 

CONTENTS 

PART ONE: INTRODUCTION: 1. The Nature of Dynamic Optimization. 

PART TWO: CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS: 2. The Fundamental 

Problem of Calculus of Variations. 3. Transversality Conditions for 

Variable-Endpoint Problems. 4. Second-Order Conditions. 5. Infinite 

Planning Horizon. 6. Constrained Problems. PART THREE: OPTIMAL 

CONTROL THEORY: 7. Optimal Control. 8. More on Optimal Control. 

9. Infinite-Horizon Problems. 10. Optimal Control with Constraints. 

Money and Banking 


MONEY, BANKING AND FINANCIAL MARKETS 

By Stephen G. Cecchetti 

2006 (January 2005) / 704 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-245269-3 / MHID: 0-07-245269-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111565-0 / MHID: 0-07-111565-X [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/cecchetti 

Stephen Cecchetti’s new text on Money and Banking offers 

a fresh, more modern, and more student-friendly approach 

to the subject. The author has drawn on his vast experience 

as Vice President at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, 

publishing in and editing various journals, and consulting for 

the European Central Bank, the Bank of England, the Bank of 

Israel, and the Reserve Bank of Australia as well as his years 

of teaching at various schools including Ohio State, Brandeis, 

Princeton, and Oxford University. Students will find the material 

more relevant and interesting because of the book’s unique 

emphasis on the Five Core Principles, the early introduction 

of risk, and an integrated global perspective. Cecchetti is THE 

money and banking book for today’s students; by focusing on 

the big picture via core principles, Cecchetti teaches students 

the rationale for financial rules and institutional structure so that 

even when the financial system evolves, students’ knowledge 

will not be out of date. 

Contents 

Money, Banking, and Financial Markets Brief Contents Part I. Money 

and the Financial System Chapter 1. An Introduction to Money and the 

Financial System Chapter 2. Money and the Payments System Chapter 

3. Financial Instruments, Financial Markets, and Financial Institutions 

Part II. Interest Rates, Financial Instruments, and Financial Markets 

Chapter 4. Future Value, Present Value and Interest Rates Appendix 4: 

The Algebra of Present-Value Formulas Chapter 5. Understanding Risk 

Appendix 5A: A Quick Test to Measure Your Risk Tolerance Appendix 

5B: The Mathematics of Diversification Chapter 6. Bonds, Bond Prices 

and the Determination of Interest Rates Chapter 7. The Risk and Term 

Structure of Interest Rates Chapter 8. Stocks, Stock Markets and Market 

Efficiency Chapter 9. Derivatives: Futures, Options and Swaps Chapter 

10. Foreign Exchange Appendix 10: Interest Rate-Parity and Short-Run 

Exchange Rate Determination Part III. Financial Institutions Chapter 

11. The Economics of Financial Intermediation Chapter 12. Depository 

Institutions: Banks and Bank Management Chapter 13. Financial Industry 

Structure Chapter 14. Regulating the Financial System Part IV. Central 

Banks, Monetary Policy, and Financial Stability Chapter 15. Central 

Banks in the World Today Chapter 16. The Structure of Central Banks: 

The U.S. Federal Reserve and the European Central Bank Chapter 17. 

The Central Bank Balance Sheet and the Money Supply Process Chapter 

18. Monetary Policy: Using Interest Rates to Stabilize the Domestic 

Economy Chapter 19. Exchange-Rate Policy and the Central Bank 

Appendix 19: What You Really Need to Know about the Balance of 

Payments Part V. Modern Monetary Economics Chapter 20. Money 

Growth, Money Demand, and Monetary Policy Chapter 21. Monetary 

Policy and Aggregate Demand Chapter 22. Understanding Business 

Cycles Chapter 23. Monetary Policy, Output, and Inflation in the Short 

Run / Glossary / Index 

37

Economics 

International Economics 


New 

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 

13th Edition 

By Thomas Pugel, New York University 

2007 (May 2006) / 800 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352302-6 / MHID: 0-07-352302-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110727-3 / MHID: 0-07-110727-4 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/pugel13 

This classic text has sold well for a half century because it covers 

all the conventional areas of international economics in an easyto-understand 

manner. The 13th edition continues to provide 

the best blend of events and analysis, so that readers can build 

their abilities to understand global economic developments and 

to evaluate proposals for changes in economic policies. The 

book is informed by current events and by the latest in applied 

international research. It combines rigorous economic analysis 

with attention to the issues of economic policy that are alive and 

important today. This concise and readable text uses economic 

terminology when it enhances the analysis, but avoids jargon for 

jargon’s sake. Like earlier editions, it also places international 

economics events within a historical framework. The overall 

treatment continues to be intuitive rather than mathematical 

and is strongly oriented towards policy. 


• Four Introductory Key Events: The four “key events” for Chapter 1 

in this new edition include: a new discussion on “Outsourcing,” an 

updated discussion of “Poor Workers in Poor Countries,” a revised 

and updated discussion of “The Euro,” and a new discussion entitled 

“China Revalues its Currency.” 

• Focus on China: A new series of text boxes entitled “Focus on China” 

address the growing importance of China and the interesting economic 

issues specific to China and the US trade relationships with China. 

• New Glossary: This new Glossary lists all the key terms from the 

chapters and their definitions. Key terms (without their definitions) 

from each chapter are now also listed in the end matter between the 

Summary and Suggested Reading. 

• Easier Reading: Larger font size for the captions makes them easier to 

read and more bullet-point lists break up the long paragraphs, making 

densely packed information easier to understand. 

• Split Chapter: Chapter 3 in the last edition was rather long, and in this 

edition this chapter is divided into two, with the new Chapter 3 focusing 

on the concepts of absolute and comparative advantage from Smith and 

Ricardo, and the new Chapter 4 presenting the Heckscher-Ohlin theory 

and the tools that economists use to develop this theory. 

• Streamlined Chapter: Chapter 16 has been streamlined to focus on 

the use and meaning of balance of payments information. While basic 

accounting principles underlying the balance of payments are explained, 

details of posting specific transactions are moved to the new Appendix 

E. In addition, the presentation of the U.S. balance of payments as an 

example is now in a more user-friendly format. These U.S. data for 2004 

provide an excellent launching base for discussions of the meaning of 

current account deficits and the link of the overall balance to intervention 

in the foreign exchange market. 

• New Case Studies: A new Case Study box in Chapter 9 describes the 

global web of quantitative limits on trade in clothing and textiles (the 

Multifibre Arrangement) and the negotiated end to these limits as of 

January 1, 2005. The box also discusses the new limits imposed during 

2005 by the United States and the European Union on imports from 

China, so that the “temporary” trade restraints have been resurrected. 

A new Case Study box in Chapter 11 brings life to strategic trade policy 

by presenting the WTO dispute cases in which the U.S. government has 

accused the European Union of subsidizing Airbus, and the European 

Union has accused the U.S. government of subsidizing Boeing. 

• In-depth Analysis: A range of trade policy issues are analyzed. For the 

prominent issues of dumping by foreign exporters and subsidies offered 

by foreign governments, Chapter 11 now features recent research that 

documents biases in the methods used by the Department of Commerce 

in its antidumping investigations. Also, recent decisions by the World 

Trade Organization that U.S. subsidies to its cotton production and EU 

subsidies to its sugar production violate WTO rules are included. Finally, 

a new Case Study box brings life to strategic trade policy by presenting 

the WTO dispute cases in which the U.S. government has accused the 

European Union of subsidizing Airbus, and the European Union has 

accused the U.S. government of subsidizing Boeing. subsidies. 

• Latest Sources: Material was created using the latest available sources 

to update the wide range of data and information presented in the figures 

and text of the book. Among many other updates, the book offers the 

latest information on factor endowments, trends in the relative prices 

of primary products, patterns of foreign direct investments broadly 

and by major home country, the sizes of foreign exchange trading and 

foreign exchange futures, swaps, and options, evidence about relative 

purchasing power parity, and the exchange rate policies chosen by 

national governments. 

Features 

• AS/AD Framework Appendix: This appendix presents the aggregate 

demand-aggregate supply framework as an approach to open-economy 

macroeconomics. This provides flexibility for instructors who would 

like to include this approach in their course. 

• Labor Issues Discussed: The book continues to weave discussion of 

labor issues into a number of chapters in Parts I and II. 

• WTO Discussions: Consistent discussion of and reference to the 

World Trade Organization (WTO) in international trade policy. 

• Trade and the Environment: The chapter on international environmental 

issues continues as a unique and powerful treatment of issues of 

major interest to many students. It includes discussion of such topics as 

WTO rulings on environmental policies that affect international trade, 

transborder pollution, ozone depletion, and global warming. 

• End-of-Chapter Questions: each chapter has at least ten questions 

and problems. Every odd-numbered problem has an answer provided 

at the back of the text. Students are able to check their understanding 

of the material more effectively. 

• Balanced Coverage: The text covers all of the conventional topics in 

International Economics while grappling with the issues that are being 

discussed in today’s economic journals and newspapers. 

• Real Situations: Applications taken from real economic situations 

appear in two-color boxes, so students immediately see the relevance 

of theory to world economics. 

CONTENTS 

1. International Economics Is Different. Part I: The Theory of International 

Trade. 2. The Basic Theory Using Demand and Supply. 3. Why 

Everybody Trades: Comparative Advantage and Factor Proportions. 4. 

Who Gains and Who Loses from Trade? 5. Alternative Theories of Trade. 

6. Growth and Trade. Part II: Trade Policy. 7. The Basic Analysis of 

Tariffs. 8. Nontariff Barriers to Imports. 9. Arguments For and Against 

Protection. 10. Pushing Exports. 11. Trade Blocs and Trade Blocks. 

12. Trade and the Environment. 13. Trade Policies for Developing and 

Transition Countries. 14. Multinationals and Migration: International 

Factor Movements. Part III: Understanding Foreign Exchange. 15: Payments 

Among Nations. 16. The Foreign Exchange Market. 17. Forward 

Exchange and International Financial Investment. 18. What Determines 

Exchange Rates. 19. Government Policies Toward the Foreign Exchange 

Market. 20. International Lending and Financial Crises. Part IV: Macro 

Policies for Open Economies. 21. How Does the Open Macroeconomy 

Work? 22. Internal and External Balance with Fixed Exchange Rates. 23. 

Floating Exchange Rates and Internal Balance. 24. National and Global 

Choices: Floating Rates and the Alternatives. Appendix A: Where the 

International Information Is. Appendix B: Deriving Production-Possibili- 

38

Economics 

ties Curves. Appendix C: Offer Curves. Appendix D: The Nationally 

Optimal Tariff. Appendix E: Many Parities at Once. Appendix F: Aggregate 

Demand and Aggregate Supply in the Open Economy. Appendix 

G: Devaluation and the Current Account 



5th Edition 

By Dennis R Appleyard, Davidson College, Alfred J Field, University 

of North Carolina - Chapel Hill and Steven Cobb, University of North 

Texas 

2006 / 816 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287737-3 / MHID: 0-07-287737-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125092-4 / MHID: 0-07-125092-1 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/appleyard5e 

Appleyard, Field, and Cobb’s International Economics 5e text 

is an International Economics textbook that offers a consistent 

level of analysis and treatment of the two main subdivisions of 

international economics—international trade theory and policy 

and international monetary theory and policy. Comprehensive 

and clear, the text helps students move beyond recognition 

toward and understanding of current and future international 

events. A new co-author, Steven L. Cobb from the University 

of North Texas, joins the book this edition and brings expertise 

especially in the fields of economic education and transition 

economies, particularly those in Eastern Europe. 

Contents 

INTRODUCTION 1. The World of International Economics PART I 2. 

Early Trade Theories: Mercantilism and the Transition to the Classical 

World of David Ricardo 3. The Classical World of David Ricardo and 

Comparative Advantage 4. Extensions and Tests of the Classical Model 

of Trade PART II 5. Introduction to Neoclassical Trade Theory: Tools 

to Be Employed 6. Gains from Trade in Neoclassical Theory 7. Offer 

Curves and the Terms of Trade 8. The Basis for Trade: Factor Endowments 

and the Heckscher-Ohlin Model 9. Empirical Tests of the Factor 

Endowments Approach PART III 10. Post Heckscher-Ohlin Theories of 

Trade and Intra-Industry Trade 11. Economic Growth and International 

Trade 12. International Factor Movements PART IV 13. The Instruments 

of Trade Policy 14. The Impact of Trade Policies 15. Arguments for Interventionist 

Trade Policies 16. Political Economy and Recent U.S. Trade 

Policy 17. Economic Integration 18. International Trade and the Developing 

Countries PART V 19. The Balance of Payments Accounts 20. 

The Foreign Exchange Market 21. International Financial Markets and 

Instruments: An Introduction 22. The Monetary and Portfolio Balance 

Approaches to External Balance 23. Price Adjustments and Balance of 

Payments Disequilibrium 24. National Income and the Current Account 

PART VI 25. Economic Policy in the Open Economy: Fixed Exchange 

Rates 26. Economic Policy in the Open Economy: Flexible Exchange 

Rates 27. Prices and Output in the Open Economy: Aggregate Supply 

and Demand PART VII 28. Fixed or Flexible Exchange Rates? 29. The 

International Monetary System: Past, Present, and Future 


4th Edition 

By Francis Cherunilam, Cochin University of Science and 

Technology 

2005 (December 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-059942-0 / MHID: 0-07-059942-4 

Tata McGraw-Hill Title 

CONTENTS 

Part 1: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND THE GLOBAL ECONO- 

MY 1. Introduction 2.International Economic Gap and NIEO 3. Global 

Trade 4. Globalisation Part 2: BASES OF TRADE AND DEVELOP- 

MENT 5. Analytical Tools 6. Theories of International Trade 7. Gains 

from trade and Terms of Trade 8 Economic Growth and Trade Part 3: 

TRADE POLPCIES AND ISSUES 9. Trade Strategy 10. Trade Barriers 

11. International Cartels, Commodity Agreements and State Trading 

12. Social Issues in Trade Part 4: ECONOMIC INTEGRATION AND 

COOPERATION 13. Economic Integration 14. South-South Cooperation 

Part 5: INTERNATIONAL MONETARY ECONOMICS 15. Balance of 

Payments 16. Policies for Internal and External balance 17. International 

Monetary System 18. Foreign Exchange 19. International Liquidity and 

Reserves 20. International Banking and Eurocurrency Market Part 6: 

INTERNATIONAL FACTOR MOBILITY 21. International Capital Flows 

22. Multinational Corporations 23. Transfer of Technology 24. Official 

Development Assistance 25. International Debt 26. International Migration 

Part 7: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC ORGANISATIONS 27. IMF 

and Development Organisations 28. World Trade Organisation Part 8: 

TRDE POLICY AND PERFORMANCE OF INDIA 29. Trade Regulation 

and Promotion 30. Trade and BOP of India 

INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND INVESTMENT 

2nd Edition 

By John Gionea 

2005 / 488 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471559-8 / MHID: 0-07-471559-3 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/au/gionea2e 

The latest edition of International Trade and Investment: An 

Asia-Pacific Perspective is a must for any student undertaking 

subjects in international trade or international business. The 

text provides valuable insight into the challenges of doing business 

in today’s global economy. The second edition contains a 

new chapter outlining recent global trends in trade and investment 

along with new and revised case studies, giving the book 

a useful practical focus. International Trade and Investment: 

An Asia-Pacific Perspective is written in a language and style 

that makes it suitable for students at various levels of study. It is 

ideal for international business and international trade subjects 

at all stages, including those found in TAFE, Undergraduate, 

Graduate and Executive programs. 

Contents 

Part I: Introduction Chapter 1: Trade and investment in a global 

economy Part II:Global trade and investment patterns Chapter 2: 

International trade in goods and services Chapter 3: International trade 

theory Chapter 4: Foreign Direct Investment-practice and theory Chapter 

5: Australia’s position in international trade and investment Part III: The 

global trade and investment environment Chapter 6: Instruments of 

trade and investment policies Chapter 7:The multilateral trade and investment 

framework Chapter 8: Regional economic integration Chapter 

9:The foreign exchange market Chapter 10: The balance of payments 

Chapter 11:The international monetary system Part IV: Global business 

strategies Chapter 12: The firm’s market-entry strategies Chapter 13: 

Export import management Part V: Doing business in... Chapter 14: 

Advanced economies Chapter 15: Emerging markets and developing 

economies Part VI: Sectoral trends Chapter 16: Global industry profiles 

/ Appendix A: The grain industry / Appendix B: The automotive industry 

/ Appendix C: The telecommunications industry / Selected references 

/ Glossary of key terms 

39

Economics 



By Hendrik Van Den Berg, University of Nebraska—Lincoln 

2004 / 672 pages 

ISBn-13: 978-0-07-239796-3 / MHID: 0-07-239796-9 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121517-6 / MHID: 0-07-121517-4 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/vandenberg/international 

Author Hank Van den Berg had a fourteen-year career in the US 

State Department and with multinational companies overseas 

prior to getting his PhD at the University of Wisconsin. As a 

result, international economics has been a favorite subject for 

him. After eleven years of teaching International Economics in 

a variety of Colleges at the University of Nebraska (Business 

Administration, Arts and Sciences, and Architecture), Hank was 

ready to begin his own text. He was particularly interested in 

writing a book that would engage students more than the existing 

ones do and appeal to the diverse audience he has taught 

(adult students, students from a variety of countries, students 

with a variety of academic interests). 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: International Economics and the Global Economy Chapter 2: 

The Open Economy Chapter 3: The Gains from Trade: A Partial Equilibrium 

View Chapter 4: Why Nations Trade: A Partial Equilibrium View 

Chapter 5: International Trade and Economic Growth Chapter 6: Protectionism: 

How Nations Restrict Trade Chapter 7: Why Do Countries 

Restrict Foreign Trade? Chapter 8: Trade Policy: Past Present and Future 

Chapter 9: Trade Discrimination: Free Trade Areas and Anti-Dumping 

Protection Chapter 10: The Economics of International Investment 

Chapter 11: The Many Forms of International Investment Chapter 12: 

The Foreign Exchange Market Chapter 13: Economics Policy in and 

Open Economy Chapter 14: The Evolution of the International Financial 

System Chapter 15: The International Migration of People Chapter 16: 

Immigration Policy Chapter 17: The Future Path of Globalization 

Industrial Organization 

INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS AND ORGANIZATION 

A European Perspective, 2nd Edition 

By David Jacobson, Dublin City University and Bernadette Andreosso-O’ 

Callaghan, University of Limerick 

2005 / 400 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710422-1 / MHID: 0-07-710422-6 


Website: www.mcgraw-hill/textbooks/jacobson 

Industrial Economics and Organisation: A European Perspective 

presents an authoritative account of both traditional and current 

theories in industrial economics. This new edition aims to 

capitalise on the key strengths of the first edition while bringing 

this edition up to date. It has done so by integrating new material 

on recent theoretical developments, such as stakeholder 

theory and technological change and innovation, as well as 

recent political and economic changes, for example in relation 

to Eastern Europe. Its European focus successfully draws on a 

number of European examples to clearly illustrate key theoretical 

concepts to the reader. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Industrial Economics Chapter 3: 

Neoclassical Theory of the Firm Chapter 4: Other Theories of the 

Firm Chapter 5: Market Structure Chapter 6: Structure and Strategy: 

Oligopoly Chapter 7: Industry in the EU Chapter 8: Location and Industrial 

Development Chapter 9: Pricing behavior of firms Chapter 10: 

Non-price strategies Chapter 11: Technological change and innovation 

Chapter 12: Performance of firms Chapter 13: Performance of EU firms 

and industries Chapter 14: Multinational Enterprises and Globalization 

Chapter 15: Aspects of Industrial Policy 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF INTERNATIONAL 

ECONOMICS 

4th Edition 

By Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University—Bronx 

1996 / 288 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-054950-0 / MHID: 0-07-054950-8 


Outstanding for its easy-to-understand explanations of international 

economics, this guide covers all course fundamentals 

and supplements any class text. It takes students through the 

solution of hundreds of problems dealing with demand and 

supply in trade, the foreign exchange markets, flexible and 

fixed exchange rates and much more. Also includes practice 

midterm and final exams. 

History of Economic Thought 


A HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THEORY AND METHOD 

4th Edition 

By Robert B. Ekelund, Jr., Auburn University and Robert F. Herbert, 

Auburn University 

1997 / 688 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-021327-2 / MHID: 0-07-021327-5 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114282-3 / MHID: 0-07-114282-7 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

Part I: Introduction and Early Beginnings. Part II: The Classical Period. 

Part III: Reactions and Alternatives to Classical Theory in the Nineteenth 

Century. Part IV: Microeconomics in Europe and England. Part V: 

Twentieth-Century Paradigms. 

40

Economics 


Labor Economics 

New 

LABOR ECONOMICS 

4th Edition 

By George J Borjas, Harvard University-Cambridge 

2008 (March 2007) / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340282-6 / MHID: 0-07-340282-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110142-X4 / MHID: 0-07-110142-X [IE] 



CONTEMPORARY LABOR ECONOMICS 

7th Edition 

By Campbell R. McConnell, University of Nebraska, Emeritus, Stanley 

L. Brue, Pacific Lutheran University, David Macpherson, Florida 

State University—Tallahassee 

2006 / 672 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297860-5 / MHID: 0-07-297860-0 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111621-3 / MHID: 0-07-111621-4 [IE] 

Website: http://www.contemporarylabor.com 

Contemporary Labor Economics, 7e presents the “new” labor 

economics. In the past, study of labor was highly descriptive, 

emphasizing historical developments, facts, institutions, and 

legal considerations. Labor markets and unemployment was 

accorded some attention, but the analysis was typically minimal. 

This state of affairs has changed significantly in recent decades. 

Economists have achieved important breakthroughs in studying 

labor markets and problems. Labor economics is increasingly 

an applied field of micro and macro theory and has become a 

critical part of the core of analytical economics. As a result, the 

focus of the text is on the “new” labor economics. However, it 

also presents traditional topics such as labor law, structure of 

unions, and collective bargaining since these issues also play 

an important role in labor markets. 

Contents 

Chapter 1: Labor Economics Introduction and Overview Chapter 2: 

The Theory of Individual Labor Supply Chapter 3: Population, Participation 

Rates, and Hours of Work Chapter 4: Labor Quality: Investing 

in Human Capital Chapter 5: The Demand for Labor Chapter 6: Wage 

Determination and the Allocation of Labor Chapter 7: Alternative Pay 

Schemes and Labor Efficiency Chapter 8: The Wage Structure Chapter 9: 

Mobility, Migration, and Efficiency Chapter 10: Labor Unions and Collective 

Bargaining Chapter 11: The Economic Impact of Unions Chapter 

12: Government and the Labor Market: Employment, Expenditures, 

and Taxation Chapter 13: Government and the Labor Market: Legislation 

and Regulation Chapter 14: Labor Market Discrimination Chapter 

15: Job Search: External and Internal Chapter 16: The Distribution of 

Personal Earnings Chapter 17: Labor Productivity: Wages, Prices, and 

Employment Chapter 18: Employment and Unemployment 

ANNUAL EDITIONS: 

LABOR-MANAGEMENT RELATIONS 05/06 

By John Overby, University of Tenn-Martin 

2006 / 240 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310917-6 / MHID: 0-07-310917-7 

McGraw-Hill/Dushkin Title 

Website: http://www.dushkin.com/catalog/0073109177.mhtml 

Annual Editions: Labor-Management Relations 05/06 was developed 

to show both the breadth and depth of the labor-management 

relations field not only in the United States, but around the 

world. It provides perspectives to students from the legal issues, 

the managerial view, the union’s view, and global views. Since 

the mid-1950’s, union membership has continually been declining 

in the United States. At the same time, employees are faced 

with an increasing workload; decreases in benefits and pensions; 

wage concessions; and the loss of jobs to outsourcing. What is 

taking place within these circumstances? To better understand 

what is happening, Annual Editions: Labor-Management Relations 

05/06 looks at the inherent struggle between labor and 

management as well as the legal and global contexts in which 

it occurs. What does the future hold for labor-management 

relations? 

Contents 

UNIT 1. Historical and Legal Regulation of Collective 

Bargaining New! 1. Basic Labor Law New! 2. Individual “Concerted” 

Activity Under Federal Labor Laws New! 3. U.S. Labor Law New! 4. 

Weingarten Rights in Non-Union Settings New! 5. Labor Pains for Union-Free 

Employers New! 6. The Impact of Employer E-Mail Policies 

on Employee Rights to Engage in Concerted Activities Protected by 

the National Labor Relations Act New! 7. The Thirteenth Amendment 

and the Right to Strike New! 8. Does America Need a National Rightto-work 

Law? (Pro and Con arguments) New! 9. The ’Living Wage’: It 

Couldn’t Do Any Harm New! 10. Palace Coup at the AFL-CIO New! 11. 

Building Strength UNIT 2. Strategies for Collective Bargaining 

New! 12. Guaranteeing Opportunity For The Workers New! 13. 

Should Collective Bargaining and Labor Relations be Less Adversarial? 

New! 14. The Developing Law of Neutrality Agreements New! 15. 

Who Will Fold First? New! 16. E-Organizing, The Next Frontier? Labor 

Unions Seek Access to Company E-mail Systems New! 17. PC Use 

at Home and for Union Organizing—New Challenges in the Wired 

Workplace New! 18. Collective Bargaining is the Right Step New! 19. 

Up Against Wal-Mart New! 20. Rollback WAGES! Will Labor Take 

the Wal-Mart Challenge? New! 21. Street Corner, Incorporated UNIT 

3. Labor-Management Contract Negotiations New! 22. 

Labor Contract Negotiations in the Airline Industry New! 23. Process, 

Strategy, and Tactics in Labor-Management Mediation New! 24. Tortilla 

Flap New! 25. Labor Adversaries Bury the Hatchet New! 26. The New 

Deal New! 27. Labor and Management Build a Prescription for Health 

New! 28. Deauthorization and Decertification Elections: An Analysis 

and Comparison of Trends UNIT 4. Dispute Resolution and Ad- 

MINISTERING the Relationship New! 29. Psychological Contracts 

in the Workplace: Understanding the Ties That Motivate New! 30. Good 

Management/Union Relations can be a Sweet Deal New! 31. Mending 

Labor-Management Relationships New! 32. Nature vs. Nurture New! 33. 

Quaker Oats Co. New! 34. Ambiguities in Labor Contracts: Where do 

They Come From? New! 35. Minimizing the Likelihood of Employment 

Litigation New! 36. The Pivotal Role of Labor-Management Committees 

New! 37. Behavioral Safety: A Necessary Part of the Whole New! 38. 

Delphi Gets a Handle on Hand Protection New! 39. Union Liability in 

Discrimination Cases New! 40. Dispatches from Decatur: Community 

is the First Casualty in America’s Labor Wars UNIT 5. Public Sector 

Collective Bargaining New! 41. Making Labor-Management Relations 

Integral to the Management Process New! 42. Union Monopoly is Bad 

for Teachers New! 43. Trade Unions: The Facts UNIT 6. Interna- 

TIONAL Collective Bargaining New! 44. Taming the Tiger New! 

45. Shut Up or Die! New! 46. Employment Tribunals: Using Your Last 

Resort New! 47. The “Race to the Bottom” in Imported Clothes UNIT 

7. The Future of Labor Union Movement in the United 

States New! 48. Are Unions Obsolete? Neuhaus v. O’Connor on Labor 

New! 49. A Proposal for a Twenty-First-Century Trade Union Education 

League: An Attempt to Solve the Crisis of Organizing the Unorganized 

New! 50. The Working Poor in 2001 

41

Economics 


LABOR ECONOMICS 

3rd Edition 

By George J Borjas, Harvard University - Cambridge 

2005 / 560 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287177-7 / MHID: 0-07-287177-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111097-6 / MHID: 0-07-111097-6 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/borjas3 

George Borjas’ well-received text blends coverage of traditional 

topics with modern theory and developments into a superb 

Labor economics book. His integration of theory with facts 

and coverage of latest research make his book one of the most 

popular at the middle and upper end of the market. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1. Introduction / Appendix: An Introduction to Regression 

Analysis / Chapter 2. Labor Supply Chapter 3. Topics in Labor Supply 

Chapter 4. Labor Demand 5. Labor Market Equilibrium Chapter 6. 

Compensating Wage Differentials Chapter 7. Human Capital Chapter 

8. The Wage Structure Chapter 9. Labor Mobility Chapter 10. Labor 

Market Discrimination Chapter 11. Labor Unions Chapter 12. Incentive 

Pay Chapter 13. Unemployment 


Urban Economics 

New 

URBAN ECONOMICS 

6th Edition 

By Arthur O’Sullivan, Lewis & Clark College 

2007 (January 2006) / 624 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298476-7 / MHID: 0-07-298476-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124471-8 / MHID: 0-07-124471-9 [IE] 

Arthur O’Sullivan’s Urban Economics is the leading text for this 

small, but exciting market. This book covers urban economics 

as the discipline that lies at the intersection of geography and 

economics. The sixth edition is a thorough revision of previous 

incarnations—the author has reorganized and rewritten every 

chapter to produce a sleek and up-to-date text that will bring 

renewed attention to the Urban Economics course. This sixth 

edition offers an extreme makeover from previous editions while 

also incorporating the remarkable progress in the field of urban 

economics in the last ten to fifteen years. Part I of the book explains 

why cities exist and what causes them to grow or shrink. 

Part II examines the market forces that shape cities and the role 

of government in determining land-use patterns. Part III looks 

at the urban transportation system, exploring the pricing and 

design of public transit systems and the externalities associated 

with automobile use (congestion, environmental damage, collisions). 

Part IV uses a model of the rational criminal to explore 

the causes of urban crime and the spatial consequences. Part V 

explains the unique features of the housing market and examines 

the effects of government housing policies. The final part of the 

book explains the rationale for our fragmented system of local 

government and explores the responses of local governments 

to intergovernmental grants and the responses of taxpayers to 

local taxes. All of the economic concepts used in the book are 

covered in the typical intermediate microeconomics course, but 

a Tools of Microeconomics appendix is included that covers the 

key concepts for students whose exposure to microeconomics 

is limited to an introductory course or who could benefit from 

a review of intermediate concepts. 


• Leaner Writing Style: The book has fewer pages but more substance— 

each chapter has been rewritten to be more clear and concise. 

• Axioms of Urban Economics: The book starts with five “axioms of 

urban economics,” self-evident truths that provide the foundation for 

the economic analysis throughout the book. These axioms are referenced 

throughout the text to reinforce how fundamental concepts fit 

into the big picture. 

• New Figures: The author has created all the figures in this edition 

from scratch to closely match the new, up-to-date content. 

• Active Learning: Each chapter ends with four or five exercises that 

allow students to apply the key concepts. These exercises can be incorporated 

into class sessions or exams. 

• More User-friendly Appendix: Many chapters have callouts to refer 

the reader to a specific section of the Appendix, “Tools of Microeconomics”, 

for a review of the relevant concepts. 

• Better Flow of Topics: This edition incorporates several important 

organizational changes: the analysis of urban poverty is integrated 

throughout the book, with appearances in nine chapters; the key insights 

from the old chapter on land rent appear at the beginning of the chapter 

on urban land rent; the land-use section starts with modern cities, and 

then looks back to explain the rise and then demise of the monocentric 

city; and the key insights from the old chapter on location theory are 

integrated into several chapters in the first part of the book. 

• New Appendices: A new appendix to the urban-growth chapter 

presents the neoclassical model of regional development. A new appendix 

to the chapter on urban rent uses economic choice models to 

explain (1) how consumer substitution generates a convex housing-price 

curve and (2) how input substitution generates a convex bid-rent curve. 

A new appendix to the chapter on land use describes the monocentric 

model and applies it to general-equilibrium analysis and the issue of 

income segregation. 

• New Chapter: Chapter 8 on “Neighborhood Choice” covers material 

that is new to the profession and will be a big hit with instructors; it 

replaces Chapter 13 of the fifth edition and presents the location-related 

analysis of crime and schooling much earlier in the book. This new section 

explores the economics of neighborhood choice and segregation, 

focusing on the role of local public goods and neighborhood externalities 

related to education and crime. 

Features 

• Updated Data: All the tables and charts continue to contain the most 

recent data, and insights and facts from current theoretical and empirical 

research have been added in every chapter. 

• Updated Policy Analysis: Reflecting recent changes in public policy, 

the content details refinements in the economic analysis of policy 

alternatives. 

• Microeconomic Framework: This text continues to bring urban issues 

into a modern microeconomic framework. This framework continues 

to appeal to many micro instructors because it closely matches their 

training and the way they want to teach the course. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction and Axioms of Urban Economics. 2 Why Do Cities Exist? 

3 Why Do Firms Cluster? 4 City Size. 5 Urban Growth. 6 Urban 

Land Rent. 7 Land-Use Patterns. 8 Neighborhood Choice. 9 Zoning 

and Growth Controls. 10 Externalities from Autos. 11 Mass Transit. 

12 Crime. 13 Why Is Housing Different? 14 Housing Policy. 15 Local 

Government Spending. 16 Local Government Revenue 

42

Economics 

New 

Public Finance 

PUBLIC FINANCE 

8th Edition 

By Harvey Rosen, Princeton University 

2008 (March 2007) / 640 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351128-3 / MHID: 0-07-351128-5 



PUBLIC FINANCE 

7th Edition 

By Harvey Rosen, Princeton University 

2005 / 640 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287648-2 / MHID: 0-07-287648-4 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123842-7 / MHID: 0-07-123842-5 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/rosen7e 

Harvey Rosen’s scholarly and up-to-date Public Finance continues 

to be the market-leading book. The book takes its readers 

to the frontiers of current research, yet remains accessible to 

undergraduates. Although it draws upon the latest research, the 

book never loses sight of the reality it is supposed to describe, 

always drawing the links between economic analysis and current 

political issues. 

CONTENTS 

Part One: INTRODUCTION 1. Introduction: Public Finance and 

Ideology: Government at a Glance / 2. Tools of Positive Analysis: The 

Role of Theory / Methods of Empirical Analysis /Concluding Remarks 

/ 3. Tools of Normative Analysis: Welfare Economics / The First Fundamental 

Theorem of Welfare Economics / Fairness and the Second 

Fundamental Theorem of Welfare Economics / Market Failure / Buying 

into Welfare Economics / Part Two: ANALYSIS OF PUBLIC EXPENDI- 

TURE 4. Public Goods: Public Goods Defined / Efficient Provision of 

Public Goods / The Privatization Debate / Education / Public Goods and 

Public Choice / 5. Externalities: The Nature of Externalities /Graphical 

Analysis / Private Responses / Public Responses to Externalities / The US 

Response / Implications for Income Distribution / Positive Externalities / 

6. Political Economy: Direct Democracy / Representative Democracy / 

Explaining Government Growth / 7. Income Redistribution, Conceptual 

Issues: Distribution of Income / Rationales for Income Redistribution / 

Expenditure Incidence / 8. Expenditure Programs for the Poor: A Quick 

Look at Welfare Spending / Institutional Setting / Issues in the Design 

of Welfare Programs / The Earned Income Tax Credit / Supplemental 

Security Income / Medicaid / Food Stamps and Child Nutrition / Housing 

Assistance / Programs to Enhance Earnings / 9. Social Insurance I: Social 

Security and Unemployment Insurance: Why Have Social Insurance? / 

Structure of Social Security / Effects on Economic Behavior / Long-Term 

Stresses on Social Security / Social Security Reform / Unemployment 

Insurance / Conclusions / 10. Social Insurance II: Health Care: What’s 

Special About Health Care? / The US Health Care Market / The Role 

of Government / The Twin Issues: Access and Cost / Should Government’s 

Role in Health Care Increase? / 11. Cost? Benefit Analysis: 

Present Value / Private Sector Project Evaluation / Discount Rate for 

Government Projects / Valuing Public Benefits and Costs / Games Cost? 

Benefit Analysts Play / Distributional Considerations / Uncertainty / An 

Application: Are Reductions in Class Size Worth It? / Use (and Nonuse) 

by Government / Part Three: A FRAMEWORK FOR TAX ANALYSIS 12. 

Taxation and Income Distribution: Tax Incidence: General Remarks / 

Partial Equilibrium Models / General Equilibrium Models / Conclusions 

/ 13. Taxation and Efficiency: Excess Burden Defined / Excess Burden 

Measurement with Demand Curves / Differential Taxation of Inputs / 

Does Efficient Taxation Matter? / 14. Efficient and Equitable Taxation: 

Optimal Commodity Taxation / Optimal User Fees / Optimal Income 

Taxation / Politics and the Time Inconsistency Problem / Other Criteria 

for Tax Design / Part Four: THE UNITED STATES REVENUE SYSTEM 

15. The Personal Income Tax: Basic Structure / Defining Income / Excludable 

Forms of Money Income / Exemptions and Deductions / Rate 

Structure / Choice of Unit and the Marriage Tax / Taxes and Inflation / 

Treatment of International Income / State Income Taxes / Politics and 

Tax Reform / 16. Personal Taxation and Behavior: Labor Supply / Saving 

/ Housing Decisions / Portfolio Composition / A Note on Politics and 

Elasticities / 17. The Corporation Tax: Why Tax Corporations? / Structure 

/ Incidence and Excess Burden / Effects on Behavior / State Corporation 

Taxes / Taxation of Multinational Corporations / Corporation Tax Reform 

/ 18. Deficit Finance: How Big Is the Debt? / The Burden of the Debt / 

To Tax or to Borrow? / 19. Taxes on Consumption and Wealth: Retail 

Sales Tax / Value-Added Tax / Hall-Rabushka Flat Tax / Cash-Flow Tax / 

Efficiency and Fairness of Personal Consumption Taxes / Income versus 

Consumption Taxation / Wealth Taxes / Estate and Gift Taxes / Part 

Five: MULTIGOVERNMENT PUBLIC FINANCE 20. Public Finance in 

a Federal System: Background / Community Formation / The Tiebout 

Model / Optimal Federalism / Property Tax / Intergovernmental Grants / 

Appendix: Some Basic Microeconomics / Glossary / References / Author 


Advanced Macroeconomics 

ADVANCED MACROECONOMICS 

3rd Edition 

By David Romer, University of California, Berkeley 

2006 / 696 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287730-4 / MHID: 0-07-287730-8 

David Romer’s Advanced Macroeconomics, 3e is the standard 

text and the starting point for graduate macro courses and helps 

lay the groundwork for students to begin doing research in 

macroeconomics and monetary economics. A series of formal 

models are used to present and analyze important macroeconomic 

theories. The theories are supplemented by examples of 

relevant empirical work, which illustrate the ways that theories 

can be applied and tested. This well-respected and well-known 

text is unique in the marketplace. 

CONTENTS 

1. The Solow Growth model 2. Infinite-Horizon and Overlapping-Generations 

Models 3. New Growth Theory 4. Real-Business-Cycle Theory 

5. Traditional Keynesian Theories of Fluctuations 6. Microeconomic 

Foundations of Incomplete Nominal Adjustment 7. Consumption 8. 

Investment 9. Unemployment and the Labor Market 10. Inflation and 

Monetary Policy 11. Budget Deficits and Fiscal Policy 

43

Economics 

INTRODUCING ADVANCED MACROECONOMICS 

By Peter Birch Sorensen and Hans Jorgen Whitta-Jacobsen of University 

of Copenhagen 

2005 / 800 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710425-2 / MHID: 0-07-710425-0 


Website: www.mcgraw-hill/textbooks/sorenson 

Aimed at the advanced undergraduate student, Introducing 

Advanced Macroeconomics: Growth and Business Cycles 

bridges the gap between intermediate macroeconomics texts 

and more advanced macroeconomics texts, something not currently 

available in the market. The text seeks to give students 

a thorough understanding of some fundamental workhorse 

models in macroeconomics and to introduce them to methods 

of formal macroeconomics analysis, without requiring too many 

technical skills. The first half of the book focuses on macroeconomics 

for the long run, introducing and developing the basic 

Solow model. While the second half of the book deals with 

the economy in the short run, focusing on the explanation of 

business fluctuations. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Macroeconomics for the Long Run and for the Short Run / 

Book One: The Long Run: Economic Growth, Long Run Unemployment, 

and Structural Economic Policy / Part I Basic Theory and Empirics 

about Prosperity and Growth / Chapter 2 Some Facts about Prosperity 

and Growth / Chapter 3 Capital Accumulation and Growth: The Basic 

Solow Model / Chapter 4 Wealth Accumulation and Capital Mobility: 

The Solow Model for a Small Open Economy / Part II Exogenous 

Growth / Chapter 5 Technological Progress and Growth: The General 

Solow Model / Chapter 6 Education and Growth: The Solow Model with 

Human Capital / Chapter 7Limits to Growth? The Solow Model with 

Scarce Natural Resources / Part III Endogenous Growth / Chapter 8 

Productive Externalities and Endogenous Growth / Chapter 9 R&D-Based 

Models of Endogenous Growth: Macroeconomic Modelling / Chapter 

10 R&D-Based Models of Endogenous Growth: Micro Foundations / 

Part IV Structural Unemployment / Chapter 11 Some Facts and Introductory 

Theory about Unemployment / Chapter 12 Efficiency Wages 

and Unemployment / Chapter 12 Trade Unions and Unemployment / 

Book Two The Short Run: Economic Fluctuations, Short Run Unemployment, 

and Stabilisation Policy / Chapter 14 The Economy in the Short 

Run: Some Facts about Business Cycles / Part V The Building Blocks 

for the Short Run Model / Chapter 15 Investment and Asset Prices / 

Chapter 16 Consumption, Income and Wealth / Chapter 17 Monetary 

Policy and Aggregate Demand / Chapter 18 Inflation, Unemployment 

and Aggregate Supply / Part VI The Short Run Model for the Closed 

Economy / Chapter 19 Explaining Business Cycles: Aggregate Supply 

and Aggregate Demand in Action / Chapter 20 Stabilization Policy: Why 

and How? / Chapter 21 Stabilization Policy with Rational Expectations 

/ Chapter 22 The Limits to Stabilization Policy: Credibility, Uncertainty 

and Time Lags / Part VII The Short Run Model for the Open Economy 

/ Chapter 23 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply in the Open 

Economy / Chapter 24 The Open Economy with Fixed Exchange Rates / 

Chapter 25 The Open Economy with Flexible Exchange Rates / Chapter 

26 The Choice of Exchange Rate Regime and the Theory of Optimum 

Currency Areas 

Economic Growth 

and Development 


ECONOMIC GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT 

By Hendrik Van Den Berg, University of Nebraska-Lincoln 

2001 / 640 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239797-0 / MHID: 0-07-239797-7 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120197-1 / MHID: 0-07-120197-1 

[IE - 2 Color] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124951-5 / MHID: 0-07-124951-6 

[IE - POD printing in 1 Color] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/vandenberg 

CONTENTS 

1 The Importance of Economic Growth 2 Economic Growth Throughout 

History 3 The Evolution of Growth Models: From Adam Smith to Harrod-Domar 

4 Solow’s Neoclassical Growth Model 5 How Well Does 

Solow’s Model Explain Economic Growth? 6 Technological Progress 7 

Economic Growth and Population Growth Example: Kremer’s Model of 

Long-Run Economic Growth 8 Financial Markets and Economic Growth 

9 The Rate of Saving and Economic Growth 10 International Trade and 

Economic Growth 11 Globalization and Economic Growth 12 Education, 

Human Capital, and Growth 13 Institutions and Economic Growth 

14 Government Institutions and Economic Growth 15 Why Would 

Anyone Be Against Economic Growth? 16 Are There Limits to Growth? 

17 The Future of Economic Growth GlossaryBibliography 

Advanced Microeconomics 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MICROECONOMIC 

THEORY 

4th Edition 

By Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University 

2006 (May 2006) / 384 pages 

ISBn-13: 978-0-07-146236-5 / MHID: 0-07-146236-8 


This revision has been updated to cover the three most important 

recent developments in microeconomics: game theory, oligopolistic 

behavior, and the economics of information. Schaum’s 

Outline of Microeconomics gives you a thorough grounding in 

the theories, principles, and background information on each 

topic in this vital field. 

44

New 

Regional Economics 

THE ECONOMICS OF EUROPEAN INTEGRATION 

2nd Edition 

By Baldwin 

2006 (March 2006) / 512 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711119-9 / MHID: 0-07-711119-2 


The Economics of European Integration, 2/e provides students 

with an accessible presentation of the facts, theories and controversies 

driving rapid change in the heart of Europe. The authors 

combine essential elements of European history, institutions, 

law, politics and policies with clear and accessible explanations 

of the economic principles of European integration. The result 

is an expert analysis of the contemporary status of integration 

within the European Union. This second edition has been thoroughly 

updated and expanded to incorporate recent developments 

within the European Union, and to reflect current teaching 

in European Economics. New material in this edition includes 

coverage of economic integration, labour markets and migration; 

EU competition and state aid policy; and EU trade policy. 

Designed for students taking modules in European economics, 

the book offers a rigorous yet clear exposition of economic 

arguments alongside examples, illustrations, and questions that 

bring this contemporary topic to life. 

FEATURES 

• New to this edition is a fully revised and expanded Part on EU 

Policies, including new chapters dedicated to Regional Policy, EU 

competition and state aid policy, and EU trade policy. 

Economics 

THE EUROPEAN UNION 

By Susan Senior Nello, University of Siena, Italy 

2005 / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710781-9 / MHID: 0-07-710781-0 


Website: www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/senior 

This book is an up to date, multi-disciplinary account of the 

European Union with material organised in a flexible way and 

it is designed to be accessible to a wide audience of students. 

The author has worked as an expert for the European Commission. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 - An Introduction to European Integration: Definitions and 

Terminology Chapter 2 - A Brief History of the European Union Chapter 

3 - The Decision-Making Institutions of the European Union Chapter 4 

- Basic Instruments: The Theory of Trade and the EU Chapter 5 - The 

Theory of Integration Chapter 6 - From the Single Market to the ‘New 

Europe’ Chapter 7 - Movement of Labour, Immigration and Asylum 

Chapter 8 - The Long Road to Economic and Monetary Union Chapter 9 

- The EU Budget Chapter 10 - The Common Agricultural Policy Chapter 

11 - Fisheries Policy Chapter 12 - Environmental and Energy Policies 

Chapter 13 - EU Regional, Social and Employment Policies Chapter 

14 - EU Social and Employment Policy Chapter 15 - Competition and 

Industrial Policies Chapter 16 - Transport Policy Chapter 17 - The EU 

and the GATT/WTO Chapter 18 - EU Trade and Aid policies Chapter 

19 - Economic Relations between the EU and the US Chapter 20 - The 

Common Foreign and Security Policy Chapter 21 - EU Enlargement 

• Focus on the economic analysis of integration: The core of the book 

explores the topics of trade integration and the macroeconomics of 

European integration in full. The up-to-date economic coverage is ideal 

for students taking economics modules that do not require extensive 

analysis of social and policy issues. Further appendices of economic 

theory are also provided as appropriate. 

• Learning features: The book provides a clear and consistent structure 

to aid student learning. Each chapter features boxed examples and illustrations, 

end of chapter summaries, self-assessment questions, essay 

questions, and lists of useful websites, further reading and references. 

• Updates online: Integration initiatives continue to progress at a tremendous 

pace. Reflecting the need for currency and relevance in this 

fast-moving field, a range of online essays and articles on new developments 

and challenges will be posted on the Online Learning Centre at: 

www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/baldwinandwyplosz 

Contents 

Preface. PART I: HISTORY, FACTS AND INSTITUTIONS. History. 

Facts, law, institutions and the budget decision making. PART II: THE 

MICROECONOMICS OF ECONOMIC INTEGRATION. Essential microeconomic 

tools. The essential economics of preferential liberalisation. 

Market size and scale economies. Growth effects and capital market 

integration. Economic integration, labour markets and migration. PART 

III: EU POLICIES. The common agricultural policy. Location effects, 

economic geography & regional policy. EU competition and state aids 

policy. EU trade policy. PART IV: MONETARY INTEGRATION: HIS- 

TORY AND PRINCIPLES. A monetary history of Europe. The choice 

of an exchange rate regime. The European monetary system. PART V: 

MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY IN THE EU. Optimum currency area. 

The European monetary union. Fiscal policy and the stability pact. The 

financial markets and the Euro 










45

Economics 

Asian Economics 

Statistics For Economics 

the hong kong economy 

From Recovery to Restructure 

By Kui-Wai Li 

2005 / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124780-1 / MHID: 0-07-124780-7 

An Asian Publication 

The prolonged post-Asian Financial Crisis economic recession in 

Hong Kong requires new analysis. By looking at the economic 

performance since the 1980s, this book focuses on analysing 

the macroeconomic intricacies facing the Hong Kong economy. 

The economic boom in the pre-Asian Financial Crisis years has 

also given rise to various structural imbalances that could not 

sustain the economy after the burst of the bubble. The large 

producer services sector could arguably be the basis of imbalance. 

The short-term investment behaviour exhibited in the 

pre-1997 years has not fully adjusted. Demand-driven solutions 

can provide short-term rescue and recovery, while economic 

restructuring requires supply-driven solutions. There is still room 

for economic expansion in Hong Kong; the focus should return 

to the basics of economic growth and trade rather than rely on 

redistributive instruments and heavy government expenditures. 

Economic integration with the Mainland economy produces 

both complements and competition; strategies adopted should 

enable Hong Kong investors to make use of the growing 

economic pie in Mainland China. By considering the various 

macroeconomic issues, the book provides useful analysis for 

readers to arrive at their own economic decisions. 

CONTENTS 

List of Figures / List of Tables / Preface / 1 Hong Kong’s Development 

and the Economism Paradigm 2 Economic Performance Patterns since 

the 1980s 3 Productivity, Unit Labour Cost and Competitiveness 4 

Fiscal Policy: Challenge, Dilemma and Leadership 5 he Monetary and 

Financial Sector 6 The Real Estate Market 7 Trade and Changes in 

Comparative Advantage 8 Economic Integration: The Competitivity- 

Complementarity Model 9 Where is the Hong Kong Economy Heading? 

/ References / Index 

USING STATISTICS IN ECONOMICS 

By Thomas 

2005 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710743-7 / MHID: 0-07-710743-8 


Descriptive Statistics. Mean and Variance. Weighted Means. 

Frequency distributions. Cumulative and Relative Frequencies. 

Histograms. Basic Probability. Conditional Probabilities. Addition 

and Multiplication Rules. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1: Statistics Chapter 1. Discrete Probability Distributions Chapter 

2. Continuous Variables Chapter 3. Basic Statistical Inference Chapter 4. 

Hypothesis Testing I Chapter 5. Hypothesis Testing II Chapter 6. More 

Probability and Inference Chapter 7. Contingency Tables and Non- 

Parametric Statistics Part 2: Introduction to Econometrics Chapter 8. 

The Purpose of Econometrics Chapter 9. Two Variable Correlation and 

Regression Chapter 10. Introduction to Non-Linear Regression Chapter 

11. What Makes a Good Estimator Chapter 12. The Classical Two Variable 

Model Chapter 13. Introduction to Multiple Regression Chapter 14. 

Qualatative Effects in Regression Analysis Chapter 15. Some Problems 

with the Classical Model Chapter 16. Introduction to Dynamics 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








46

2007-2008 NEW Operations/Decision Sciences Titles 

Operations/Decision Science 

~ Contents 


Data Mining.................................................................... 65 


















• BENTON 

Purchasing and Supply Management....................... 63 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352514-3 / MHID: 0-07-352514-6 

• BOWERSOX 

Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e.................. 63 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294788-5 / MHID: 0-07-294788-8 

• DEWHURST 

Quantitative Methods for Business, 2e..................... 56 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710902-8 / MHID: 0-07-710902-3 

[MH UK Title] 

• FINCH 

Interactive Models for Operations and Supply 

Chain Management..................................................52 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285710-8 / MHID: 0-07-285710-2 

• GRYNA 

Quality Planning and Analysis, 5e............................59 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296662-6 / MHID: 0-07-296662-9 

• HAYEN 

SAP R/3 Enterprise Software............................... 53, 65 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8 

• IRWIN/MH 

Operations Management Video Series Vol. 

XII DVD, 9e.............................................................50 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326881-X / MHID: 0-07-326881-X 

• OLSON 

Introduction to Business Data Mining...................... 65 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295971-0 / MHID: 0-07-295971-1 

• SCHROEDER 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313706-3 / MHID: 0-07-313706-5 

• STEVENSON 

Introduction to Management Science...................... 54 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299066-9 / MHID: 0-07-299066-X 

• STEVENSON 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110916-1 / MHID: 0-07-110916-1 

• THOMKE 

Managing Project and Service Development: 

Text and Cases......................................................... 58 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302301-4 / MHID: 0-07-302301-9 

• VOHRA 

Quantitative Techniques in Management, 3e........... 55 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-061193-1 / MHID: 0-07-061193-9 

[Tata MH Title] 

47

2007-2008 NEW Operations/Decision Sciences Titles 


• FINCH 

Operations Now, 3e.................................................49 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329705-7 / MHID: 0-07-329705-4 

• GRAY 

Project Management, 4e..........................................57 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352515-0 / MHID: 0-07-352515-4 

• JACOBS 

Operations and Supply Management.......................50 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329473-5 / MHID: 0-07-329473-X 

• SIMCHI-LEVI 

Designing and Managing the Supply 

Chain, 3e..................................................................62 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298239-8 / MHID: 0-07-298239-X 

48

Business/Systems Dynamics 


BUSINESS DYNAMICS 

Systems Thinking And Modeling For A Complex World 

By John Sterman 

2000 / 768 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-238915-9 / MHID: 0-07-238915-X 

(with CD-ROM) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-117989-8 / MHID: 0-07-117989-5 

[IE with CD-ROM] 

CONTENTS 

Introduction Part I. Perspective and Process Chapter 1. Learning In and 

About Complex Systems Chapter 2. System Dynamics in Action Chapter 

3. The Modeling Process 4. Structure and Behavior Of Dynamic Systems 

Part II. Tools for Systems Thinking Chapter 5. Causal Loop Diagrams 

Chapter 6. Stocks and Flows Chapter 7. Dynamics of Stocks and Flows 

Chapter 8. Closing the Loop: Dynamics of Simple Structures Part III. 

The Dynamics of Growth Chapter 9. S-Shaped Growth: Epidemics, 

Innovation Diffusion, And the Growth of New Products Chapter 10. 

Path Dependence and Positive Feedback Part IV. Tools For Modeling 

Dynamic Systems Chapter 11. Delays Chapter 12. Co-Flows and Aging 

Chains Chapter 13. Modeling Human Behavior: Bounded Rationality or 

Rational Expectations Chapter 14. Forecasts and Fudge Factors: Modeling 

Expectation Formation Chapter 15. Supply Chains and The Origin 

of Oscillations Chapter 16. Managing Supply Chains in Manufacturing 

Chapter 17. The Labor Supply Chain and The Origin of Business Cycles 

Chapter 18. The Invisible Hand Sometimes Shakes: Commodity Cycles 

Validation and Model Testing Appendix A: Numerical Integration Appendix 

B: Noise References Index 

Introductory 

Operations Management 


New 

OPERATIONS NOW 

Supply Chain Profitability and Performance with 

Student DVD, 3rd Edition 

By Byron Finch, Miami University—Oxford 

2008 (December 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329705-7 / MHID: 0-07-329705-4 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128572-8 / MHID: 0-07-128572-5 [IE] 

Operations Now introduces the operations function from a 

vantage point that encompasses both the entire organization 

and the broader supply network. The author begins his discussion 

of operations management by first establishing the goal 

to which any high quality operation must aspire: the goal of 

profitability. Operations Now presents operations within a 

context that acknowledges its interactions both within and 

without all functional areas of an organization, including the 

links throughout the supply chain. Thus, students not majoring 

in operations management immediately understand why they 

are studying a subject that had heretofore seemed to them irrelevant; 

operations majors receive valuable instruction in how 

their chosen field affects and facilitates other functional areas 

within the enterprise and aligns with the overall goals of the 

organization. 

Operations/Decision Sciences 


• The Third Edition of Operations Now discusses key functional 

components of the supply chain and how to adapt and extend the 

techniques of operations management to management of supply chains. 

Strategy, quality, demand forecasting, capacity, purchasing, logistics and 

transportation have all now been included in the text’s new emphasis 

on Supply Chain 

• In response to increasing demand on the part of business schools 

that course objectives and assessment material reflect and correspond 

to AACSB curriculum guidelines, the instructor’s/solutions manual and 

the test bank accompanying Operations Now indicate which chapter 

objectives, end-of-chapter questions and problems, and test-bank 

questions link up with and conform to AACSB guidelines. Objectives, 

problems and test questions that fulfill one or more of these guidelines 

are identified by an icon designating the guideline that the objective 

or question fulfills. (A separate icon for each guideline is included; the 

instructor’s resource manual includes a key that matches each icon to 

each AACSB guideline.) 

• New pedagogical features make it even more student-friendly and 

to offer the instructor additional ease and flexibility with assignments 

and reinforcement of key concepts. Among these enhancements are 

advanced problems, cases, solved problems, and callback icons, 

which are placed in the margin of the texts at those points in the narrative 

where the topic being discussed has particular relevance to the 

chapter-opening vignette. 

Features 

• Byron Finch’s proprietary Resource/Profit model represents a unique 

framework for discussion of operations topics. By emphasizing the need 

to view operations decisions both in terms of added value and financial 

return, business students—operations majors and non-majors alike--are 

better equipped to become better managers by understanding the connection 

between operations and good business decisions. 

• Conceptual material is supported by problem sets and case studies 

that yield two key benefits: students are offered ample opportunities to 

test their understanding of concepts and instructors are provided with 

a wealth of assignment material. 

• Operations Now differs from many other textbooks by treating the 

subject of operations management within the context of the entire 

organization and with reference to the other functional areas that 

comprise it. Moreover, Operations Now distinguishes itself by addressing 

more frequently both the internal and external forces that dictate 

and influence the design of a firm’s operation. This gives students the 

perspective they need to understand the utility of the techniques they 

learn in the course. 

Contents 

UNIT ONE: FOUNDATIONS FOR SUCCESS Chapter 1: Introduction 

Chapter 2: Profitability: Business Success from Operations’ Success 

Chapter 3: Strategy and Value: Competing through Effective Operations 

and Supply Chain Management Chapter 4: Processes: Products 

and Services to Match Customer Needs UNIT TWO: COMPONENTS 

OF VALUES Chapter 5: Cost: The Price of Value Creation Chapter 6: 

Quality: Frameworks for Product and Service Improvement Chapter 7: 

Quality Tools: From Process Performance to Process Perfection Chapter 

8: Timeliness: Scheduling and Project Management UNIT THREE: 

MANAGING RESOURCES TO CREATE VALUE Chapter 9: Supply Chain 

Management: Managing Business to Business Interaction Chapter10: 

Demand Forecasting: Building the Foundation for Resource Planning 

Chapter 11: Inventory: Managing to Meet Demand Chapter 12: Logistics: 

Positioning Goods in the Supply Chain Chapter 13: Lean Systems: 

Eliminating Waste through the Supply Chain Chapter 14: Capacity: 

Matching Productive Resources to Demand Chapter 15: Constraint 

Management: Simplifying Complex Systems Chapter 16: Facilities: 

Making Location and Layout Decisions Chapter 17: Workforce: Optimizing 

Human Capital 

49



New 

OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT 

By Robert Jacobs, Indiana University-Bloomington and Richard 

Chase, University of Southern California 

2008 (November 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329473-5 / MHID: 0-07-329473-X 

(with Student DVD) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128573-5 / MHID: 0-07-128573-3 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/jacob1e 

Jacobs and Chase continue to lead the field of Operations Management 

with cutting edge up-to- date content, technology, and 

motivation. Now, in this First Edition Jacobs and Chase focus 

on the core concepts of operations and supply management. 

This condensed text was constructed with the four essential 

core areas of process, quality, inventory, and supply chain 

management in mind, as decided by a panel of OM instructor’s 

at the Decision Science Institute meeting, and after conducting 

a survey of content coverage in representative universities. The 

new Core text provides increased emphasis on supply management 

concepts along with a focused presentation of the core 

OM concepts. 

Features 

• Up-to-date coverage of Supply Chain Management, Enterprise Resource 

Management, Six-Sigma, and Lean Manufacturing: the topics 

that companies focus on today. 

• Breakthrough Boxes featuring best practices at real companies 

• Engaging short cases – real companies, interesting exercises. (Companies 

include Toshiba, IKEA, Brunswick Motors) 

• Internet Beer Game and E-OPS game that are popular with adopters 

of Chase 11e, also apply to The CORE. 

• Reduced length and price. 

• Student DVD with improved user interface, new and expanded 

videos, and a wealth of study resources for students. 

Contents 

Section I – Strategy Chapter 1: Operations and Supply Strategy Chapter 

2: Project Management Section II – Processes Chapter 3: Strategic 

Capacity Management Chapter 4: Manufacturing Processes Chapter 5: 

Service Processes Chapter 6: Six-Sigma Quality Section III – Supply 

Chain Chapter 7: Strategic Sourcing Chapter 8: Logistics Chapter 9: Lean 

Manufacturing Section IV – Inventory Chapter 10: Forecasting Chapter 

11: Aggregate Sales and Operations Planning Chapter 12: Inventory 

Management Chapter 13: Material Requirements Planning / Appendix 

A – Answers to Select Problems Appendix B – Learning Curve Tables 

B.1 – Table of Unit Values B.2 – Table of Cumulative Values Appendix 

C – Present Value Table Appendix D – Negative Exponential Distribution: 

Values of ¿-x Appendix E – Areas of the Cumulative Standard 

Normal Distribution 

New 

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT VIDEO SERIES VOL. 

XII DVD 

9th Edition 

By Irwin/McGraw-Hill 

2007 (October 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326881-X / MHID: 0-07-326881-X 



New 

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 

Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 3rd Edition 

By Roger G Schroeder, University of Minnesota 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313706-3 / MHID: 0-07-313706-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323058-0 / MHID: 0-07-323058-8 

(with Student CD) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125436-6 / MHID: 0-07-125436-6 

[IE with Student CD] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/schroeder3e 

Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, is 

an ideal book for the instructor seeking a short text with cases. 

This book employs a cross-functional perspective, appealing 

to non-majors and practical for use in an MBA level course in 

operations management. The size and price of the book also 

make the text attractive for the cross-functional curriculum 

where students are required to purchase more than one text. 

The cases offer variety in length and rigor; and several are from 

Harvard and Darden. This mix makes the book appropriate for 

both undergraduates and MBA students. 


• Four Chapters Thoroughly revised: 

*Strategy(Chapter 2)- Updated and Rewritten. 

*Processes (Chapte 7)- new flow-chart models and methods 

added. 

*Forecasting (Chapter 11)-new examples and methods incoporated. 

*MRP (Chatper 16)- rewritten to place greater emphasis on ERP 

• Thorough Updating of selected topics: 

* 50% revision and addition to internet exercises. 

*New quantitative problem sets. 

*Three new cases and updates of retained case studies. 

*New boxed inserts. 

• New Topical Additions and Emphases: 

*More e-business applications 

*Greater emphasis on both Lean Operations and JIT 

*Expand coverage of Six Sigma 

Features 

• Unified Decision Framework organizes decisions into four major 

categories: process, quality, capacity, and inventory. 

• Cross-functional emphasis with a balance of manufacturing and 

service examples. Throughout the narrative, OM is discussed in relation 

to other organizational functions, with a wide variety of types of 

companies referenced. 

• Robust Case studies contribute to the depth of student understanding. 

CONTENTS 

Part I: Introduction 1. The Operations Function 2. Operations and 

Supply Chain Strategy 3. Product Design Part II: Process Design 4. 

Process Selection 5. Service Process Design 6. Choice of Technology 7. 

Process-Flow Analysis Part III: Quality 8. Managing Quality 9. Quality 

Control and Improvement Part IV: Capacity and Scheduling 10. Supply 

Chain Management 11. Forecasting 12. Facilities and Aggregate Planning 

13. Scheduling Operations 14. Project Planning and Scheduling 

Part V: Inventory 15. Independent- Demand Inventory 16. Materials 

Requirement Planning 17. Just-in-Time Systems and Lean thinking Part 

VI: Case Studies / Appendixes / Index 

50



New 


9th Edition 

By William J Stevenson, Rochester Institute Technology 

2007 (June 2006) / 832 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110916-1 / MHID: 0-07-110916-1 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/stevenson9e 

The Ninth Edition of Operations Management features the 

latest concepts and applications while not losing focus on the 

core concepts that has made this text a market leader. This 

approachable text supports students in applying concepts and 

methods by providing solved problems, examples, questions, 

practice problems, and cases. Students learn by doing, and 

the Ninth Edition continues to offer more support for ‘doing 

Operations’ than any other. A Student DVDRom complete 

with Excel templates; data files; videos from companies like 

Honda, United Airlines, McDonalds, Disney, and more; self 

quizzes; weblinks; and innovative ‘screencam tutorials’ that 

show students how to use Excel are included in the package. 

The DVDRom also features six new segments and expanded 

editions of additional videos. 


• Expanded Videos on the Student DVD, including six new segements. 

The 9e also features time based indexing to allow zerowing in on specific 

topics wihtin a video segment. 

FEATURES 

• Clearly written explanations of concepts as well as methods. The 

Stevenson text has been the long time market leading title because it is 

understandable for undergraduate business students. This hallmark of 

the text results from the author’s devotion to and expereince at teaching 

combined with thorough development contributions and suggestions 

from hundreds of adopters. 

• Up to date revisions incorporate the latest concepts and applications 

while not losing focus on the core concepts of Operations Management. 

• While some titles may overemphasize the latest hot buzzword, 

Stevenson integrates new ideas carefully and appropriately so that 

students have a long lasting understanding of the important operations 

management considerations to carry forward in the rest of their studies 

and in their careers. 

• The Stevenson text has always supported students in applying 

concepts and methods, with solved problems, examples, questions, 

problems, and cases. Students learn by doing, and the Stevenson text 

offers more support for ‘doing Operations’ than any other. 

• Learning support for students-the text includes a Student DVDRom 

complete with Excel templates, data files, videos from companies like 

Honda, United Airlines, McDonalds, Louisville Slugger, Disney, and 

many more, self quizzes, weblinks, and innovative ‘screencam tutorials’ 

which show students how to use Excel and how to use the excel 

templates. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction 2 Competitiveness, Strategy, and Productivity 3 Forecasting 

4 Product and Service Design 4S Supplement: Reliability 5 

Strategic Capacity Planning for Products and Services 5S Supplement: 

Decision Theory 6 Process Selection and Facilities Layout 6S Linear 

Programming 7 Design of Work Systems 7S Learning Curves 8 Location 

Planning and Analysis 8S The Transportation Model 9 Management of 

Quality 10 Quality Control 10S Acceptance Sampling 11 Supply Chain 

Management 12 Inventory Management 13 Aggregate Planning 14 MRP 

and ERP 15 JIT and Lean Operations 15S Supplement: Maintenance 16 

Scheduling 17 Project Management 18 Capacity Planning and Analysis: 

Waiting Lines 18S Supplement: Simulation 


MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMAND 

An Introduction to Operations Management 

By Gerard Cachon and Christian Terwiesch 

2006 / 368 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-291899-1 / MHID: 0-07-291899-3 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124426-8 / MHID: 0-07-124426-3 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cachon_terwiesch 

The most authoritative, cutting-edge book for operations management 

and supply chain management. The book demands 

rigorous analysis on the part of students. When the use of 

quantitative tools or formal modeling is indicated, it is only to 

perform the necessary analysis needed to inform and support a 

practical business solution. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 The Process View of the Organization 

Chapter 3 Understanding the Supply Process: Evaluation Process Capacity 

Chapter 4 Estimating and Reducing Labor Costs Chapter 5 Bathing 

and Other Flow Interruptions: Set-up Times and the Economic Order 

Quantity Model Chapter 6 Variability and Its Impact on Process Performance: 

Waiting Time Problems Chapter 7 The Impact of Variability 

on Process Performance: Throughput Losses Chapter 8 Fundamentals 

of Quality and the Toyota Production System Chapter 9 Betting on Uncertain 

Demand: The Newsvendor Model Chapter 10 Make-To-Order 

and Quick Response with Reactive Capacity Chapter 11 Service Levels 

and Lead Times in Supply Chains: The Order up-to Inventory Model 

Chapter 12 Risk Pooling Strategies to Reduce and Hedge Uncertainty 

Chapter 13 Revenue Management with Capacity Controls Chapter 14 

Supply Chain Coordination / Appendix / Glossary / References / Index 

of “How to” exhibits / Summary of key equations / Index 


OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT FOR COMPETITIVE 

ADVANTAGE 

11th Edition 

By Richard Chase, University of Southern California, F Robert Jacobs, 

Indiana University—Bloomington and Nicholas J Aquilano, University 

of Arizona 

2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111553-7 / MHID: 0-07-111553-6 

[IE with Student DVD and OLC Card] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/chase11e 

Chase, Jacobs and Aquilano: Operations Management for 

Competitive Advantage, 11/e (CJA) provides a current and 

thorough introduction to the concepts, processes, and methods 

of managing and controlling operations in manufacturing or 

service settings. The text provides comprehensive coverage, 

from high-tech manufacturing to high touch services with a balanced 

treatment. Chase, Jacobs, and Aquilano also thoroughly 

integrates and discusses current issues such as globalization; 

supply chain strategy, E-business, and ERP. The concepts are 

illustrated by using abundant real world examples, articles, illustrations, 

problems and cases. Technology is integral to the 

success of this course, as such, CJA also provide students and 

instructors with an innovative array of leading edge technology 

learning and teaching tools. 

CONTENTS 

SECTION ONE OPERATIONS STRATEGY AND MANAGING CHANGE 

1 Introduction to the Field 2 Operations Strategy and Competitiveness 

Technical Note 2 Optimizing the Use of Resources with Linear Programming 

3 Project Management SECTION TWO PRODUCT DESIGN AND 

51


PROCESS SELECTION 4 Process Analysis Technical Note 4 Job Design 

and Work Measurement 5 Product Design Technical Note 5 Learning 

Curves 6 Manufacturing Process Selection and Design Technical Note 

6 Facility Layout 7 Product Design and Process Selection—Services 

Technical Note 7 Waiting Line Management 8 Quality Management: 

Focus on Six Sigma Technical Note 8 Process Capability and Statistical 

Quality Control 9 Operations Consulting and Reengineering SECTION 

THREE SUPPLY CHAIN DESIGN 10 Supply Chain Strategy 11 Strategic 

Capacity Management Technical Note 11 Facility Location 12 Lean 

Production SECTION FOUR PLANNING AND CONTROLLING THE 

SUPPLY CHAIN Managerial Briefing Enterprise Resource Planning 

Systems 13 Forecasting 14 Aggregate Sales and Operations Planning 

15 Inventory Control 16 Material Requirements Planning 17 Operations 

Scheduling Technical Note 17 Simulation 18 Synchronous Manufacturing 

and Theory of Constraints SUPPLEMENTS A Financial Analysis B 

Operations Technology APPENDICES A Answers to Selected Problems 

B Uniformly Distributed Random Digits C Normally Distributed Random 

Digits D Areas of the Standard Normal Distribution E Areas of 

the Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution F Negative Exponential 

Distribution: Values of e–x G Interest Tables PHOTO CREDITS NAME 

INDEX SUBJECT INDEX 



Integrating Manufacturing and Services, 5th Edition 

By Mark Davis, Bentley College and Janelle Heineke 

2005 / 768 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294824-0 / MHID: 0-07-294824-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299435-3 / MHID: 0-07-299435-5 

(with Student CD and PowerWeb) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111724-1 / MHID: 0-07-111724-5 

[IE with CD and Powerweb] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/davis5e 

Previously known as Fundamentals of Operations Management, 

Operations Management: Integrating Manufacturing and 

Services offers a broad and relatively non-quantitative overview 

of the field of operations management and provides a “big 

picture” perspective that should appeal to a variety of business 

majors—not just those students majoring in operations management. 

Reflecting the background of the authors, Operations 

Management: Integrating Manufacturing and Services has the 

strongest coverage of services of any introductory book on the 

market. The treatment of both manufacturing and services, as 

the new title suggests, is again more fully integrated than other 

competing textbooks. 

CONTENTS 

PART I Operations Management in Today’s Business Environment 1 

Introduction to Operations Management 2 Operations Strategy: Defining 

How Firms Compete S2 Financial Analysis in Operations Management 

3 The Role of Technology in Operations 4 Supply Chain Management 

5 Integrating Manufacturing and Service PART II Process Decisions 6 

New Product and Service Development, and Process Selection 7 Project 

Management 8 Process Measurement and Analysis S8 Job Design and 

Work Performance Measurement 9 Quality Management S9 Quality 

Tools for Improving Processes 10 Lean Production PART III Facility 

Decisions 11 Facility Location and Capacity 12 Facility Layouts S12 

Forecasting PART IV Aggregate Planning and Inventory Decisions 13 

Aggregate Planning 14 Inventory Systems for Independent Demand 15 

Inventory Systems for Dependent Demand PART V Daily Operational 

Decisions 16 Waiting Line Management S16 Waiting Line Theory 17 

Scheduling 



7th Edition 

By Edward M Knod, Western Illinois University and Richard Schonberger, 

University of Washington 

2001 / 672 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246050-6 / MHID: 0-07-246050-4 

(with CD, Mandatory Package) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120216-9 / MHID: 0-07-120216-1 

[IE with CD] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/pom 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Operations Management: Introductory Concepts / Chapter 

2: OM Strategy: Dynamic Competitiveness / Chapter 3: Principles of 

Operations Management / Chapter 4: Demand Management and Forecasting 

Supplement: Least Squares Trend and Correlation Coefficients 

/ Chapter 5: Capacity Planning and Master Scheduling Supplement: 

Aggregate capacity Planning with Excel? / Chapter 6: Order Fulfillment 

and Purchasing / Chapter 7: Designing for Customers’ Needs / Chapter 8: 

The Quality Imperative Supplement: Quality Pioneers of the Twentieth 

Century / Chapter 9: Process Control and Improvement / Chapter 10: 

Flow-Control: Eliminating Process Wastes / Chapter 11: Timing-Another 

Imperative / Chapter 12: Human Resources in OM Supplement: Four 

methods of developing Time Standards / Chapter 13: Managing Materials: 

Timing and Quantities Supplement: Economic Order Quantity: 

Theory and Derivations / Chapter 14: Facilities Management / Chapter 

15: Managing Continuous and Repetitive Operations / Chapter 16: 

Managing Job and Batch Operations / Chapter 17: Managing Projects 

New 

Operation 

Management Supplement 

INTERACTIVE MODELS FOR OPERATIONS AND 

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT 

By Bryon Finch, Miami University of Oh-Oxford 

2007 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285710-8 / MHID: 0-07-285710-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298274-9 / MHID: 0-07-298274-8 

(with CD) 

This First Edition provides interactivity to students by use of stateof-the-art 

java applets. Students are shown concepts depicted 

graphically and are able to manipulate those graphics to simulate 

real world actions. Therefore, students learn comprehensively as 

they participate with the text and supporting technology. Written 

by a leader in this course, the concise and affordable paperback 

can be used harmoniously with additional teaching materials. 

The book adopts a modeling approach for dealing with a variety 

of common problems in designing and improving operations. 

Students will obtain “hands on” experience in developing efficient 

and cost effective solutions to such problems. 

FEATURES 

• State-of-the-Art java applets provide interactivity for students. 

• Adopts a modeling approach to deal with a variety of common 

problems in designing and improving operations. 

• Short, inexpensive paperback format permits use with other materials. 

52

CONTENTS 

Unit 1: Demand Forecasting: The Time Series Components Model 

/ The Simple Exponential Smoothing Model / The Trend Enhanced 

Exponential Smoothing Model / The Linear Trend Equation Model 

/ The Simple Linear Regression Model / Unit 2: Financial Decision 

Making: The Breakeven Model / The Variance Analysis Model / Unit 3: 

Capacity Management: The Learning Curve Model / The Overbooking 

Model / The Aggregate Planning Model / Unit 4: Quality Management 

/ The X-bar and R-chart Model / Unit 5: Inventory Management and 

Scheduling: The Economic Order Point Model / The Economic Order 

Point with Quantity Discounts Model / The Reorder Point Model / The 

Material Requirements Planning Model / The Risk Pooling Model / The 

Bullwhip Effect Model / The Sequencing Rules Model / Unit 6: Facility 

Decisions Models / The Process-Oriented Layout Model / The Center of 

Gravity Model / Unit 7: Process Simulation Models / The Waiting Line 

Simulation Model / The Production Line Simulation Model / The Kanban 

Simulation Model / The Constraint Management Simulation Model 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS 

MANAGEMENT 

2nd Edition 

By Joseph Monks, Gonzaga University 

1996 / 352 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-042764-8 / MHID: 0-07-042764-X 


(International Edition is not available for sale in Japan) 

CONTENTS 

1. Operations Management: Definition, Mission, and Productivity Concepts 

1. Quality Management of Competitive Operations 3. Operations 

Decision Making (Break-Even Analysis, Decision Trees, and Statistical 

Methods) 4. Forecasting (Statistical Methods) 5. Financial Analysis for 

Operations (Present-Value Criteria) 6. Facility Location (Transportation 

Linear Programming) 7. Layout of Facilities (Line Balancing) 8. Product 

Design: Goods and Services (Linear Programming) 9. Process Planning 

and Analysis (Simulation) 10. Job Design and Work Measurement (Statistical 

Sample Size) 11. Aggregate Planning and Master Scheduling 12. 

Materials Management: Purchasing, Inventory and JIT Systems (Calculus) 

13. Inventory Control: Order Points, Safety Stocks, and Service Levels 

(Statistical Methods) 14. Material Requirements Planning: MRP and CRP 

15. Operations Scheduling and Control (Assignment Linear Programming) 

16. Operations Analysis and Maintenance (Calculus, Learning 

Curves, Queuing and Simulation) 17. Project Management (CPM/PERT) 

18. Quality Control (Statistical Methods) / Appendixes 


New 

Operation Management 

Software 

SAP R/3 ENTERPRISE SOFTWARE 

An Introduction 

By Roger Hayen, Central Michigan University 

2007 (May 2006) / 192 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hayen 

This text is written by Dr. Roger Hayen, a SAP R/3 instructor 

at Central Michigan University, one of three universities in the 

U.S. to offer SAP R/3 certification for students in an SAP University 

Alliance program, called “Process Integration Certification 

Academy”. Hayen’s extensive familiarity with the subject provides 

a useful introduction to the essential concepts of the SAP 

R/3 System, with the opportunity for hands-on implementation 

of those concepts. The text’s succinct, yet thorough coverage 

makes it versatile, so that it is appropriate for both student instruction 

and professional training and reference. 

Features 

• The core text is organized into three distinct main parts—Understanding 

Enterprise Software, Displaying SAP R/3 Information, and Processing 

SAP R/3—for easy readability and enhanced functionality. 

• Includes helpful “Quick Checks” for student review of concepts 

after each chapter. 

• Class-tested at Central Michigan University by undergraduate students; 

also used by SAP R/3 for its own training programs. 

• Hands-on, up-to-date exercises using SAP’s IDES training data, SAP 

R/3’s own help files, and the 4.6 R/3 release—critical to the understanding 

and application of the software. Frees instructors’ time, as they would 

otherwise have to create the data for students’ exercises themselves. Also 

ensures students will be market-ready for SAP R/3 user companies. 

• Flexibility of the hands-on exercises. Provided in two formats: local, 

‘read-only’ ones and web-based activities with a ‘live client’ simulating 

a ‘real world’ SAP/R3 implementation. 

• Can be purchased, at a discounted price, with other McGraw-Hill/ 

Irwin texts in Operations Management. 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








• Heavily illustrated with graphics and annotated screen shots. 

Contents 

Preface / Part 1 Understanding Enterprise Software Chapter 1 Overview 

Chapter 2 Navigation and Systems Operation Chapter 3 Application 

Modules Chapter 4 Businesses Processes Chapter 5 Web Application 

Server Chapter 6 Internet Enabled Solutions Chapter 7 Configuration 

Chapter 8 Implementation Framework Chapter 9 Organization Structure 

Chapter 10 Customizing Tools Part 2 Displaying SAP R/3 Information 

Chapter 11 Exploring System Capabilities Part 3 Processing SAP R/3 

Transactions Chapter 12 Customer Order to Cash Cycle Processes / 

Summary / Appendix Quick Check Answers 

53



OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE 

WINDOWS 

By Michael Moses and Sridhar Seshadri of New York University 

1999 

ISBN-13: 978-0-256-26174-5 / MHID: 0-256-26174-1 

(Manual with CD-ROM) - Out of Print 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366261-9 / MHID: 0-07-366261-5 

(CD-ROM) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118453-3 / MHID: 0-07-118453-8 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Introduction to HOM Chapter 2 Integrative Cases Chapter 

3 Ice Queen Snow Blowers Chapter 4 Citibank/Chemical Branch Consolidation 

Chapter 5 Process Analysis Chapter 6 Waiting Line Analysis 

Chapter 7 Inventory Modeling Chapter 8 Material Requirements 

Planning Chapter 9Facility Planning Chapter 10 Forecasting Chapter 

11 Aggregate Planning Chapter 12 Project Management Chapter 13 

Quality Management 

Management Science - Text 


INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT SCIENCE 

A Modeling and Case Studies Approach with 

Spreadsheets, 3rd Edition 

By Frederick Hillier, Stanford University and Mark Hillier, University 

of Washington 

2008 (March 2007) / 672 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312903-7 / MHID: 0-07-312903-8 


• MORE STREAMLINED PRESENTATION, FOCUSING ON KEY 

ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR BUSINESS. The third edition is 

considerably shorter, offering a more focused presentation of management 

science. 

• CLEARER SEPARATION OF SIMPLE AND COMPLEX TOPICS; A 

sharper distinction is made in the book and on the student CD ROM 

between 

Features 

• A MODELING APPROACH:The book revolves around a modeling 

approach, focusing the role of a model, model formulation, and the 

analysis of model results. 

• EXTENSIVE USE OF CASE STUDIES: Many chapters use extended 

case studies illustratively, within the body of the chapter, and offer 

end-of-chapter cases for analysis as well. 

• SPREADSHEET-DRIVEN TREATMENT OF KEY TOPICS IN MANAGE- 

MENT SCIENCE: Taking a modern approach to the subject, and utilizing 

the latest technology, the book adopts pedagogy that is consistent with 

current trends in the teaching of management science. 


New 


By William D Stevenson, North Carolina State University and Ceyhun 

Ozgur, Valparaiso University 

2007 (February 2006) / 672 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299066-9 / MHID: 0-07-299066-X 

(with Spreadsheets) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325290-2 / MHID: 0-07-325290-5 

(with Spreadsheets and Student CD) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110849-2 / MHID: 0-07-110849-1 

[IE with Spreadsheets and Student CD] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325336-7 / MHID: 0-07-325336-7 

(Instructor’s Edition with Student CD t/a Text) 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/stevensonozgur1e 

This text combines the market leading writing and presentation 

skills of Bill Stevenson with integrated, thorough, Excel modeling 

from Ceyhun Ozgur. Professor Ozgur teaches Management Science, 

Operations, and Statistics using Excel, at the undergrad 

and MBA levels at Valparaiso University--and Ozgur developed 

and tested all examples, problems and cases with his students. 

The authors have written this text for students who have no 

significant mathematics training and only the most elementary 

experience with Excel. 

Features 

• Unique student oriented formatting: Stevenson-Ozgur includes more 

Excel Screen shots along with complete Excel cell formulae in virtually 

every example. This provides more detail and better reference support 

for beginning undergraduate level students. 

• Flexibly organized into 3 sections, the Introduction and Forecasting, 

Deterministic Models, and then Probabilistic Models. Forecasting can 

be moved and taught at any time in the course, and there are four supplementary 

chapters included on the CDRom. 

• Teaching and learning support built into each chapter include solved 

examples, solved problems, chapter learning objectives, summaries, 

glossaries, and problems and cases for assignment. 

• Realistic and understandable business examples are used to present 

and motivate student understanding throughout the text. “Modern 

Management Science Applications” included in most chapters provide 

short summaries of the latest Edelman award winning applications for 

student awareness and enrichment. 

• Student CDRom includes introductory ScreenCam tutorials, all 

Excel templates, data files, and Excel solutions for solved examples 

and solved problems. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Introduction and Forecasting. 1-Introduction to Management 

Science, Modeling, and Excel Spreadsheets. 2- Forecasting. Part 2 Deterministic 

Decision Models. 3-Linear Programming: Basic Concepts and 

Graphical Solutions. 4-Linear Programming: Applications and Solutions. 

5- Linear Programming: Sensitivity Analysis, Duality, and Specialized 

Models. 6- Transportation, Assignment, and Transshipment Problems. 

7- Integer Programming. 8- Network Optimization Models. 9- Nonlinear 

Optimization Models. 10- Multi-Criteria Models. Part 3 Probabilistic 

Decision Models. 11- Decision Theory. 12- Markov Analysis. 13- Waiting 

Line Models. 14- Simulation. CDRom Modules. Chapter 4S Simplex 

Algorithm. Chapter 6S Transportation and Assignment Solution. Procedures. 

Chapter 7S Branch and Bound Method for Integer. Programming 

Problems. Chapter 9S Mini –Review: Differential Arithmetic 

54


New 

QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES IN MANAGEMENT 

3rd Edition 

By N D Vohra, Ramjas College of University of Delhi 

2006 (June 2006) / 976 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-061193-1 / MHID: 0-07-061193-9 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/vohra3e 

The new edition continues in the tradition of application of 

various quantitative techniques in managerial decision making. 

Comprehensive treatment of the concepts in the MS/OR area 

and a large number of solved problems and exercises are the 

main pillars of the text. 

Features 

• A new chapter on “Dynamic Programming“ 

• An ‘Overview’ of the contents, at the beginning of every chapter. 



A Modeling & Case Studies Approach with 

Spreadsheets, 2nd Edition 

By Frederick Hillier, Stanford University and Mark Hillier, University 

of Washington 

2003 / 736 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283347-8 / MHID: 0-07-283347-5 

(with Student CD-ROM) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123810-6 / MHID: 0-07-123810-7 

[IE with CD] 

CONTENTS 

1. Introduction / 2. Linear Programming: Basic Concepts / 3. The Art of 

Modeling with spreadsheets / 4. Linear Programming: Formulation and 

Applications / 5. What-If Analysis for Linear Programming / 6. Transportation 

and Assignment Problems / 7. Network Optimization Problems / 

8. Project Management with PERT/CPM / 9. Integer Programming / 10. 

Nonlinear Programming / 11. Goal Programming / 12. Decision Analysis 

/ 13. Forecasting / 14. Queuing Models / 15. Computer Simulation: Basic 

Concepts / 16. Computer Simulation with Crystal Ball 

• Section on PERT/CPM (Chapter 12) has been enlarged. 

• Changes in the chapter on Inventory Management (chapter 9) on 

the 

• discussion on Safety Stock. 

• More exercises in Goal Programming (chapter 7). 

• An OLC containing solutions manual 

Learning Aids 

• Key Points to Remember 

• Test Your Understanding 

• Exercises and Practical Problems 

• Review Illustrations (solved examples) 

• Chapter Summary 

• Schematics of algorithms 

CONTENTS 

1. Introduction 2. Linear Programming I: Formulation and Graphic 

Solution 3. Linear Programming II: The Simplex Method 4. Linear Programming 

III: Duality and Sensitivity Analysis 5. Specially Structured 

Linear Programs I Transportation and Transshipment Problems 6. Specially 

Structured Linear Programs II Assignment Problem 7. Extensions 

of Linear Programming 8. Sequencing 9. Inventory Management 10. 

Queuing Theory 11. Replacement Theory 12. PERT and CPM 13. Decision 

Theory 14. Markov Analysis 15. Theory of Games 16. Dynamic 

Programming 17. Simulation 18. Investment Analysis and Break-even 

Analysis 19. Forecasting / Appendices 


MANAGERIAL SPREADSHEET MODELING AND 

ANALYSIS 

By Rick Hesse, Mercer University 

1997 / 704 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-256-21530-4 / MHID: 0-256-21530-8 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114830-6 / MHID: 0-07-114830-2 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

1. The Nature of Managerial Problem Solving. 2. Linear Programming: 

Simple Models. 3. Postoptimal Linear Programming Analysis. 4. Linear 

Programming: Combination Models and Reports. 5. Allocation Models. 

6. Routing Models. 7. Network Models. 8. Integer Programming Models. 

9. Integer Programming Applications. 10. Nonlinear Models: Inventory 

and Design. 11. Decision Analysis. 12. Forecasting. 13. Brand Switching 

and Queuing Models. 14. Simulation: Discrete Distributions. 15. 

Simulation: Continuous Distributions. Appendix Spreadsheet Solver 

and Features. 










55


Quantitative Method - Text 

New 

QUANTITATIVE METHODS FOR BUSINESS 

2nd Edition 

By Frank Dewhurst 

2006 (April 2006) / 608 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710902-8 / MHID: 0-07-710902-3 


Website: http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/dewhurst 

The new edition of Quantitative Methods for Business and Management 

offers a complete introductory course in Quantitative 

Methods, providing students with basic practical experience in 

quantitative approaches in modelling and analysis for business 

and management. The book features sections on foundation 

topics, models for business and management, and modelling 

and analyzing decisions. In particular, the new edition features 

greater coverage of statistics to reflect teaching in this area, 

with chapters on Elementary Statistics, Summary Statistics and 

Inferential Statistics. Other new areas of coverage in the second 

edition include Network Models and Non-linear Models. The 

book retains its popular style which offers students numerous 

examples accompanied by clear and straightforward explanations. 

Excel examples are also integrated throughout to help 

students to understand how this software tool is used by managers, 

and frequent questions and exercises enable students to 

test their understanding. A free CD contains Excel applications 

and solutions to the exercises in the textbook, and a full online 

learning centre completes an excellent learning package for 

business students. 


• Enhanced coverage of statistics, developing the topic coverage to 

offer chapters on Elementary Statistics, Summary Statistics and Inferential 

Statistics 

• A revised and restructured Part C offers further new chapters on 

Network Models and Non-linear Models 

• Streamlined introductory material rewritten to offer a more concise 

introduction to the basic concepts of numbers and symbols 

• A CD-ROM with illustrative worked examples from the text implemented 

in Microsoft Excel and new to this edition, complete answers 

to exercises within the textbook. 

Features 

• Packed with examples to demonstrate quantitative techniques in 

pracice, with clear and helpful explanations throughout 

and Statistical models. 7. An introduction to inferential statistics. 8. 

Modelling relationships. 9. Non-linear and multivariate relationships. 

10. Analysing models. 11. An introduction to Time-Series. 12. Models 

for finance and accounting. Part B: Closing comments. Part B: Mini 

cases. Part C Modelling and analysing decisions. 13. An introduction 

to Decision Analysis. 14. An introduction to linear programming. 15. 

An introduction to network models. 16. An introduction to non-linear 

decision models. Appendices. Solutions 

Upper Level 

Operations Management 


PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS ANALYSIS 

5th Edition 

By Steven Nahmias, Santa Clara University 

2005 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301865-2 / MHID: 0-07-301865-1 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123837-3 / MHID: 0-07-123837-9 

[IE with Student CD-ROM] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/nahmias5e 

This text provides a survey of the analytical methods used to support 

the functions of production and operations management. 

This latest edition continues to bring the most thorough coverage 

of cutting-edge quantitative models used in operations, while 

presenting it in a clean, easy to understand fashion. There are 

many new problems both solved and unsolved for students to 

comprehend the quantitative material of the book. Furthermore, 

we have enhanced the technology package of this book to have 

more applied learning of concepts and skills for students. Lastly, 

technology, such as the internet, ecommerce, etc has been 

added to reflect the changes in how business is conducted. This 

text reflects Steve Nahmias’ extensive teaching background and 

experience in both business and engineering schools. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1. Strategy and Competition Chapter 2. Forecasting Chapter 

3. Aggregate Planning Supplement 1 Linear Programming Chapter 4. 

Inventory Control Subject to Known Demand Chapter 6. Supply Chain 

Management Chapter 7. Push and Pull Production Control Systems: 

MRP and JIT Chapter 8. Operations Scheduling Supplement 2 Queuing 

Theory Chapter 9. Project Scheduling Chapter 10. Facilities Layout and 

Location Chapter 11. Quality and Assurance Chapter 12. Reliability 

and Maintainability 

• Numerous Exercises and case study problems to apply the techniques 

to business decisions and offer essential problem-solving practice 

• Short, self-contained sections covering a broad range of topics allow 

the book to be tailored to suit any quantitative techniques course. 

• Section prerequisites, learning objectives, summaries and key point 

boxes are accompanied by signpost references to enable easy navigation 

through the book. 

Contents 

Brief TOC. Detailed TOC. Contents of CD-ROM. Preface. Acknowledgements. 

Guided Tour. Part A The foundations of Quantitative 

Methods. 1. An introduction to Quantitative Methods. 2. From numbers 

to symbols. 3. Matrices and matrix algebra. 4. Elementary Statistics. 5. 

Summary Statistics. Part A: Closing comments. Part A: Mini cases. Part 

B Models and analysis for business and management. 6. Probability 

56



FACTORY PHYSICS 

2nd Edition 

By Wallace Hopp, Northwestern University, and Mark Spearman, 

Georgia Institute of Technology 

2000 / 736 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-256-24795-4 / MHID: 0-256-24795-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116378-1 / MHID: 0-07-116378-6 [IE] 

Website: www.factoryphysics.nwu.com 

CONTENTS 

PART I THE LESSONS OF HISTORY Chapter 1. Manufacturing in 

America Chapter 2. Inventory Control: From EOQ to ROP Chapter 3. 

The MRP Crusade Chapter 4. The JIT Revolution Chapter 5. What Went 

Wrong PART II FACTORY PHYSICS Chapter 6. Manufacturing Systems 

Analysis Chapter 7. Basic Factory Dynamics Chapter 8. Variability 

Basics Chapter 9. The Corrupting Influence of Variability Chapter 10. 

Push and Pull Production Systems Chapter 11. The Human Element in 

Operations Management Chapter 12. Total Quality Manufacturing PART 

III PRINCIPLES IN PRACTICE Chapter 13. A Pull Planning Framework 

Chapter 14. Shop Floor Control Chapter 15. Production Scheduling 

Chapter 16. Aggregate and Workforce Planning Chapter 17. Inventory 

Management Chapter 18. Capacity Management Chapter Synthesis-Pulling 

It All Together References Index Standard Normal Table 

Production / Inventory 

Control 


MANUFACTURING PLANNING AND CONTROL 

SYSTEMS 

5th Edition 

By Thomas Vollmann, William Lee Berry, Ohio State University 

Columbus, David Clay Whybark, University of North Carolina 

2005 / 736 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-229990-8 / MHID: 0-07-229990-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112133-0 / MHID: 0-07-112133-1 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/vollmann5 

Vollman, Berry, Whybark and Jacobs’, Manufacturing Planning 

& Control Systems, 5/e provides comprehensive real world 

based coverage of the concepts, tools, and methods used to 

manage and control manufacturing systems. This major revision 

contains four entirely new chapters and four thoroughly 

upgraded to nearly original content. ERP system coverage 

and the impact of them in the field is covered now in a new 

introductory chapter (4) as well as being integrated heavily into 

many other chapters from Sales and Operations Planning (3) 

to Advanced Scheduling Systems (16). Manufacturing Planning 

& Control Systems, 5/e continues to be organized in a flexible 

format, with the basic coverage in chapters 1-12 followed by 

advanced chapters that could be covered along with the basics, 

or skipped. Each chapter provides a managerial issues overview, 

then the detailed technical presentation, then examples of company 

implementations, then concluding principles. 

CONTENTS 

1- Integration and Supply Chains 2- Demand Management 3-Sales and 

Operations Planning 4- ERP-Integrated Systems 5-Basic Inventory Concepts 

6-Master Production Scheduling 7-MRP (Materials Requirements 

Planning) 8-JIT 9-Capacity Planning 10-Production Activity Control 

11-Supply Chain 12- Implementation 13- MPC Systems and Strategy 

14- Advanced MRP 15-Advanced JIT 16- Advanced Scheduling Systems 

17-Advanced Concepts in Sales and Operations Planning 18-Frontiers 


FOUNDATIONS OF INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 

By Paul H Zipkin, Duke University Fuqua Graduate School of 

Business 

2000 / 768 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-256-11379-2 / MHID: 0-256-11379-3 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118315-4 / MHID: 0-07-118315-9 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1. General Introduction Chapter 2. Systems and Models Chapter 

3. One Item with a Constant Demand Rate Chapter 4. Time-Varying Demands 

Chapter 5. Several Products and Locations Chapter 6. Stochastic 

Demand: One Item with Constant Lead Times Chapter 7. Stochastic 

Lead Times: The Structure of the Supply System Chapter 8. Several Items 

with Stochastic Demands Chapter 9. Time-Varying, Stochastic Demand: 

Policy Optimization Bibliography Appendix A: Optimization and 

Convexity Appendix B: Dynamical Systems Appendix C: Probability 

and Stochastic Processes Appendix D: Notational Conventions 


PRODUCTION 

Planning, Control and Integration 

By Daniel Sipper, Robert Bulfin, Auburn 

1997 / 512 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-057682-7 / MHID: 0-07-057682-3 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115843-5 / MHID: 0-07-115843-X [IE] 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 The Production Paradigm. Chapter 2 Market Driven Systems. 

Chapter 3 Problem Solving. Chapter 4 Forecasting. Chapter 5 Aggregate 

Planning. Chapter 6 Inventory: Independent Demand Systems. Chapter 

7 Production, Capacity and Material Planning. Chapter 8 Operations 

Scheduling. Chapter 9 Project Planning, Scheduling and Control. Chapter 

10 Integrated Production Planning and Control. 

New 

Project Management 

PROJECT MANAGEMENT 

The Managerial Process, 4th Edition 

By Clifford Gray and Erik Larson of Oregon State University 

2008 (March 2007) / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352515-0 / MHID: 0-07-352515-4 


57



New 

MANAGING PROJECT AND SERVICE 

DEVELOPMENT 

Text and Cases 

By Stefan H Thomke, Harvard Business School 

2007 (January 2006) / 448 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302301-4 / MHID: 0-07-302301-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110755-6 / MHID: 0-07-110755-X [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/thomke 

This text offers a new option for instructors interested in emphasizing 

a balance between products and services. Managing Product 

and Service Development is about the managerial aspects 

critical to conceiving, designing, and developing innovative 

products and services. The course exposes students to some of 

the best management practices, tools, and frameworks known 

today, and introduces new approaches that hold promise for the 

future. Many texts are either aimed at engineering or marketing 

specialists and do not adequately address the often difficult 

general management issues that arise in complex development 

project. This book does not require training or experience in 

a technical field but addresses the role of new technologies in 

product development. In this text students learn about innovation 

through exploration. All the material has been developed 

and tested in the MBA and executive education classroom at 

Harvard Business School. The Instructor’s Manual (IM), as only 

part of this text’s proven teaching materials, describes an optional 

student project that complements in-class sessions. 

Features 

• Harvard Business School tested: The teaching material and approaches 

have been developed, tested, and refined over six years in a 

successful second-year MBA elective course at Harvard Business School. 

Students are given a conceptual introduction to the subject—then asked 

to explore and validate these concepts through case analysis. This 

method has resulted in a deeper understanding for students. 

• A Balanced Approach: With a balanced approach that covers product 

and service development, readers receive a broad and realistic idea of 

development issues in each major sector of our economy. Offering more 

than simply teaching fundamental principles (process design, project 

management, etc.); this new text pushes the frontiers of product and 

service development. Each module contains advanced material from 

recent research in a teaching friendly form (e.g., innovation toolkits in 

the Bush Boake Allen case study, lead user research in the Innovation 

at 3M case study). 

• Innovation through Exploration: Employs and promotes an inductive, 

exploratory approach to the process of product and services 

development. With its emphasis on the experimental and exploratory 

aspects of product and service development, this book stresses the 

importance of maintaining a fresh and innovative perspective in design 

and development. 

• More Than a Text: This new edition is much more than the sum of its 

parts; the case studies, readings, and exercises are integrated into three 

modules that have an underlying pedagogical logic that is explained in 

module notes. These materials (module notes, teaching notes & plans, 

presentation material) are made available to all adopting instructors. 

Contents 

Introduction. Module One: Building Capabilities for Experimentation, 

Learning and Prototyping. Module Overview. Case: The Final Voyage 

of the Challenger. Case: Apple Powerbook: Design Quality and Time 

to Market. Case: IDEO Product Development. Case: Bank of America. 

Article: R&D Comes to Services: Bank of America’s Pathbreaking Experiments. 

Case: Team New Zealand. Article: Enlightened Experimentation: 

The New Imperative for Innovation. Case: Eli Lilly & Company: Drug 

Development Strategy. Module Two: Development Process Design 

and Improvement. Module Overview. Case: Innovation at 3M. Article: 

Creating Breakthroughs at 3M Note: Understanding User Needs. Case: 

Product Development at Dell Computer Corporation. Article: Agile 

Product Development: Managing Flexibility in Uncertain Environments. 

Case: Developing Products on Internet Time: A Process Design Exercise. 

Article: Developing Products on Internet Time. Case: BMW AG: The 

Digital Car Project. Article: The Effect of ‘Front-Loading’ Problem-Solving 

on Product Development Performance. Case: Bush Boake Allen. 

Article: Customers as Innovators: A New Way to Create Value. Module 

Three: Managing Development Networks. Module Overview. Case: 

Microsoft Office: Finding the Suite Spot. Note: Learning from Projects: 

Note on Conducting a Postmortem Analysis. Case: We’ve Got Rhythm! 

Medtronic Corporation’s Cardiac Pacemaker Business. Article: Creating 

Project Plans to Focus Product Development. Case: Siemens AG: Global 

Development Strategy. Article: Building Effective R&D Capabilities 

Abroad. Case: Project Dreamcast: Serious Play at Sega Enterprises Ltd. 

Article: Increasing Returns and the New World of Business. Case: Millennium 

Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Article: Mastering the Value Chain: An 

Interview with Mark Levin of Millennium Pharmaceuticals 



3rd Edition 

By Clifford Gray and Erik Larson of Oregon State University 

2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312699-9 / MHID: 0-07-312699-3 

(with Student CD and MS Project CD) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124446-6 / MHID: 0-07-124446-8 

[IE with Student CD and MS Project CD] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/graylarson3e 

This text approaches Project Management from a holistic, balanced 

perspective. The text is developed around a philosophy 

of a project-driven organization committed to continuous improvement 

and organizational learning. The text is holistic—it 

directs attention to the needed linkage between projects and 

organizational strategy. Many project management textbooks 

emphasize the technical aspects of the subject, while providing 

scant attention to the human element in projects. This text succeeds 

in redressing the balance by treating both the technical 

and the behavioral aspects of the subject in nearly equal parts. 

Such a balance is possible because of the complementary backgrounds 

of the authors: Gray, a specialist in project management 

systems with an operations background, provides strong technical 

coverage of project management. Larson, whose professional 

background is in organizational behavior, brings a distinctive 

behavioral perspective to the subject. 

CONTENTS 

Brief Contents / Preface / 1. Modern Project Management 2. Organization 

Strategies and Project Selection 3. Organization: Structure and 

Culture 4. Defining the Project 5. Estimating Project Times and Costs 

6. Developing a Project Plan 7. Managing Risk 8. Scheduling Resources 

9. Reducing Project Duration 10. Leadership: Being an Effective Project 

Manager 11. Managing Project Teams 12. Partnering: Managing Interorganizational 

Relations 13. Progresses and Performance Measurement 

and Evaluation 14. Project Audit and Closure 15. International Projects 

16. The Process of Project Management and the Future / Acronyms / 

Appendix Computer Project Exercises / Glossary / Project Management 

Equations / Index 

58



INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS 


A Systems Approach, 2nd Edition 

By David L. Olson, University of Nebraska - Lincoln 

2004 / 352 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287270-5 / MHID: 0-07-287270-5 

(with Student CD) - Out of Print 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123261-6 / MHID: 0-07-123261-3 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/olson2e 

Olson’s Introduction to Project Management, 2/e is a project 

management text that focuses on “systems” issues. The primary 

focus is to examine the many issues facing MIS project managers. 

The revision also now incorporates the Project Management 

Institute’s Body of Knowledge (PMBOK), better preparing users 

for the PMI certification exam. Olson focuses on traditional 

project management topics such as project adoption, planning, 

scheduling, and implementation while encouraging students 

to view the projects holistically and analytically. Utilizing the 

most current software and project management tools, he provides 

students with the most effective strategies for today’s IT 

project managers. 

CONTENTS 

1. Introduction to Project Management 2. Human Aspects of Information 

Systems Project Management 3. Project Organization 4. Project 

Selection and Approval 5. Requirements Definition 6. System Development 

7. Estimation 8. Quantitative Project Scheduling Methods 9. 

Probabilistic Scheduling Models 10. Project Implementation 11. Project 

Control and Assessment / Appendix (Microsoft Project) / PMBOK Cross 

References 


SIM’S PROJECT PLAYER’S MANUAL AND ACCESS 

CODE 

By Jeffrey K. Pinto and Diane H. Parente 

2003 / 250 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293215-7 / MHID: 0-07-293215-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124169-4 / MHID: 0-07-124169-8 

[IE with CD and Access Code] 

With the rapid rise of computers and advanced technology 

in the classroom have come new pedagogical approaches to 

teaching. One of the most powerful of these approaches is the 

use of computer simulations to demonstrate real world business 

practices, the inter-relatedness of various business functions, and 

the role of competitive decision-making in business. Computer 

simulations encourage team development, collaboration, global 

thinking, and a predilection to consider the ramifications of 

decisions and their effect on the bottom line in other words, 

many of the skills that are useful to project managers and team 

members in business. The purpose of this simulation is to tie 

together many of the salient challenges of project management 

in order to give students the deepest possible understanding of 

the complexities involved in undertaking a project. The goal of 

the simulation will be to have students manage a project from 

initiation to completion. Within this framework the student will 

need to employ and develop skills pertinent to personnel selection 

and training, motivation, conflict management, and stakeholder 

management. Students will be required to use planning 

and scheduling techniques, such as work breakdown structures, 

PERT/CPM, scope development, and risk analysis. The topical 

coverage will have approximate coincidence with the Project 

Management Institute’s Body of Knowledge (PMBOK), insuring 

that the students gain exposure to those topics recognized by 

the key professional organization for project manager. Although 

perfectly useful as a stand-alone piece of software, this simulation 

can be bundled with either of any project management 

books, discounting both bundled items. An especially attractive 

option is to bundle it with the Second Edition of Project 

Management: The Managerial Process by Gray and Larson. 

Great pains were taken to coordinate the revision of this book 

with the development of Pinto and Parente’s simulation. One 

of the four scenarios used in the simulation has been cast in 

the form of a continuing case used in the book, thus making a 

tie in between the book and the simulation. 

Quality Control /Management 


New 

QUALITY PLANNING AND ANALYSIS 

From Product Development Through Use, 5th Edition 

By Frank M Gryna Jr., University of Tampa, Joseph A DeFeo and 

Richard CH Chua of Juran Institute 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296662-6 / MHID: 0-07-296662-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125421-2 / MHID: 0-07-125421-8 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/gryna 

Through four editions, Juran’s Quality Planning and Analysis has 

provided students and professionals with an authoritative treatment 

of the subject that goes beyond statistical techniques. The 

fifth edition of this highly regarded classic book on managing 

for quality, Juran’s Quality Planning and Analysis for Enterprise 

Quality, combines the pioneering concepts of Dr. Joseph M. 

Juran and the teachings of the late Dr. Frank M. Gryna with 

the insights and experience of today’s leading trainers and 

practitioners at the Juran Institute: Dr. Richard Chua, Executive 

VP and Joseph A. DeFeo, President & Executive Coach. The 

trademark Juran Institute approach has been retained, developing 

the viewpoint that the achievement of quality products and 

services requires the application of managerial, technological, 

statistical, and behavioral actions throughout all functions of 

an organization. With real-world problems provided in each 

chapter, students are faced with realities that confront managers, 

designers, engineers, marketers, operations personnel, users, 

and others involved in enterprise quality. This text will challenge 

readers to make assumptions, estimate economics, reach 

data-driven conclusions, and adapt themselves to the imperfect 

world of the practitioner. Students and professionals will also 

find this book useful as they prepare for various certifications 

such as the Certified Quality Engineer, Reliability Engineer, 

Quality Manager, Six Sigma Green Belt and Black Belt. 


• A Road Map for Enterprise Quality to provide guidance to organizations 

on how to achieve and sustain breakthrough results. 

• Modular organization of topics into four parts-Foundation, Managerial 

Concepts, Functional Applications, and Statistical Techniques-to 

enable instructors (and the reader) to customize topic coverage easily 

for different classes. 

• New and expanded topics, including: Six Sigma Improvement, Design 

for Six Sigma, Lean, Value Stream Management, Mass Customization, 

Quality Function Deployment, and Strategic Deployment. 

• Actual Six Sigma and Lean project examples and presentations. 

59


• A fuller treatment of Hypothesis Testing, including a hypothesis testing 

roadmap, to guide students on the choice of statistical tests. 

• Updated references and supplementary readings with descriptions 

of the citations, based on online searches of the latest literature-books, 

conferences, and journals. 

• Use of MINITAB software to analyze data and solve problems. 

Worked examples using MINITAB are featured and data sets for exercises 

are provided on the website. 

• New examples and exercises expanded to include: medical devices, 

service sector, pharmaceuticals, food, and software industries. 

• Integration of ASQ style exam questions throughout chapters and 

updated in the Appendix. 

• 25% new figures. 

Contents 

Introduction: A Roadmap for Change Part I: Foundation 1. Basic Concepts 

2. Companywide Assessment of Quality 3. Quality Improvement 

and Cost Reduction 4. Operational Quality Planning and Sales Income 

5. Quality Control Part II: Managerial Concepts 6. Process Management 

7. Organization for Quality 8. Strategic Quality Management 9. 

Developing a Quality Culture Part III: Functional Applications 10. 

Understanding Customer Needs 11. Designing for Quality 12. Supply 

Chain Management 13. Operations-Manufacturing Sector 14. Operations-Service 

Sector 15. Inspection, Test, and Measurement 16. Quality 

Assurance Audits Part IV: Statistical Techniques 17. Basic Concepts 

of Statistics and Probability 18. Statistical Tools for Analyzing Data 19. 

Statistical Tools for Designing for Quality 20. Statistical Process Control 

Appendix I: Supplementary Problems Using Minitab Appendix II: Study 

Guide Examples Appendix III: Tables 

WHAT IS DESIGN FOR SIX SIGMA 

By Peter Pande, Robert Neuman and Roland Cavanagh of Pivotal 

Resources 

2006 / 96 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-142389-2 / MHID: 0-07-142389-3 


What Is Design for Six Sigma? reveals how to use DFSS to design 

new products, services, and processes so that quality problems 

can be solved before they ever start. Topics include: 

• How to design new products and processes 

• The DMADOV implementation process (Define, Measure, 

Analyze, Design, Optimize, and Verify) 

• How to redesign existing processes and services 


QUALITY MANAGEMENT 

3rd Edition 

By Howard Gitlow, University of Miami, Rosa Oppenheim, Rutgers 

University, Alan Oppenheim, Montclair State University and David 

Levine 

2005 / 767 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299983-9 / MHID: 0-07-299983-7 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112338-9 / MHID: 0-07-112338-5 


Quality improvement is now recognized as an essential function 

of any organization’s survival. Leading corporations have 

demonstrated that improved quality raises profits, reduces costs, 

and provides competitive advantage. This is no minor task, it 

requires vast knowledge, training on the proper tools and effective 

methods and strategies. In comes, Quality Management, 

3/e, this text presents a comprehensive approach to quality 

improvement, using Dr. W. Edwards Deming’s philosophy of 

quality, productivity, and competitive position. Attention is 

given to modern inspection policies (Deming’s kp rule) as opposed 

to traditional acceptance sampling procedures, integrated 

with the author’s effective use of quality improvement stories, 

many examples and mini-case studies to help students better 

understand and appreciate the concept of Quality Management 

and Improvement. 

CONTENTS 

Part One: Foundations of Quality Management 1 Fundamentals of 

Quality 2 Fundamentals of Statistical Studies 3 Defining and Documenting 

a Process Part Two: Tools and Methods of Analytic Studies 4 Basic 

Probability and Statistics 5 Stabilizing and Improving a Process with 

Control Charts 6 Attribute Control Charts 7 Variables Control Charts 8 

Out-Of-Control Patterns 9 Diagnosing a Process 10 Specifications 11 

Process Capability and Improvement Studies 12 Taguchi Methods-Quality 

Improvement in Product and Process Design 13 Inspection Policy 

Part Three: Administrative Systems for Quality Management 14 Management 

Commitment to Transformation 15 Management’s Intellectual 

and Emotional Education 16 Daily Management 17 Cross Functional 

Management 18 Policy Management (Hoshin Kanri) Part Four: Some 

Current thinking About Statistical Studies and Practice 19 Some Current 

thinking about Statistical Studies 20 “Six Sigma” Management 


JURAN’S QUALITY CONTROL HANDBOOK 

5th Edition 

By Joseph Juran and A. Godfrey 

1999 / 1872 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-034003-9 / MHID: 0-07-034003-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116539-6 / MHID: 0-07-116539-8 [IE] 


(International Edition is not for sale in Japan) 

CONTENTS 

Part I: Managerial. Part II: Functional. Part III: Industries. Part IV: International. 

Part V: Statistical. 

60



STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 

7th Edition 

By Eugene Grant, Stanford University, and Richard Leavenworth, 

University of Florida 

1996 / 764 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-844354-1 / MHID: 0-07-844354-7 

(with 3.5” disk) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116320-0 / MHID: 0-07-116320-4 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction and Overview 2 Directions for Simple X and R Charts 

3 Why the Control Chart Works; Some Statistical Concepts 4 Why the 

Control Chart Works; Some Examples 5 Some Fundamentals of The 

Theory of Probability 6 The Control Chart for Fraction Rejected 7 The 

Control Chart for Nonconformities 8 Rational Subgrouping 9 Statistical 

Analysis of Process Capability and for Process Improvement 10 Some 

Special Process Control Procedures 11 Some Fundamental Concepts 

in Scientific Sampling 12 An AQL System for Lot-by-Lot Acceptance 

Sampling by Attributes 13 Other Procedures for Acceptance Sampling 

by Attributes 14 Systems for Acceptance Sampling from Continuous 

Production 15 Systems for Acceptance Sampling by Variables 16 Some 

Aspects of Life Testing and Reliability 17 Some Economic Aspects of 

Quality Decisions 18 Some Significant Events in the Development of 

Statistical Quality Control 19 Models for Quality Management and 

Problem Solving 20 Demonstrating the Operation of Systems of Chance 

Causes / Appendixes 

Service Operations 

Management 


SERVICE MANAGEMENT 

Operations, Strategy, Information Technology, 

5th Edition 

By James A Fitzsimmons, University of Texas at Austin 

2006 / 624 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298230-5 / MHID: 0-07-298230-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312258-8 / MHID: 0-07-312258-0 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124440-4 / MHID: 0-07-124440-9 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fitzsimmons5e 

Balancing conceptual and applied coverage of all aspects of the 

management and operation of services, this book has maintained 

the position as market leader through four previous editions. 

It is the most comprehensive and widely used introduction to 

service operations on the market, written by one of the top 

authorities on the subject and is designed to develop students’ 

skills in both strategic and operational issues pertaining to 

services. New material on service out-sourcing highlights the 

importance of supply chain issues with services. In addition, 

discussion on the balanced scorecard and Six Sigma gives 

students the latest, most wide-ranging techniques for ensuring 

quality and evaluating long-term strategy planning. Coverage 

spans both qualitative and quantitative aspects of service management 

and offers flexibility in courses offering widely varying 

approaches to the study of service operations. The ancillary 

package includes student CD-ROM and Website that includes 

self-test quizzes, video clips, ServiceModel Software, and the 

Mortgage Service Game. 

CONTENTS 

Part I:UNDERSTANDING SERVICES Chp. 1 The Role of Services in an 

Economy Chp. 2 The Nature of Services Chp. 3 Service Strategy Part 

II: DESIGNING THE SERVICE ENTERPRISE Chp. 4 New service Development 

Chp. 5 Technology in Services Chp. 6 Service Quality Chp. 

7 The Service Encounter Chp. 8 The Supporting Facility Chp. 9 Service 

Facility Location Chp. 10 Managing Projects Part III: STRUCTURING 

MANAGING SERVICE OPERATIONS Chp. 11 Forecasting Demand for 

Services Chp. 12 Managing Capacity and Demand Chp. 13 Managing 

Waiting Lines Chp. 14 Capacity Planning and Queuing Models Chp. 

15 Service Supply Relationships Chp. 16 Managing Facilitating Goods 

Chp 17 Growth and Globalization of Services Appendix A: Areas of a 

Standard Normal Distribution Appendix B: Uniformly Distributed Random 

Numbers [0,1] Appendix C: Values of Lq for The M/M/c Queuing 

Model Appendix D: Equations for Selected Queuing Models 

FLYING HIGH IN A COMPETITIVE INDUSTRY 

Cost Effective Service Excellence at Singapore Airlines 

By Loizos Heracleous, Nitin Pangarkar and Jochen Wirtz 

2005 / 168 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124964-5 / MHID: 0-07-124964-8 

An Asian Publication 


This book aims to answer a simple but intriguing question: 

How has Singapore Airlines managed to make healthy profits 

every year, in an industry whose performance over the years 

has been dismal? SIA’s profitability on the other hand has been 

exceptional, superior in the long term than any competitor in 

its peer group. The authors’ purpose in writing this book is to 

answer this question, based on in-depth research on the airline 

industry and SIA, and derive some general lessons for managers 

in other industries. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction 2 The Airline Industry: Trends, Economics, Performance 

and Strategic Imperatives 3 Key Drivers of SIA’s Performance: Strategic 

Choices and Resource Deployment Decisions 4 Achieving Cost Effective 

Service Excellence at Singapore Airlines 5 Innovation as a Key 

to Sustain Key Excellence 6 Managing People Effectively to Deliver 

Sustained Service Excellence 7 How to Win in Cut Throat Industries / 

Lessons from Singapore Airlines 


PROFESSIONAL SERVICES 

Text and Cases 

By Thomas DeLong and Ashish Nanda of Harvard Business School 

2004 / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255920-0 / MHID: 0-07-255920-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121326-4 / MHID: 0-07-121326-0 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/delongnanda 

DeLong and Nanda’s Managing Professional Services is the first 

casebook to be published on the management of professional 

service firms (law firms, architecture, financial services, consulting). 

It includes a comprehensive selection of case studies 

that span these industries broadly. Although much has been 

researched and written about managing service firms generally 

(e.g., food service, hotels, banking and other consumer services), 

very little has been compiled on managing professional services. 

Professional Service firms have a highly educated employee base 

and these firms offer both consumer and commercial services 

that involve managing, supporting and improving their clients’ 

intellectual assets. Delong and Nanda have developed this text 

61


to demonstrate to students the unique challenges and opportunities 

attendant upon this market segment of our economy. 

CONTENTS 

Module I: Hambrecht & Quist / AGENCY.COM / Module II: Thomas 

Weisel Partners / Woodland Partners: Field of Dreams? / Eggrock Partners, 

LLC / The HBS California Research Center / Casto Travel / Shouldice 

Hospital Limited Lebenthal and Co., Inc. / The Bridgespan Group / Module 

III: Morgan Stanley Dean Witter Private Client Services Diamond 

in the Rough / The Goldman Sachs IPO (A) / Family Feud: Andersen 

vs. Andersen (A) / The Saga of Prince Jefri and KPMG: Mystery of the 

Missing Billions / International Profit Associates / Coopers & Lybrand 

in Hungary / Module IV: The Firmwide 360-degree Performance 

Evaluation Process at Morgan Stanley / Rob Parson at Morgan Stanley 

/ Strategic Services at Andersen Consulting / Bain & Co., Inc.: Making 

Partner / Venture Law Group Brainard, Bennis & Farrell / McKinsey & 

Co.: Managing Knowledge and Learning / San Francisco Bay Consulting 

/ Module V: &Samhoud / The Union Carbide Deal (Abridged) / Jill 

Greenthal at Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette: The TCI/AT&T Deal (A) / 

Module VI: Cambridge Consulting Group: Bob Anderson / McDuffy, 

Arms & Ginsberg / Charlotte Beers at Ogilvy & Mather Worldwide / Lehman 

Brothers (A): Rise of the Equity Research Department / Alexander 

Bandelli / Tom Tierney at Bain & Co. / Infosys Technologies, Limited / 

NYPD New / Module VII: Tim Hertach at GL Consulting (A) / Professionals’ 

Quandaries / Tradeoffs: Juggling Careers in PSFs with Private 

Life / The First Six Months: Launching a PSF Career / Appendix / Note 

on E-Consulting / Note on Investment Banking 


MANAGING SERVICES 

Using Technology to Create Value 

By Mark Davis, Bentley College and Janelle Heineke, Boston University 

2003 / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285819-8 / MHID: 0-07-285819-2 

(with Student CD-ROM) - Out of Print 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119477-8 / MHID: 0-07-119477-0 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/davisheineke 

CONTENTS 

PART I: THE CONTEMPORARY SERVICE ENVIRONMENT / 1. Introduction 

/ 2. Understanding Customers and the Marketplace / 2Supplement 

Collecting Data About Customers / 3. The Role of Technology / 4. The 

Integration of Manufacturing and Services / PART II: STRATEGY AND 

SYSTEM DESIGN / 5. Defining Service Strategies / 6. Project Management 

/ 7. Designing Service Business Processes / 8. Designing Service Facilities 

/ PART III: MANAGING SERVICES / 9. Managing the Workforce 

/ 10. Measuring Performance: Efficiency and Effectiveness / 11. Defining 

Service Quality / 11Supplement Quality Tools / 12. Customer Focused 

Service / 13. Managing Demand and Capacity / 14. Yield Management 

/ 15. Waiting Time Management / 16. Workforce Scheduling 

Purchasing and Supply Chain 

Management 


New 

DESIGNING AND MANAGING THE SUPPLY CHAIN 

3rd Edition 

By David Simchi-Levi, Mass Institute of Tech, Sally Kaminsky, 

College of Staten Island and Edith Simchi-Levi, Logic Tools Inc., 

2008 (February 2007) / 460 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298239-8 / MHID: 0-07-298239-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124477-0 / MHID: 0-07-124477-8 [IE] 

As the most up-to-date, cutting-edge supply chain management 

book on the market, the Third Edition of Designing and Managing 

the Supply Chain discusses the problems, models and 

concepts derived from issues related to effective supply chain 

management. While many core supply chain management issues 

are interrelated, the authors have tried to make each chapter 

as self-contained as possible so that the reader can refer directly 

to chapters covering topics of interest. Each chapter utilizes 

case studies and numerous examples. Mathematical and technical 

sections can be skipped without loss of continuity. Most 

textbooks do not include models and decision support systems 

robust enough for industry, but that is not true of this new edition. 

The accompanying CD-ROM also features the return of 

two simulations, the Computerized Beer Game and the Risk 

Pool Game and a computerized tool. These simulations help 

users develop and execute supply chain contracts while also 

illustrating many of the concepts discussed in the text. 


• Improved and Integrated Coverage of Technology: This edition reflects 

a more realistic approach to incorporating technology in today’s 

companies and this in-depth integration allows readers to better understand 

how technology implementation, new trends, and customers can 

affect the design and management of a supply chain. 

• New and Updated Cases: Thanks to reviewer feedback, whenever 

possible single cases have been replaced with multiple cases giving 

readers even more opportunities to realistically study of how supply 

chain management is utilized in real companies better preparing them 

to be successful managers. 

• More Comprehensive and Complete Ancillary Package: With improved, 

stronger PowerPoint presentations, and improved teaching 

notes on the Instructor CD, even instructors without a background in 

supply chain or those teaching the course for the first time will have 

their start-up costs reduced and their pool of instructional resources 

increased by these improved ancillaries. 

• New “Supply Contracts” Tool on Student CD-ROM: Besides the 

computerized versions of “The Beer Game” and the “Risk Pool Game,” 

there will be a newly developed electronic tool dealing with supply 

contracts. Now students have even more support to help them conceptualize 

strategic supply chain management. 

Features 

• Strong Coverage of E-commerce: By incorporating the latest insights 

into the most current practices related to the Supply Chain and E-commerce, 

students get an up-to-date view of supply chain management. 

• Expanded Discussion of Forecasting: Thanks to reviewer suggestions, 

readers now have more coverage of the quantitative strategies involved 

in effectively managing a supply chain. 

• Broad Introduction to Supply Chain Management Issues: The topics 

discussed range from a basic discussion of inventory management, 

logistics network design, distribution systems, and customer value, to 

more advanced discussions of strategic alliances, the value of informa- 

62


tion in the supply chain, information technology and decisions support 

systems, and international issues in supply chain management. 

• Case Studies: Each chapter contains at least one or more case study. 

These case studies offer real examples of supply chain challenges and 

provide readers numerous opportunities to apply their knowledge to a 

strategic question or set of questions involving supply chain management. 

• Authorship: The authors have taught a variety of students and their 

book is written to appeal to many types of readers. Appropriate for 

undergraduate and graduate business students as well as for engineers 

and engineering students, this text will also appeal to customers in the 

professional market that are seeking a reference book on supply chain 

management. 


New 

PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT 

By W C Benton 

2007 (June 2006) / 800 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352514-3 / MHID: 0-07-352514-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110630-6 / MHID: 0-07-110630-8 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/benton07 

Purchasing and Supply Management, 1/e, by W.C. Benton, 

offers insights into the theory, practice, and implementation 

of supply management issues. A step-by-step approach helps 

students and professionals gain analytical purchasing skills. 

Many actual case studies and exercises help students transform 

purchasing theory into purchasing practice and implementation. 

Some of the topics include purchasing business processes, price 

cost analysis, professional services, transportation purchasing, 

global purchasing, and healthcare purchasing. 

Features 

• Introduces innovative and recent concepts in purchasing and supply 

chain management, such as supply chain power and e-purchasing 

systems concepts. 

• Includes coverage of pricing, price discrimination, and an appendix 

on the Robinson-Putman act. 

• Covers special topics of interest to majors: equipment and leasing, 

healthcare purchasing, service procurement, and legal issues in purchasing 

and supply management. 

• Contains over 25 case studies, all original to this text. 

CONTENTS 

Preface. Part 1: Introduction to Purchasing and Supply Management. 

Chapter 1: Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 2: Purchasing 

Decisions and Business Strategy. Chapter 3: The Legal Aspects of 

Purchasing. Part 2: Materials Management. Chapter 4: Materials Management. 

Chapter 5: Inventory Management. Chapter 6: Just-In-Time 

(Lean) Purchasing. Chapter 7: Purchasing Procedures, E-Purchasing, and 

Systems Contracting. Part 3: Fundamentals of Purchasing and Supply 

Management. Chapter 8: Supplier Selection and Evaluation. Chapter 

9: Global Sourcing. Chapter 10: Purchasing, Supply Partnerships, and 

Supply Chain Power. Chapter 11: Total Quality Management (TQM) 

and Purchasing. Part 4: Price/Cost Analysis and Negotiation Strategies. 

Chapter 12: Price Determination. Chapter 13: Bargaining and Negotiations. 

Part 5: Special Purchasing Application. Chapter 14: Purchasing 

Transportation Services. Chapter 15: Equipment Acquisition and Disposal. 

Chapter 16: Healthcare Purchasing and Supply Management. 

Chapter 17: Procuring Professional Services. Cases. Glossary. Index 


New 

SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT 

2nd Edition 

By Donald Bowersox, David Closs and M. Bixby Cooper of Michigan 

State University—East Lansing 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294788-5 / MHID: 0-07-294788-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125414-4 / MHID: 0-07-125414-5 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bowersox2e 

Supply Chain Logistics Management is exciting, and promises to 

bolster traditional logistics courses and invigorate supply chain 

management courses. By examining traditional logistics issues 

within the context of the supply chain, this text captures the 

current trends in Supply Chain Management and Supply Chain 

Strategy. Most textbooks approach this subject from a limited 

perspective, studying only internal functions of an organization 

to the exclusion of issues that relate to the entire supply chain 

in an integrated enterprise. Supply Chain Logistics Management 

provides a solid foundation that clearly describes the 

role of logistics within the supply chain, portraying a complete 

view of the subject and extending to show how all the pieces 

fit together. 


• Important new topics on supply chain added: process integration, 

relationship management, supply chain security and sustainability, 

globalization, and the impact of the new consumer economy on supply 

chain management and design. 

• New, integrated treatment of technology, including ERP and advanced 

planning and scheduling systems. 

• The book has been shortened and reorganized to facilitate a better 

teaching and learning pace, and a leaner presentation. 

Features 

• Technology—Vast coverage of the most current technology in this 

industry such as Information Networks, Enterprise Resource Planning 

and Decision Support Systems are covered. . 

• MSU Loga Simulation—This unique simulation stresses a complete 

range of supply chain decisions.. 

• Authorship—The authors are well-known and respected. Don Bowersox 

is a well-published author and researcher. He is acknowledged 

as one of the leading authorities on logistics. David Closs’ research 

in logistics is also well respected, he also has extensive consulting 

experience and is a roundtable officer of the Council of Logistics 

Management, Bixby Cooper is the co-author of Marketing Channels 

along with Bowersox and is very visible as a member of various logistics 

professional organizations. Their talent will be very well received 

within the industry. 

• Unique Balanced Approach : The book offers a unique blend of 

supply chain and logistics. 

• Extensive integration of spreadsheet-based solution methods in the 

text and problem material, for example: Use of Excel Solver to solve 

linear programming problems (Chapter 10) and reciprocal cost allocation 

problems (Chapter 14), Use of Excel regression to solve linear regression 

problems, Use of spreadsheets to perform sensitivity analysis in 

cost-volume-profit analysis and to prepare process cost reports. Actual 

Excel screens are used to illustrate the use of the methods to make it 

easier to replicate the examples and problems, following the illustrated 

Excel commands 

CONTENTS 

PART ONE – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT Chapter 1 

21st Century Supply Chains Chapter 2 Logistics Chapter 3 Customer 

Accommodation Chapter 4 Procurement and Manufacturing Chapter 

63


5 Information Technology Framework PART TWO – SUPPLY CHAIN 

LOGISTICS OPERATIONS Chapter 6 Inventory Chapter 7 Transportation 

InfrastructureChapter 8 Transportation Operations Chapter 9 

Warehousing Chapter 10 Packaging and Materials Handling Chapter 

11 Operational Integration PART THREE – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS 

DESIGN Chapter 12 Global Strategic Positioning Chapter 13 Network 

Integration Chapter 14 Logistics Design and Operational Planning PART 

FOUR – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS ADMINSTRATION Chapter 15 

Relationship Development and Management Chapter 16 Operational, 

Financial and Social Performance/ EPILOGUE 


MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMAND 

An Introduction to Operations Management 

By Gerard Cachon and Christian Terwiesch 

2006 / 368 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-291899-1 / MHID: 0-07-291899-3 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124426-8 / MHID: 0-07-124426-3 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cachon_terwiesch 

The most authoritative, cutting-edge book for operations management 

and supply chain management. The book demands 

rigorous analysis on the part of students. When the use of 

quantitative tools or formal modeling is indicated, it is only to 

perform the necessary analysis needed to inform and support a 

practical business solution. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 The Process View of the Organization 

Chapter 3 Understanding the Supply Process: Evaluation Process Capacity 

Chapter 4 Estimating and Reducing Labor Costs Chapter 5 Bathing 

and Other Flow Interruptions: Set-up Times and the Economic Order 

Quantity Model Chapter 6 Variability and Its Impact on Process Performance: 

Waiting Time Problems Chapter 7 The Impact of Variability 

on Process Performance: Throughput Losses Chapter 8 Fundamentals 

of Quality and the Toyota Production System Chapter 9 Betting on Uncertain 

Demand: The Newsvendor Model Chapter 10 Make-To-Order 

and Quick Response with Reactive Capacity Chapter 11 Service Levels 

and Lead Times in Supply Chains: The Order up-to Inventory Model 

Chapter 12 Risk Pooling Strategies to Reduce and Hedge Uncertainty 

Chapter 13 Revenue Management with Capacity Controls Chapter 14 

Supply Chain Coordination / Appendix / Glossary / References / Index 

of “How to” exhibits / Summary of key equations / Index 


PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT 

13th Edition 

By Michael Leenders and P Fraser Johnson of University of Western 

Ontario, Anna Flynn, Vice president of Institute of Supply Management 

and Harold E Fearon, Center for Advanced Purchasing Studies, 

Emeritus 

2006 / 588 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287379-5 / MHID: 0-07-287379-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124966-9 / MHID: 0-07-124966-4 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/leenders13e 

The Leenders’ text provides a comprehensive introduction to 

the purchasing and supply chain management field, supported 

by 50 case studies. Cases cover purchasing and supply chain 

issues in a variety of settings, from process industries to high tech 

manufacturing and services as well as public institutions. Supply 

Management concepts, both strategic and tactical, have been 

expanded throughout the text, particularly in new chapters on 

Supply Law and Ethics, Public Supply, and Supplier Relations. 

While all basic tenets of the purchasing function and cost issues 

remain, the coverage of the field is state of the art highlighting 

the supply chain approach. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 – Purchasing and Supply Management Chapter 2 – Supply 

Organization Chapter 3 – Supply Processes Chapter 4 – Information 

Systems and Technology Chapter 5 – Quality, Specification and Service 

Chapter 6 – Quantity and Inventory Chapter 7 – Transportation and Delivery 

Chapter 8 – Price Chapter 9 – Cost Management, Discounts, and 

Negotiation Chapter 10 – Supplier Selection Chapter 11 – Investment 

Recovery Chapter12 – Supply Law and Ethics Chapter 13 – Research 

and Metrics Chapter 14 – Global Supply Chapter 15 – Public Supply 

Management Chapter 16 – Capital Goods Chapter 17 – Services Chapter 

18 – Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing Chapter 19 – Supplier 

Relations Chapter 20 – Strategy in Purchasing and Supply Management 

CASE INDEX SUBJECT INDEX 


WORLD CLASS SUPPLY MANAGEMENT 

The Key to Supply Chain Management with Student 

CD (Cases), 7th Edition 

By David N. Burt, University of San Diego and Donald W. Dobler, 

Colorado State University, Emeritus 

2003 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283156-6 / MHID: 0-07-283156-1 

(with CD-ROM) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123627-0 / MHID: 0-07-123627-9 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/burt7e 

CONTENTS 

I The Foundation: 1. World Class Supply Management / 2. Purchasing 

Becomes Supply Management / 3. Supply Management: An Organization-Spanning 

Activity / 4. Supply Management: Implementor of Three 

of the Firm’s Social Responsibilities / II. Enabling Concepts: 5. Three 

Types of Buyer-Supplier Relationships / 6. Cross-Functional Teams / 

7. Quality / 8. Total Cost of Ownership / 9. e-Procurement / III. The 

Requirements Process: 10. New Product Development / 11. Specifications 

and Standardization / 12. Equipment / 13. Services / IV. Strategic 

Sourcing: 14. Make or Buy/Outsourcing / 15. Source Selection / 16. 

Global Supply Management / V. Strategic Cost Management: 17. Pricing 

/ 18. Cost Analysis / 19. Types of Compensation / 20. Negotiation / VI. 

Relationship Management: 21. Relationship and Contract Management 

/ 22. Supplier Development / 23. Alliance Development / 24. Ethics / 

25. Legal / VII. Integrating the Supply Chain: 26. Demand Management 

/ VIII. Institutional and Government Procurement: 27. Supply 

Management in Institutions / 28. Government Procurement / IX. Supply 

Chain Management: 29. World Class Supply Management (sm) : The 

Key to Supply Chain Management. 

64



PROFITABLE PURCHASING STRATEGIES 

By Paul Steele and Brian Court 

1996 / 228 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709214-6 / MHID: 0-07-709214-7 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116625-6 / MHID: 0-07-116625-4 [IE] 



CONTENTS 

1 What is Purchasing. 2 Building a Purchasing Strategy. 3 Strategic 

Purchasing. 4 Understanding the Basics of Purchasing. 5 Supply 

Positioning. 6 Suppliers Preferences. 7 Vulnerability Management. 8 

Influencing the Supply Market. 9 Specific Requirements Identification 

and the Buyer/Supplier Interface. 10 Options for Supplier Relationships. 

11 Partnership Outsourcing. 12 Monopolies and Cartels. 13 Organizing 

for Impact. 14 Measurement, Audit and Benchmarking. 

• Can be purchased, at a discounted price, with other McGraw-Hill/ 

Irwin texts in Operations Management. 

• Heavily illustrated with graphics and annotated screen shots. 

Contents 

Preface. Part 1 Understanding Enterprise Software. Chapter 1 Overview. 

Chapter 2 Navigation and Systems Operation. Chapter 3 Application 

Modules. Chapter 4 Businesses Processes. Chapter 5 Web 

Application Server. Chapter 6 Internet Enabled Solutions. Chapter 7 

Configuration. Chapter 8 Implementation Framework. Chapter 9 Organization 

Structure. Chapter 10 Customizing Tools. Part 2 Displaying 

SAP R/3 Information. Chapter 11 Exploring System Capabilities. Part 3 

Processing SAP R/3 Transactions. Chapter 12 Customer Order to Cash 

Cycle Processes. Summary. Appendix Quick Check Answers 

Data Mining 

New 

Enterprise Resource 

Planning 

SAP R/3 ENTERPRISE SOFTWARE 

An Introduction 

By Roger Hayen, Central Michigan University 

2007 (May 2006) / 304 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8 

This text is written by Dr. Roger Hayen, a SAP R/3 instructor 

at Central Michigan University, one of three universities in the 

U.S. to offer SAP R/3 certification for students in an SAP University 

Alliance program, called “Process Integration Certification 

Academy”. Hayen’s extensive familiarity with the subject provides 

a useful introduction to the essential concepts of the SAP 

R/3 System, with the opportunity for hands-on implementation 

of those concepts. The text’s succinct, yet thorough coverage 

makes it versatile, so that it is appropriate for both student instruction 

and professional training and reference. 

FEATURES 

• The core text is organized into three distinct main parts—Understanding 

Enterprise Software, Displaying SAP R/3 Information, and Processing 

SAP R/3—for easy readability and enhanced functionality. 

• Includes helpful “Quick Checks” for student review of concepts 

after each chapter. 

• Class-tested at Central Michigan University by undergraduate students; 

also used by SAP R/3 for its own training programs. 

• Hands-on, up-to-date exercises using SAP’s IDES training data, SAP 

R/3’s own help files, and the 4.6 R/3 release—critical to the understanding 

and application of the software. Frees instructors’ time, as they would 

otherwise have to create the data for students’ exercises themselves. Also 

ensures students will be market-ready for SAP R/3 user companies. 

• Flexibility of the hands-on exercises. Provided in two formats: local, 

‘read-only’ ones and web-based activities with a ‘live client’ simulating 

a ‘real world’ SAP/R3 implementation. 


New 

INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS DATA MINING 

By David Olson and Yong Shi of University of Nebraska-Omaha 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295971-0 / MHID: 0-07-295971-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124470-1 / MHID: 0-07-124470-0 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/olson1e 

Introduction to Business Data Mining was developed to introduce 

students, as opposed to professional practitioners or engineering 

students, to the fundamental concepts of data mining. 

Most importantly, this text shows readers how to gather and 

analyze large sets of data to gain useful business understanding. 

A four part organization introduces the material (Part I), 

describes and demonstrated basic data mining algorithms (Part 

II), focuses on the business applications of data mining (Part 

III), and presents an overview of the developing areas in this 

field, including web mining, text mining, and the ethical aspects 

of data mining. (Part IV). The author team has had extensive 

experience with the quantitative analysis of business as well as 

with data mining analysis. They have both taught this material 

and used their own graduate students to prepare the text’s data 

mining reports. Using real-world vignettes and their extensive 

knowledge of this new subject, David Olson and Yong Shi 

have created a text that demonstrates data mining processes 

and techniques needed for business applications. 

Features 

• Coverage of business applications: This text focuses on the value of 

data analyses to business decision making while also exploring concepts 

such as lift, customer relationship management, market segmentation, 

and more. 

• Straightforward explanation of methods, demonstrated with examples: 

Short vignettes are used throughout showing how specific concepts 

have been applied in actual business situations. References to data 

mining software and websites are also featured. 

• Major software addressed: The text’s appendices show how major 

software projects support various aspects of data mining. Also, the text 

reviews popular data mining software to help students become familiar 

with the software options available in data mining. 

65


• Concepts of data mining introduced early: Concept overviews Stochastic Single-Period Model for Perishable Products / Supplement 

precede the discussion of data mining algorithms, allowing readers 2 to Chapter 18 Stochastic Periodic-Review Models / Supplement 1 to 

to understand the importance of techniques by seeing how they are Chapter 20 Variance-Reducing Techniques / Supplement 2 to Chapter 

applied before they actually learn them. 

20 Regenerative Method of Statistical Analysis / 21 The Art of Modeling 

with Spreadsheets / 22 Project Management with PERT/CPM / 23 Additional 

Special Types of Linear Programming Problems / 24 Probability 

Theory / 25 Reliability / 26 The Application of Queueing Theory / 27 

Forecasting / 28 Examples of Performing Simulations on Spreadsheets 

with Crystal Ball / Appendix 6 Simultaneous Linear Equations 

Contents 

Part I: INTRODUCTION Chapter 1: Initial Description of Data Mining 

in Business Chapter 2: Data Mining Processes and Knowledge 

Discovery Chapter 3: Database Support to Data Mining Part II: DATA 

MINING METHODS AS TOOLS Chapter 4: Overview of Data Mining 

Techniques Chapter 4 Appendix: Enterprise Miner Demonstration on 

Expenditure Data Set Chapter 5: Cluster Analysis Chapter 5 Appendix: 

Clementine Chapter 6: Regression Algorithms in Data Mining Chapter 

7: Neural Networks in Data Mining Chapter 8: Decision Tree Algorithms 

Appendix 8: Demonstration of See5 Decision Tree Analysis Chapter 9: 

Linear Programming-Based Methods Chapter 9 Appendix: Data Mining 

Linear Programming Formulations Part III: BUSINESS APPLICATIONS 

Chapter 10: Business Data Mining Applications Applications Chapter 

11: Market-Basket Analysis Chapter 11 Appendix: Market-Basket 

Procedure Part IV: DEVELOPING ISSUES Chapter 12: Text and Web 

Mining Chapter 12 Appendix: Semantic Text Analysis Chapter 13: 

Ethical Aspects of Data Mining 

Operation Research 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH 

2nd Edition 

By Richard Bronson, Fairleigh Dickinson College and Goovindasami 

Naadimuthu of Fairleigh Dickinson University 

1998 / 456 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-008020-1 / MHID: 0-07-008020-8 

A Schaum Professional Reference Title 

Tackling the broad range of allocation problems that actually 

confront engineers, programmers and analysts in today’s business 

and industrial worlds, this book takes readers step-by-step 

through all the mathematical programming techniques--including 

the trailblazing Karmarkar algorithm--needed to excel in any 

operations research course. It’s easy to see why the first edition 

of this invaluable study guide sole more than 35,000 copies! It 

cuts down study time while it builds essential skills. 


INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS RESEARCH 

8th Edition 

By Frederick Hillier, Stanford University and Gerald Lieberman 

(Deceased) 

2005 / 1088 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321114-5 / MHID: 0-07-321114-1 

(with Revised CD-ROM) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123828-1 / MHID: 0-07-123828-X 

[IE with CD-ROM and OLC] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/hillier 

The 8th edition of Introduction to Operations Research remains 

the classic operations research text while incorporating a wealth 

of state-of-the-art, user-friendly software and more coverage 

of business applications than ever before. The hallmarks of 

this edition are: the solid, classic coverage that has continued 

through seven editions; top-notch, easy-to-use tutorial software; 

state-of-the-practice operations research software—especially as 

used in conjunction with examples from the text; and a variety 

of spreadsheet tools. This edition will also feature thorough 

coverage of practical applications of operations research. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Overview of the Operations Research 

Modeling Approach Chapter 3: Introduction to Linear Programming 

Chapter 4: Solving Linear Programming Problems: The Simplex Method 

Chapter 5: The Theory of the Simplex Method Chapter 6: Duality 

Theory and Sensitivity Analysis Chapter 7: Other Algorithms for Linear 

Programming Chapter 8: The Transportation and Assignment Problems 

Chapter 9: Network Optimization Models Chapter 10: Dynamic Programming 

Chapter 11: Integer Programming Chapter 12: Nonlinear 

Programming Chapter 13: Metaheuristics Chapter 14: Game Theory 

Chapter 15: Decision Analysis Chapter 16: Markov Chains Chapter 17: 

Queueing Theory Chapter 18: Inventory Theory Chapter 19: Markov 

Decision Processes Chapter 20: Simulation / Appendixes / Supplements 

on the CD-ROM and the Online Learning Center / Additional Cases 

/ Supplement to Appendix 3.1 More about LINGO / Supplement to 

Chapter 7 Linear Goal Programming and Its Solution Procedures / Supplement 

to Chapter 8 A Case Study with Many Transportation Problems 

/ Supplement 1 to Chapter 18 Derivation of the Optimal Policy for the 

Global Operations 

Management 


GLOBAL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 

By Therese Flaherty, The Wharton School, University of Pennsylvania 

1996 / 608 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-023716-2 / MHID: 0-07-023716-6 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114215-1 / MHID: 0-07-114215-0 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Operations in Global Business 

Strategy Chapter 3: Improving International Operations Performance 

Chapter 5: Exploring Global Product and Process Opportunities 










66

Logistics & Supply 

Chain Management 

(Professional References) 

THE SUPPLY MANAGEMENT HANDBOOK 

7th Edition 

By Joseph Cavinato 

2006 (June 2006) / 1000 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144513-9 / MHID: 0-07-144513-7 


Turn to the collective wisdom of the field’s top experts to understand 

and solve even the most complex supply management 

issue. For more than three decades, The Supply Management 

Handbook (formerly The Purchasing Handbook) has been vital 

for purchasing and supply professionals in every field and industry. 

This latest edition comprehensively updates and revises this 

classic to encompass the ongoing shift from simple purchasing 

to a new, more technology-based imperative--identifying and 

managing supply chain sources and strategies. Addressing every 

essential issue from outsourcing to total cost of ownership to 

negotiations and contract management, an international team 

of supply management experts offers the authoritative, practical 

coverage you need to survive and thrive in today’s ever-changing 

supply management environment. Topics include: 

• What key organizations are doing now to develop and implement 

next-generation supply methodologies 

• An organization’s duty to and interaction with society, and 

insights for addressing the evolving concept of social responsibility 

in the supply arena 

• A five-step best practices framework for implementing total 

cost of ownership in supply management 

• Logistics considerations for the supply management professional 

• Supply management in a risk-sensitive environment 

• Sharpening your supply management skills 

Dramatic social and technological changes have brought new 

roles, responsibilities, and challenges to supply managers--along 

with exciting new opportunities. This definitive reference is the 

most trusted and efficient way to prosper in this ever-changing 

field. 


dation, and customization. The cost of warehousing should be 

commensurate with the contribution of warehousing to overall 

logistics performance—typically between 2% and 5% of corporate 

revenue. In world-class warehousing these costs are minimized 

while also improving customer service. The principles 

and systems described in this book are common denominators of 

world-class warehousing. The principles have been developed 

over a decade of logistics research, education and consulting 

project experience. World-Class Warehousing and Material 

Handling can be used to develop a warehouse master plan to 

support the corporation’s overall logistics strategy. 

Project Management 

(Professional References) 


5th Edition 

By David Cleland, University of Pittsburgh and Lewis Ireland, President 

of the American Society 

2007 (August 2006) / 688 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-147160-2 / MHID: 0-07-147160-X 


Today’s Most Effective Guide for Applying Project Management 

to Implement Organizational Strategies -- Now Updated and 

Expanded! Project Management: Strategic Design and Implementation 

delivers complete guidance on applying the theory, 

processes, practices, and techniques of project management 

to support strategic planning. Written by two world-renowned 

project management leaders, this new edition presents the latest 

methods for using flexible teams to implement organizational 

strategies -- especially changes to products, services, and processes. 

Designed for use in both large and small organizations, 

this updated classic ranges from the project management 

process…to project planning, monitoring, evaluation, and 

control…to continuous improvement through projects. This 

resource offers new material on project portfolio management, 

earned value, project management maturity, nontraditional 

teams, project partnering, project management outsourcing, and 

much more. The Fifth edition of Project Management: Strategic 

Design and Implementation features: 

• Detailed coverage of all advances in project management 

theory and practice 

• Helpful sections added to each chapter, including chapter 

summary, additional sources of information, discussion questions, 

project management principles, case study, assignment, 

and checklist 


WORLD-CLASS WAREHOUSING AND MATERIAL 

HANDLING 

By Edward Frazelle, The Logistics Institute at Georgia Tech 

2002 / 280 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-137600-6 / MHID: 0-07-137600-3 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122686-8 / MHID: 0-07-122686-9 [IE] 


Warehousing continues to play a critical role in assuring high 

levels of customer service and overall logistics performance. 

Efficient warehousing can minimize the effects of supply chain 

inefficiencies; can improve logistics accuracy and inventory 

management; and can allow for product accumulation, consoli- 

• Updated examples and exercises on key project management 

topics 

• A larger format with sidebars to highlight major issues 

• This new material: chapters on “The Evolution of Project 

Management” and “Successful Project Teams” 

CONTENTS 

PREFACE / ACKNOWLEDGMENTS / INTRODUCTION / Part 1: Introduction 

Chapter 1: The Evolution of Project Management Chapter 

2: Why Project Management? Chapter 3: The Project Management 

Process Part 2: The Strategic Context of Projects Chapter 4: When to 

Use Project Management Chapter 5: The Strategic Context of Projects 

Chapter 6: The Board of Directors and Major Projects Chapter 7: 

Project Stakeholder Management Chapter 8: Strategic Issues in Project 

67


Management Part 3: Organizational Design for Project Management 

Chapter 9: Organizing for Project Management Chapter 10: Project 

Portfolio Management Chapter 11: Project Authority Chapter 12: Project 

Management Maturity Part 4: Project Operations Chapter 13: Project 

Planning Chapter 14: Project Management Information System Chapter 

15: Project Monitoring. Evaluation, and Control Chapter 16: The Project 

Earned Value Management System Chapter 17: Project Termination Part 

5: Interpersonal Dynamics in the Management of Projects Chapter 

18: Project Leadership Chapter 19: Project Communications Chapter 

20: Successful Project Teams Part 6: The Cultural Elements Chapter 

21: Continuous Improvement Through Projects Chapter 22: Cultural 

Considerations in Project Management Part 7: New Prospects Chapter 

23: Alternative Project Teams / INDEX 

Part 4: Management of the Project-Oriented Company Chapter 18. 

Management of the Project-Oriented Company; Chapter 19. Project 

Portfolio Score Card Chapter 20. Partnering in Projects Chapter 21. 

Business Process Management in the Project-Oriented Company Part 

5: National Project Management Chapter 22. Project Management in 

Austria: Analysis of the Maturity of Austria as a Project-Oriented Nation 

Chapter 23. A Brief Insight of Project Management in the Mainland of 

China Chapter 24. Project Management in Australia Chapter 25. Project 

Management in Romania Chapter 26. Japanese Project Management 

Practices on Global Projects 

GLOBAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT HANDBOOK 

Planning, Organizing and Controlling International 

Projects, 2nd Edition 

By David Cleland, University of Pittsburgh and Roland Gareis, Vienna 

University of Economics and Business Administration 

2006 / 575 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146045-3 / MHID: 0-07-146045-4 


Learn and apply successful international project management 

techniques. Contributors from 20+ nations reveal how current 

project management concepts and techniques can be successfully 

applied in different political, cultural, and geographical 

settings. Learn how project management is carried out in major 

countries such as Canada, China, Russia, Germany, France, 

England--and how these techniques can be applied globally. 

• Case histories from around the world provide lessons on the 

international application of project management 

• 16 completely new chapters including ones on the rebuilding 

of Iraq, project management in outsourcing initiatives, and 

developing multinational teams 


• Financial Planning for Large Multinational Projects 

• Describes how project management is carried out in representative 

major countries of the world, including the United States, Canada, 

China, Singapore, Hong Kong, Australia, Romania, Japan, France, 

England, Austria, and Denmark 

• Numerous International Models included 

• Role of the World Bank in Financing International Projects 

Contents 

Part 1: State of the Art Global Project Management Chapter 1.The 

Evolution of Project Management Chapter 2. Project Management: A 

Business Process of the Project-Oriented Company Chapter 3. The Future 

of Project Management: Mapping the Dynamics of Project Management 

Field in Action Chapter 4. Total Life-Cycle System Management Chapter 

5. Developing Multinational Project Teams Chapter 6. Risk Identification 

and Assessment for International Construction Projects Chapter 

7. Program Management and Project Portfolio Management Part 2: 

Competency Factors in Project Management Chapter 8. Competencies 

of Project Managers Chapter 9. Managing Risks and Uncertainty in 

Major Projects in the New Global Environment Chapter 10. Managing 

Human Energy in the Project-Oriented Company Chapter 11. Managing 

Project Management Personnel and Their Competencies in the 

Project-Oriented Company Chapter 12. Lessons Learned: Rebuilding 

Iraq in 2004 Chapter 13. Project Critical Success Factors: The Project- 

Implementation Profile Part 3: Management of Global Programs and 

Projects Chapter 14. Project Management for Outsourcing Decisions 

Chapter 15. Project Quality Management in International Projects Chapter 

16. Success Factors in Virtual Global Software Projects Chapter 17. 

Managing Global Projects Over a Collaborative Knowledge Framework 

the business savvy project manager 

By Gary R Heerkens, Management Solutions Group 

2006 / 350 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144307-4 / MHID: 0-07-144307-X 


To make the leap from average to superior, you must develop 

the skills to manage each project like a small business. The 

Business-Savvy Project Manager thoroughly explains key concepts, 

principles, and tools for project managers to provide 

organizations with superior return-oninvestment and top performance. 

From portfolio management and strategic alignment 

to calculation of economic metrics and effective use of both 

financial and nonfinancial criteria in project proposals, it gives 

you the business savvy for top-level performance and certain 

career success. 

PROJECT PLANNING, SCHEDULING AND 

CONTROL 

4th Edition 

By James Lewis, The Lewis Institute, Inc 

2006 / 550 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146037-8 / MHID: 0-07-146037-3 


Project Planning, Scheduling, and Control has been the standard 

guidebook for project managers for more than 15 years. Addressing 

the key issues you face every day, Jim Lewis’s benchmark 

book brings the subject alive with accessible, nontechnical 

questions, step-by-step guidelines, and real-world examples 

and applications. This revised, updated, and expanded fourth 

edition provides an applications-oriented understanding of the 

issues you must confront and important tips for passing the 

Project Management Professional (PMP®) exam. 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








68

2007-2008 NEW Business Statistics Titles 

Business Statistics ~ Contents 






Others............................................................................. 78 


• BOWERMAN 

Business Statistics in Practice, 4e.............................71 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297747-9 / MHID: 0-07-297747-7 

• DOANE 

Applied Statistics in Business and Economics 

with Student CD-ROM.............................................72 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321575-4 / MHID: 0-07-321575-9 

• ORRIS 

Basic Statistics Using Excel and MegaStat................72 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321158-9 / MHID: 0-07-321158-3 

• WILSON 

Business Forecasting, 5e...........................................75 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320398-0 / MHID: 0-07-320398-X 


• BOWERMAN 

Essentials of Business Statistics, 2e.......................... 70 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297748-6 / MHID: 0-07-297748-5 

• LIND 

Basic Statistics Using Excel for use with 


Economics, 13e........................................................74 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303026-5 / MHID: 0-07-303026-0 

• LIND 


Economics, 13e........................................................ 70 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327296-2 / MHID: 0-07-327296-5 

69

Business Statistics 

New 


- Textbook 

ESSENTIALS OF BUSINESS STATISTICS 

2nd Edition 

By Bruce Bowerman and Richard O’Connell of Miami University of 

Oh-Oxford, Burdeane Orris, Butler University 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297748-6 / MHID: 0-07-297748-5 

The new edition of Essentials of Business Statistics delivers clear 

and understandable explanations of core business statistics 

concepts, making it ideal for a one term course in business 

statistics. Containing continuing case studies that emphasize the 

theme of business improvement, the text offers real applications 

of statistics that are relevant to today’s business students. The 

authors motivate students by showing persuasively how the use 

of statistical techniques in support of business decision-making 

helps to improve business processes. A variety of computer 

centered examples and exercises, and a robust, technologybased 

ancillary package are designed to help students master 

this subject. 


• Business Improvement – ‘Business Improvement’ theme, connecting 

statistical analysis and business decision making, is highlighted and 

called out with BI icons in the book. 

• The Z vs T Decision--The Z versus T decision is governed by sigma 

known-unknown rather than by sample size. This is a reasonably 

significant change reflecting a new and widely accepted direction in 

this course area 

• Hypothesis Testing – Hypothesis testing is approached using a new 

stepped method, which makes the material easier to learn. This new 

method received outstanding reviews. 

Contents 

1. An Introduction to Business Statistics 2. Descriptive Statistics 3. 

Probability 4. Discrete Random Variables 5. Continuous Random Variables 

Distribution 6. Sampling Distributions 7. Confidence Intervals 8. 

Hypothesis Testing 9. Statistical Inferences Based on Two Samples 10. 

Experimental Design and Analysis of Variance 11. Chi Square Tests 12. 

Simple Linear Regression Analysis 13. Multiple Regression and Model- 

Building 14. Process Improvement Using Control Charts (On CD ROM) 

Appendix A. Statistical Tables Appendix B. Covariance and Correlation 

Appendix C (1) Counting RulesAppendix C (2) The Hypergeometric Appendix 

D The Normal Probability Plot Appendix E Two-Way Analysis 

of Variance (On CD-ROM) 

New 

STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND 

ECONOMICS 

13th Edition 

By Douglas Lind, Coasta Carolina University, William Marchal, University 

of Toledo and Samuel Wathen, Coastal Carolina University 

2008 (October 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327296-2 / MHID: 0-07-327296-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128575-9 / MHID: 0-07-128575-X 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lind13e 

The new edition of Lind’s Statistical Techniques in Business 

and Economics is a perennial market best seller due to its 

comprehensive coverage of statistical concepts and methods 

delivered in a student-friendly, step-by-step format. The text is 

non-threatening and presents concepts clearly and succinctly 

with a conversational writing style. All statistical concepts are 

illustrated with solved applied examples immediately upon 

introduction. Self reviews and exercises for each section, and 

review sections for groups of chapters also support the student 

learning steps. Modern computing applications (Excel, Minitab, 

and MegaStat) are introduced, but the text maintains a focus 

on presenting statistics concepts as applied in business as opposed 

to technology or programming methods. The thirteenth 

edition continues as a students’ text with increased emphasis 

on interpretation of data and results. 


• Z Versus T: The division between the z and t distributions is based 

sigma known or unknown rather than on sample sizes 

• Multiple Regression: Treatment now includes an investigation of 

the theory behind the linear model along with tests for the violation 

of each assumption. 

• Robust Technology Package: Lind 13e features additional detail in 

the software sections, is available with Homework Manager/Homework 

Manager Plus, and is available as a Zinio eBook. Excel, MegaStat, and 

Minitab are integrated throughout the text, in enough detail to support 

students. The comprehensive, user-friendly Student CD includes 

MegaStat, Visual Statistics, ScreenCam tutorials and additional study 

resources. 

Contents 

1 What Is Statistics? 2 Describing Data: Frequency Tables, Frequency 

Distributions, and Graphic Presentation 3 Describing Data: Numerical 

Measures 4 Describing Data: Displaying and Exploring Data 5 A Survey 

of Probability Concepts 6 Discrete Probability Distributions 7 Continuous 

Probability Distributions 8 Sampling Methods and the Central Limit 

Theorem 9 Estimation and Confidence Intervals 10 One-Sample Tests 

of Hypothesis 11 Two-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 12 Analysis of Variance 

13 Linear Regression and Correlation 14 Multiple Regressions and 

Correlation Analysis 15 Index Numbers 16 Time Series and Forecasting 

17 Nonparametric Methods: Chi-Square Applications 18 Nonparametric 

Methods: Analysis of Ranked Data 19 Statistical Process Control and 

Quality Management 20 An Introduction to Decision Theory : MegaStat 

for Excel / Visual Statistics 2.0 / Appendixes / Photo Credits / Index 

70



New 

BUSINESS STATISTICS IN PRACTICE 

4th Edition 

By Bruce L Bowerman and Richard T O’Connell of Miami University—Oxford 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297747-9 / MHID: 0-07-297747-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325291-9 / MHID: 0-07-325291-3 

(with CD) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110837-9 / MHID: 0-07-110837-8 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bowerman4e 

The new edition of Business Statistics in Practice delivers clear 

and understandable explanations of business statistics concepts 

through the use of continuing case studies and an emphasis on 

business improvement. The cases and examples show real applications 

of statistics relevant to today’s business students. The 

authors motivate students by showing persuasively how the use 

of statistical techniques in support of business decision-making 

helps to improve business processes. A variety of computer 

centered examples and exercises, and a robust, technologybased 

ancillary package are designed to help students master 

this subject. Acknowledging the importance of spreadsheets 

and statistical software in their statistical instruction, the authors 

continue to integrate Excel and Minitab output throughout 

the text. In addition, a new enhanced version of MegaStat, an 

Excel add-in program designed to optimize Excel for statistical 

application, is available free on the Student CD. For students 

and instructors who want to explore statistical concepts from a 

graphical perspective, Visual Statistics is again available on the 

Student CD. New Business Improvement icons are integrated 

throughout the text to illustrate the ‘BI’ theme. 


• Several new continuing case examples, with new data sets, have 

been added to the Fourth Edition. Where an example of a statistical 

technique is applied to reach a business solution, such instances are 

highlighted by an icon. 

• Certain chapters and sections have been abbreviated and generally 

tightened up, delivering a more concise, digestable presentation to 

students. 

• A greater number of basic exercises have been added, at the request 

of reviewers and users. 

• Thorough integration of Megastat: The Megastat Excel add-in package, 

available on the CD of the previous edition of the book, has now been 

thoroughly integrated into the text. As the authors do with Excel and 

Minitab, instruction in the use of Megastat, complete with step-by-step 

screen captures, is offered at the conclusion of most every chapter of 

the book providing students with clearer direction. 

• Internet tutorials and exercises highlight real work applications and 

give students practice in gathering and using real data. 

• Consistent theme of business improvement through statistical analysis. 

Since this is the ultimate goal for statistical analysis in business (to 

improve business processes), this is B & O’s motto in the book. This 

theme is the foundations for the many case studies and examples found 

in the text. 

• Unique use of case studies that integrates different statistical areas. 

Many of BOH’s unique case studies span not only within chapters, but 

also groups of chapters. This leads to additional student relevance, as 

they become familiar with the real decisions businesses face. 

• A real emphasis on the importance of variation. This starts in Chapter 

1 and continues throughout the book. The practical, continuing case 

studies that permeate the book are consistently used to highlight this 

reality. 

• Utilization of a flexible topic flow that facilitates different topic 

choices and encourages different teaching approaches. 

• Modern use of the latest versions of Minitab, Excel. 

Contents 

1. An Introduction to Business Statistics 2. Descriptive Statistics 3. 

Probability 4. Discrete Random Variables 5. Continuous Random 

Variables 6. Sampling Distributions 7. Confidence Intervals 8. Hypothesis 

Testing 9. Statistical Inferences Based on Two Samples 

10. Experimental Design and Analysis of Variance 11. Simple Linear 

Regression Analysis 12. Multiple Regression and Model Building 13. 

Time Series Forecasting 14. Process Improvement Using Control 

Charts 15. Nonparametric Methods 16. Chi-Square Tests 17. Decision 

Theory / Appendix A: Statistical Tables Appendix B: Covariance 

Between Two Variables Appendix C: • Part I: Counting Rules • Part II 

Hypergeometric Distribution Appendix D: Normal Plots On CDROM: 

Appendix E: • Part I: Properties of the Mean and the Variance of a 

Random Variable, and the Covariance Between Two Random Variables 

• Part II: Derivations of the Mean and the Variance of the Sample 

Mean and of the Mean and the Variance of the Sample Proportion 

Appendix F: • Part I: Stratified Sampling • Part II: Cluster Sampling and 

Ratios Estimation 

• Output and instruction for SPSS has been selectively incorporated 

into the Fourth Edition, alongside Excel, Minitab, and Megastat. 

• Techiques in Hypothesis Testing have been re-cast in “steps” for 

greater student accessibility. 

• Chapters on Simple and Multiple Regression have been revised for 

a clearer and more concise presentation. 

Features 

• Latest version of Megastat Excel-add-in package: The coverage and 

capabilities of the Megastat add-in package, included on the CD ROM 

that accompanies the book, have been greatly expanded to enhance 

calculation capabilities. Among the topics now handled by Megastat 

are: (for descriptive statistics): stem-and-leaf; dot plot; auto histograms; 

(for hypothesis testing) empirical idea for tolerance intervals, group 

comparison for unequal variance; comparison of means with unequal 

variances; test of equal variances; (for ANOVA): Factorial ANOVA; 

simultaneous inference; one-way design for ANOVA; (for Regression) 

residual plots; normal plots; outlying influence and observation diagnostics; 

variance inflation factors; model-building: all possible regressions; 

step-wise selection; (for NonParametrics) sign test; (for Time Series) 

decomposition method. 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








71



New 


New 

APPLIED STATISTICS IN BUSINESS AND 

ECONOMICS WITH ST CD-ROM 

By David P Doane, Oakland University and Lori E Seward, Leeds 

College of Business 

2007 (January 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321575- 4 / MHID: 0-07-321575-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110814- 6 / MHID: 0-07-110814-9 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321498-0 / MHID: 0-07-321498-1 

(Instructor’s Edition with CD-ROM) 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/doane1e 

This new text offers an Excel focused approach to using statistics 

in business. All statistical concepts are illustrated with applied 

examples immediately upon introduction. Modern computing 

tools and applications are introduced, and the text maintains 

a strong focus on presenting statistical concepts as applied 

in business--as opposed to providing programming methods 

used to find a mathematical solution. Interpretation is heavily 

emphasized, enabling students to take full advantage of Excel 

to develop and drive problem-solving skills. 

Features 

• Applied Statistics in Business and Economics covers all the basic 

topics in the standard Business Statistics course, both undergraduate and 

MBA, using real and realistic data sets and modern technology. 

• Visual Statistics, Learning Stats, and MegaStat are integrated within 

the text and included in the package. 

• Examples, case studies, and problems are almost completely from 

published research or real applications. Two key example data sets 

are a health care management data and a midwest bank collection on 

Automated teller machines. 

• Exercises are placed at the ends of chapters-keeping the chapter text 

‘clean and concise’. 

• There are plenty of examples within the chapters, and virtually all of 

those are available in a technology form on CD. The exercises do often 

include ‘encouragement’ of experimentation and alternative analysis. 

• Though approx 800 pages in length- the text is concise in it’s treatment. 

Much of the length is due to the heavy use of graphics and 

illustrative material. 

• The text is also decidedly non-mathematical- in both ‘look and feel’ 

and in substance. 

• All but the simplest proofs and deriviations are eliminated. 

• The text integrates many real world data sets, including two large sets 

featuring health care management and banking/financial data. 

• The treatment of confidence intervals and inference emphasizes 

proportions because they are more important in business applications. 

The text also thoroughly integrates p-value interpretations of all tests. 

• Hypothesis Testing chapters and all examples are presented following 

a consistent five step format 

CONTENTS 

Chapter One: Overview of Statistics Chapter Two: Data Collection Chapter 

Three: Describing Data Visually Chapter Four: Descriptive Statistics 

Chapter Five: Probability Chapter Six: Discrete Distributions Chapter 

Seven: Continuous Distributions Chapter Eight: Sampling Distributions 

and Estimation Chapter Nine: Hypothesis Testing: One Sample Chapter 

Ten: Hypothesis Testing: Two Sample Tests Chapter Eleven: Analysis 

of Variance Chapter Twelve: Bivariate Regression Chapter Thirteen: 

Multiple Regression Chapter Fourteen: Time Series Analysis Chapter 

Fifteen: Chi-Square Tests Chapter Sixteen: Nonparametric Tests Chapter 

Seventeen: Quality Management 

basic statistics USING EXCEL AND MEGASTAT 

By J Burdeane Orris, Butler University 

2007 (March 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321158-9 / MHID: 0-07-321158-3 

(with CD) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125431-1 / MHID: 0-07-125431-5 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/orris1e 

This new text offers an Excel-focused approach to using statistics 

in business. All statistical concepts are illustrated with applied 


tools and applications are introduced, and the text maintains a 

strong focus on presenting statistical concepts as applied using 

Excel, enhanced by MegaStat, the Excel add-in created by the 

author and used as a standard for all McGraw-Hill/Irwin Business 

Statistics textbooks. The text enables students to take full advantage 

of Excel to develop and drive problem-solving skills. As a 

one-color paperback, it is also a competitive low-cost alternative 

to most of the higher-priced books in the market. 

Features 

• Concise but complete text with coverage appropriate for one-semester 

and most two-semester courses. The book is relatively short, but not 

“easy.” It covers the “real thing” but avoids getting overly theoretical 

or mathematical. 

• Modern in that it avoids computational calculator equations and emphasizes 

computer use. It is the author’s belief that Excel is a wonderful 

learning tool as a super-calculator. The book includes the Excel add-in 

MegaStat, but is not a book about MegaStat. The focus is always on 

learning statistics—MegaStat is one tool students can use to do so. 

• Learning Activities that guide learning and encourage experimentation 

are interspersed throughout the text. Most of the Learning Activities 

work through computations and concepts manually and then verify 

with MegaStat. 

• Chapter “Modules,” which contain practical material that supports 

the concepts introduced in the main text of the chapter, are placed 

at the end of chapter so that instructors can easily skip or include the 

material at their own discretion. 

• Text references to animated, narrated Tutorials housed on the Student 

CD, which will help the student understand a particular tool or topic 

better. These include two Excel “primer” tutorials and MegaStat setup 

and introduction tutorials, as well as 14 tutorials on various statistical 

subjects. 

• End-of-Chapter problems presented in a table that lists the chapter’s 

Exercises, which are contained on a Excel spreadsheet on the Student 

CD. The book has approximately 150 Exercises including more than 

350 individual problems. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Introduction. Chapter 2 Descriptive Statistics. Chapter 3 

Frequency Distributions. Chapter 4 Probability Concepts. Chapter 5 

Discrete Probability Distributions. Chapter 6 Normal Distribution. 

Chapter 7 Sampling and Sampling Distributions. Chapter 8 Confidence 

Intervals. Chapter 9 Hypothesis Testing Concepts. Chapter 10 Hypothesis 

Testing Applications. Chapter 11 Analysis of Variance. Chapter 12 

Linear Regression Analysis. Chapter 13 Multiple Regression. Chapter 

14 Chi-Square Applications. Chapter 15 Time-Series Analysis. Chapter 

16 Summary and Integration. Appendix A: Excel Statistical Functions. 

Appendix B: Hypothesis Test Summaries. Appendix C: Glossary and 

Key Equations. Appendix D: Tables. Appendix E: Tutorial List 

72



COMPLETE BUSINESS STATISTICS 

6th Edition 

By Amir Aczel, Bentley College and Jayavel Sounderpandian 

2006 / 800 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286882-1 / MHID: 0-07-286882-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312698-2 / MHID: 0-07-312698-5 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124416-9 / MHID: 0-07-124416-6 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/aczel6e 

Statistical integrity with a complete Excel solution, this new edition 

of Complete Business Statistics offers revised sections on 

regression analysis and updated cases highlighting companies 

across the globe. 

CONTENTS 

Working with Templates / 1. Introduction and Descriptive Statistics 2. 

Probability 3 Random Variables 4. The Normal Distribution 5. Sampling 

and Sampling Distributions 6. Confidence Intervals 7. Hypothesis Testing 

8. The Comparison of Two Populations 9 Analysis of Variance 10. 

Simple Linear Regression and Correlation 11. Multiple Regression and 

Correlation 12. Time Series, Forecasting, and Index Numbers 13. Quality 

Control and Improvement 14. Nonparametric Methods and Chi-Square 

Test 15. Bayesian Statistics and Decision Analysis /Appendices A: References 

B: Answers to Most Odd-Numbered Problems C: Statistical Tables 

/ On the CD 16. Sampling Methods / 17. Multivariate Analysis 

Correlation Analysis 15 Chi-Square Applications Appendixes Answers 

to Odd-Numbered Chapter Exercises 

BUSINESS STATISTICS 

2nd Edition 

By G C Beri, Professor of University of Baroda 

2005 (July 2005) / 692 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-059946-8 / MHID: 0-07-059946-7 


The author has given lucid exposition of the statistical methods 

with illustrations. There are few books even today which cover 

the subject in such a detailed vigorous manner. The design of 

the book, viz., the easy-to-follow presentation, chapter prerequisites, 

chapter objectives, glossary, list of formulae will be 

very much useful to the management students and also make 

the book reader friendly. 

CONTENTS 

1. Introduction 2. Classification of Data 3. Graphic Presentation of Data 

4. Diagrammatic Presentation of Data 5. Measures of Central Tendency 

6. Measures of Dispersion 7. Skewness, Moments and Kurtosis 8. Probability 

9. Probability Distributions 10. Sampling and Sampling Distributions 

11. Estimation 12. Testing Hypotheses 13. Chi-Square Distribution 

14. Analysis of Variance 15. Regression Analysis 16. Correlation 17. 

Multiple Regression and Correlation Analysis 18. Time Series Analysis 

and Forecasting 19. Non-Parametric Tests 20. Index Numbers 21. Decision 

Theory 22. Quality Control 


BASIC STATISTICS FOR BUSINESS AND 

ECONOMICS 

5th Edition 

By Douglas Lind, Coastal Carolina University, William G Marchal of 

University of Toledo and Robert D Mason, Coastal Carolina University 

2006 / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312165-9 / MHID: 0-07-312165-7 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124461-9 / MHID: 0-07-124461-1 


Website: http:www/mhhe.com/lindbasics5e 

Lind/Marchal/Wathen: Basic Statistics for Business and Economics 

5e is a derivative of the best-selling STATISTICAL 

TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS, 12/e offering 

the essential topics of statistical tools and methods delivered 

in a student friendly, step-by-step format. The text presents 

concepts clearly and succinctly with a conversational writing 

style. All statistical concepts are illustrated with solved applied 


tools and applications are introduced, though the text maintains 

a focus on presenting statistics content as opposed to technology 

or programming methods, and the fifth edition continues 

as a ‘students’ text with increased emphasis on interpretation 

of data and results. 

Contents 

Brief Contents 1 What Is Statistics? 2 Describing Data: Frequency 

Distributions and Graphic Presentation 3 Describing Data: Numerical 

Measures 4 Describing Data: Displaying and Exploring Data 5 A Survey 

of Probability Concepts 6 Discrete Probability Distributions 7 Continuous 

Probability Distributions 8 Sampling Methods and the Central Limit 

Theorem 9 Estimation and Confidence Intervals 10 One-Sample Tests 

of Hypothesis 11 Two-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 12 Analysis of Variance 

13 Linear Regression and Correlation 14 Multiple Regression and 


PRACTICAL BUSINESS STATISTICS 

5th Edition 

By Andrew F Siegel, University of Washington 

2003 / 180 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282125-3 / MHID: 0-07-282125-6 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121338-7 / MHID: 0-07-121338-4 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/siegel5e 

CONTENTS 

Part 1: Introduction: Defining the Role of Statistics in Business 1. Introduction: 

Defining the Role of Statistics in Business 2. Data Structures: 

Classifying the Various Types of Data Sets 3. Histograms: Looking at 

the Distribution of Data 4. Landmark Summaries: Interpreting Typical 

Values and Percentiles 5. Variability: Dealing with Diversity Part 2: 

Probability 6. Probability: Understanding Random Situations 7. Random 

Variables: Working with Uncertain Numbers Part 3: Statistical 

Inference 8. Random Sampling 9. Confidence Intervals: Admitting that 

estimates are not exact 10. Hypothesis Testing: Deciding between reality 

and confidence Part 4: Regression and Time Series 11. Correaltion 

and Regression: Measuring and predicting relationships 12. Multiple 

Regression: Predicting oen factor from several others 13. Report Writing: 

Communicating the results of a multiple regression 14. Time Series: 

Understanding Changes over time Part 5: Methods and Applications 

15. Anova: Testing for Differneces among many samples, and much 

more. 16. Nonparametrics: Testing with Ordinal Data or Nonnormal 

Distributions 17. Chi-Squared Analysis: Testing for Patterns in Qualitive 

Data 18. Quality Control: Recognizing and Managing Variation 

/ Appendix A: Employee Database Appendix B: Donations Database 

Appendix C: Self-Test: Solutions to selected problem and database 

exercises Appendix D: Statistical Tables Appendix E: Statpad Quick 

Reference Guide 

73



STATISTICS 

A First Course, 6th Edition 

By Donald Sanders, Education Consultant and Robert Smidt, California 

Polytechnic State University - San Luis Obispo 

2000 / 704 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-233217- 9 / MHID: 0-07-233217-4 

(with CD-ROM) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116984-4 / MHID: 0-07-116984-9 


CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Let’s Get Started Chapter 2: Thinking Critically about Data: 

Liars, Liars, and a Few Statisticians Chapter 3: Descriptive Statistics 

Chapter 4: Probability Concepts Chapter 5: Probability Distributions 

Chapter 6: Sampling Concepts Chapter 7: Estimating Parameters 

Chapter 8: Testing Hypotheses: One Sample Procedures Chapter 9: 

Inference: Two-Sample Procedures Chapter 10: Analysis of Variance 

Chapter 11: Chi-Square Tests: Goodness-of-Fit and Contingency Table 

Methods Chapter 12: Linear Regression and Correlation Chapter 13: 

Non parametric Statistical Methods Appendices 1: Selected Values 

of the Binomial Probability Distribution 2: Areas under the Standard 

Normal Probability Distribution 3: A Brief Table of Random Numbers 

Distribution 4: Areas for t Distributions Distribution 5: Distribution 

Tables Distribution 6: Chi-Square Distribution Distribution 7: Critical 

Values of a=.05 and a=.01 in the Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test Distribution 

8: Distribution of U in the Mann-Whitney Test Distribution 9: 

Critical Values for r in the Runs Test for Randomness Distribution 10: 

Selected Values of the Poisson Probability Distribution Distribution 

11: Entering and Editing Data in Minitab Distribution 12: Answers to 

Odd-Numbered Exercises 

New 


Supplements 

BASIC STATISTICS USING EXCEL FOR USE WITH 

STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND 

ECONOMICS 

13th Edition 

By Douglas Lind, Coasta Carolina University, William Marchal, 

University of Toledo and Robert Mason 

2008 (October 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303026-5 / MHID: 0-07-303026-0 


SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING STATISTICS 

2nd Edition 

By Larry J. Stephens, University of Nebraska, Omaha 

2006 / 416 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145932-7 / MHID: 0-07-145932-4 


This study tool is ideal if you wish to master the basics for an 

introductory course or solo study. This new edition includes 

output from Excel, SAS, SPSS, STATISTIX, and MINITAB, all of 

which are now in general use for college courses on statistics 

at this level. It will also include up-to-date statistical examples 

taken from the latest media sources. 


SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BUSINESS STATISTICS 

4th Edition 

By Leonard J. Kazmier, Arizona State University 

2004 / 432 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141080-9 / MHID: 0-07-141080-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123679-9 / MHID: 0-07-123679-1 [IE] 


Conforming to the current business statistics curriculum, this 

fourth edition of Schaums Outline of Business Statistics reflects 

recent changes in the course as well as in general practice, 

including new sections in each chapter on the application 

of Excel—the most used program in offices throughout the 

world—making this the first book to address this change in the 

curriculum. The fourth edition continues to provide a direct and 

effective tool for learning the fundamentals of business statistics 

without the technical verbiage. 

SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF BUSINESS 

STATISTICS 

By Leonard J. Kazmier, Arizona State University 

2003 / 160 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-139876-3 / MHID: 0-07-139876-7 


CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Analyzing Business Data / Chapter 2: Statistical Presentations 

and Graphical Analysis / Chapter 3: Describing Business Data: Measures 

of Location / Chapter 4: Describing Business Data: Measures of Variability 

/ Chapter 5: Probability / Chapter 6: Probability / Distributions 

for Discrete Random Variables / Chapter 7: Probability Distributions 

for Continuous Random Variables / Chapter 8: Sampling Distributions 

and Confidence Intervals for the Mean / Chapter 9: Other Confidence 

Intervals / Chapter 10: Testing Hypotheses Concerning the Value of the 

Population Mean / Chapter 11: Testing Other Hypotheses / Chapter 12: 

The Chi-Square Test / Chapter 13: Analysis of Variance / Chapter 14: 

Linear Regression and Correlation Analysis / Chapter 15: Multiple Regression 

and Correlation / Chapter 16: Time Series Analysis and Business 

Forecasting / Chapter 17: Index Numbers for Business and Economic 

Data / Chapter 18: Decision Analysis: Payoff Tables And Decision Trees 

/ Chapter 19: Decision Analysis: The Use of the Sample Information 

/ Chapter 20: Statistical Process Control / Chapter 21: Nonparametric 

Statistics / Appendices 

74


SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF STATISTICS AND 

ECONOMETRICS 

2nd Edition 

By Dominick Salvatore and Derrick Reagle of Fordham University 

2002 / 256 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-134852-2 / MHID: 0-07-134852-2 


CONTENTS 

Introduction. / Descriptive Statistics. / Probability and Probability Distributions. 

/ Statistics Inference: Estimation. / Statistical Inference: Testing 

Hypothesis. / Statistics Examination. / Simple Regression Analysis. / Multiple 

Regression Analysis. / Problems in Regression Analysis. / Further 

Techniques and Applications in Regression Analysis. / Simultaneous- 

Equations Methods. / Time Series Econometrics. / Statistics Examination. 

/ Bionomial Distribution. / Poisson Distribution. / Standard Normal 

Distribution. / Table of Random Numbers. / Student t Distribution. / 

Chi-Square Distribution. / F Distribution. / Durbin-Watson Statistics. / 

Critical Values of Runs in the Run Tests. 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PROBABILITY AND 

STATISTICS 

2nd Edition 

By Murray R. Spiegel (Deceased), John J Schiller and R Alu Srinivasan 

2000 / 408 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135004-4 / MHID: 0-07-135004-7 


CONTENTS 

Part I: Probability. / Chapter 1: Basic Probability. / Chapter 2: Random 

Variables and Probability Distributions. / Chapter 3: Mathematical 

Expectation. / Chapter 4: Special Probability Distributions. / Part II: 

Statistics. / Chapter 5: Sampling Theory. / Chapter 6: Estimation Theory. 

/ Chapter 7: Tests of Hypotheses and Significance. / Chapter 8: Curve 

Fitting, Regression, and Correlation. / Chapter 9: Analysis of Variance. 

/ Chapter 10: Nonparametric Tests. / Appendices. / Index. / Index for 

Solved Problems. 

Business Forecasting 


New 

BUSINESS FORECASTING 

5th Edition 

By J Holton Wilson, Central Michigan University, Barry Keating, 

University of Notre Dame and John Galt Solutions Inc 


Jan 2005 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320398-0 / MHID: 0-07-320398-X 

(with Forecast X Software and Student CD-ROM) 

Oct 2005 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297967-1 / MHID: 0-07-297967-4 

(Text only) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124494-7 / MHID: 0-07-124494-8 

[IE – Text only] 

The Fifth Edition of Business Forecasting is the most practical 

forecasting book on the market with the most powerful 

software—Forecast X. This new edition presents a broad-based 

survey of business forecasting methods including subjective and 

objective approaches. As always, the author team of Wilson and 

Keating deliver practical how-to forecasting techniques, while 

theory and math are held to a minimum. This edition focuses 

on the most proven, acceptable methods used commonly in 

business and government such as regression, smoothing, decomposition, 

and Box-Jenkins. This new edition continues to 

integrate the most comprehensive software tool available in this 

market, Forecast X. With the addition of ForeCastX, this text provides 

the most complete and up-to-date coverage of forecasting 

concepts with the most technologically sophisticated software 

package on the market. This Excel-based tool (which received 

a 4 point out 5 rating from PC Magazine, Oct. 2, 2000 issue) 

effectively uses wizards and many tools to make forecasting 

easy and understandable. 


• Point-of-Sale (POS) Data featured: With new POS data, readers will 

be learning about an important issue to many businesses attempting to 

improve their long and short term planning. 

• Supply Chain Issues discussed: The coverage of forecasting as it 

relates to supply chain issues has been increased to cover cutting-edge 

companies, such as Wal-Mart, and how they are establishing strong 

supply chain relationships and operations. 

• New and Updated Data Mining coverage: Data Mining is shown to 

help deliver more accurate forecasts, resulting in better operations and 

marketing processes and practices. 

• Updated Version of Forecast X Software: Developed by John Galt 

Solutions, Inc. for professional applications, FORECAST X has been 

updated with the new edition. This software adds a level of realism 

to the course and students appreciate having to learn software that is 

actually used in the business community. 

FEATURES 

• Real-World Data used: This text consists almost entirely of real-world 

examples, showing readers how to deal with real-life problems and 

difficulties in a realistic environment. 

• Extended Examples used in each chapter: Two examples are used 

demonstrate the progression of techniques needed to solve each issue, 

these examples provide a realistic illustration of the concepts that are 

relevant to the student used in the text. One example is sales data from 

The Gap, while the other example uses domestic car sales data. 

• Excel Data is presented: Excel is the leading calculation software used 

in business, and by consistently providing all the data in Excel, students 

recognize how easy it is to use with FORECAST X software. 

• Screenshots of problems help students better conceptualize the 

problems: The edition includes many screenshots of actual problems; 

the data for each of these examples and problems is included on the 

accompanying CD. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Introduction to Business Forecasting. Chapter 2 The Forecast 

Process, Data Considerations, and Model Selection. Chapter 3 Moving 

Averages and Exponential Smoothing. Chapter 4 Introduction to Forecasting 

with Regression Methods. Chapter 5 Forecasting with Multiple 

Regressions. Chapter 6 Times-Series Decomposition. Chapter 7 ARIMA 

(Box-Jenkins) – Type Forecasting Models. Chapter 8 Combining Forecast 

Results. Chapter 9 Forecast Implications 

75



FORECASTING, PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATION 

By Stephen Delurgio, University of Missouri - Kansas City 

1998 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-561120-2 / MHID: 0-07-561120-1 

(with Disk)-Out of Print 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115998-2 / MHID: 0-07-115998-3 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

Part I Foundations of Forecasting Chapter 1 Planning and Forecasting 

Chapter 2 Statistical Fundamentals for Forecasting Appendix A Expected 

Values Appendix B Statistics for White noise Chapter 3 Introduction 

to Regression Analysis Supplement Cross Correlation Functions Part II 

Univariate Methods Chapter 4 Simple Exponential Smoothing Chapter 

5 Decomposition and Census II Methods Chapter 6 Trend-Seasonal 

Smoothing Supplement Fourier Series Analysis Part III Univariate 

ARIMA Methods Chapter 7 ARIMA Introduction Appendix A Useful 

Statistical Definitions Appendix B White noise and Stationarity Appendix 

C Theoretical ACF’s for an ARIMA (1,1,0) Process Appendix D Theoretical 

ACF’s for an ARIMA (0,0,1) Process Appendix E Checking Bounds 

of Invertibility and Stationarity Appendix F Example ARIMA data sets 

Appendix G Partial Autocorrelations and the Yule-Walker Equations 

Chapter 8 ARIMA Applications Chapter 9 ARIMA Forecast Profiles 

Part IV Multivariate/Causal Methods Chapter 10 Multiple Regression 

of Time Series Appendix Deriving Normal Equations Chapter 11 Econometric 

Methods Chapter 12 ARIMA Intervention Analysis Chapter 13 

Multivariate ARIMA - Transfer Functions Appendix Estimating Impulse 

Response Weights Part V Cyclical, Qualitative, and Artificial Intelligence 

Methods Chapter 14 Cyclical Forecasting Methods Chapter 

14A Supplement-Some general Theories explaining Cycles Chapter 15 

Qualitative and Technological Forecasting Methods Chapter 16 Expert 

Systems, Neural Networks, and Genetic Algorithms Part VI Combining, 

Validation, and Managerial Issues Chapter 17 Combining, Control, 

and validation Methods Chapter 18 Method Characteristics, Accuracy, 

and Data Sources Appendices: A Forecasting Data Sources B Outlier 

Detection and Adjustment Procedures 


DECISION MAKING AND FORECASTING 

By Kneale Marshall, U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, and Robert 

Oliver, University of California-Berkeley 

1995 / 384 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048027-8 / MHID: 0-07-048027-3 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113970-0 / MHID: 0-07-113970-2 [IE] 

Business Research 

Method 


BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS 

9th Edition 

By Donald Cooper, Florida Atlantic University - Boca Rator and 

Pamela Schindler, Wittenberg University 

2006 / 864 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297923-7 / MHID: 0-07-297923-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321487-0 / MHID: 0-07-321487-6 

(with CD) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124430-5 / MHID: 0-07-124430-1 

[IE with CD] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cooper9e 

Cooper and Schindler’s Business Research Methods offers students 

and instructors thorough coverage of business research 

topics backed by solid theory. The authors are successful 

marketing research consultants and that is evident in the rich 

and realistic case studies found in the text. Managerial decision 

making is the underlying theme, topics and applications 

are presented and organized in a manner that allow students 

to thoroughly understand business research topics and functions. 

Consequently, the structure of the text encourages and 

supports completion of an in-depth business research project 

during the semester. 

CONTENTS 

Part I Introduction to Business Research 1 Research in Business 2 

Thinking Like a Researcher 3 The Research Process 4 Business Research 

Requests and Proposals Appendix 4a: Covering Kids RFP 5 Ethics in 

Business Research Part II The Design of Research 6 Research Design: 

An Overview 7 Secondary Data Searches 8 Qualitative Research 9 Observation 

Studies 10 Surveys 11 Experiments and Test Markets Appendix 

11a: Complex Experimental Designs Part III The Sources and Collection 

of Data 12 Measurement 13 Measurement Scales 14 Questionnaires 

and Instruments Appendix 14a: Crafting Effective Measurement Questions 

Appendix 14b: Pretesting Options and Discoveries 15 Sampling 

Concepts Appendix 15a: Determining Sample Size Part IV Analysis and 

Presentation of Data 16 Data Preparation and Analysis Appendix 16a: 

Describing Data Statistically 17 Exploring, Displaying, and Examining 

Data 18 Hypothesis Testing 19 Measures of Association 20 Multivariate 

Analysis: An Overview 21 Presenting Insights and Findings: Written and 

Oral Reports / case abstracts / appendices A Focus Group Discussion 

Guide B Nonparametric Significance Tests C Selected Statistical Tables 

/ References and Readings / Glossary / Photo Credits / Index 










76


BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS 

By Boris Blumberg, University of Maastricht, Donald Cooper and 

Pamela Schindler 

2005 / 650 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710742-0 / MHID: 0-07-710742-X 


Business Research Methods, European edition is a rigorous, 

up-to-date and engaging text that introduces students to the 

concepts, processes and practices of good business research. 

Designed to lead readers through the entire research process 

from start to finish, the text is divided into three parts: 

• Essentials of Research: this section introduces students to 

the whys of research, outlines the process and the proposal 

stage, and finally explores the ethics involved with all research 

undertakings. 

• Research Set-Up: now readers are familiar with the research 

process, this section introduces the different types of research. 

Beginning with a chapter on qualitative and quantitative research, 

this part also features chapters on sampling strategies, 

interviews, surveys, observational research, ethnography and 

ends with a chapter on experiments. 

• Conducting the Research: this third section illustrates how 

best to conduct research, exploring the theory and practice of 

secondary data, measurements, field work and questionnaires. 

The text ends with a chapter that explains how best to write 

and present your research once it is complete, an essential skill 

for any good researcher! 

A fourth part of the book is made available to readers on a CD- 

ROM that comes free with every copy of Business Research 

Methods, which covers the Statistical Background of research. 

Designed to be used easily in conjunction with the text by those 

that need a more statistical perspective on research, the CD 

includes chapters on exploring, displaying and examining data, 

testing hypothesis, measuring association and an overview on 

multivariate analysis. Providing integrated coverage of advanced 

statistical methods, techniques and analysis, these chapters 

provide the perfect add-on for those that need it. Indexed and 

page numbered, it can be used easily in conjunction with the 

rest of the text. 

CONTENTS 

Part I Essentials of Research Ch. 1 The nature of business and management 

research Ch. 2 Research process and proposal Ch. 3 Research 

Ethics Part II Research Approaches Ch. 4 Quantitative and qualitative 

research Ch. 5 Literature review Ch. 6 Sampling strategies: From one 

case to the whole population Ch. 7Survey Research Ch. 8 Observational, 

action and ethnographic research Ch. 9 Experiments Part III Conducting 

the Research Ch. 10 Secondary data, archival sources and content 

analysis Ch. 11 Measurements and scales Ch. 12 Field work: Questionnaire 

and responses Ch. 13 Writing and presenting research outcomes 

Part IV Statistical background (on CD-Rom) Ch. 14 Data preparation 

and description Ch. 15 Exploring, displaying and examining data Ch. 

16 Hypothesis testing Ch. 17 Measure of association Ch. 18 Multivariate 

analysis: an overview 


BUSINESS INFORMATION 

Finding and Using Data in the Digital Age 

By Jay Zagorsky 

2003 / 288 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250770-6 / MHID: 0-07-250770-5 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119959-9 / MHID: 0-07-119959-4 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1. Introduction Chapter 2. Information Basics Chapter 3. Quick 

Information Statistical Compendia Chapter 4. Demographic Information 

Chapter 5. Income Chapter 6. Consumer Spending Chapter 7. People 

Details Chapter 8. Industry Information Chapter 9. Company Information 

Chapter 10. Prices Chapter 11. Human Resources Chapter 12. Labor 

Market Information Chapter 13. Tax Information Chapter 14. Information 

on the Economy Chapter 15. Exporting and Importing Chapter 16. 

Conclusion Appendix 1:What Is An Index Appendix 2:Census and 

Survey Details Appendix 3:Answers to Practice Questions 

Linear Statistics / Regression 


APPLIED LINEAR STATISTICAL MODELS 

5th Edition 

By Michael H Kutner, Emory University, Chris J Nachtsheim, 

University of Minnesota, John Neter, University of Georgia and William 

Li, University of Minnesota 

2005 / 1344 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310874-2 / 0-07-310874-X 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112221-4 / MHID: 0-07-112221-4 


Applied Linear Statistical Models 5e is the long established 

leading authoritative text and reference on statistical modeling, 

analysis of variance, and the design of experiments. For students 

in most any discipline where statistical analysis or interpretation 

is used, ALSM serves as the standard work. The text proceeds 

through linear and nonlinear regression and modeling for the 

first half, and through ANOVA and Experimental Design in the 

second half. All topics are presented in a precise and clear style 

supported with solved examples, numbered formulae, graphic 

illustrations, and “Comments” to provide depth and statistical 

accuracy and precision. Applications used within the text and 

the hallmark problems, exercises, and projects and case studies 

are drawn from virtually all disciplines and fields providing 

motivation for students in virtually any college. The Fifth edition 

provides an increased use of computing and graphical analysis 

throughout, without sacrificing concepts or rigor. In general, the 

5e uses larger data sets in examples and exercises, and the use 

of automated software without loss of understanding. 

CONTENTS 

Part1: Simple Linear Regression 1: Linear Regression with One Predictor 

Variable 2: Inferences in Regression and Correlation Analysis 3: Diagnostics 

and Remedial Measures 4: Simultaneous Inferences and Other 

Topics in Regression Analysis 5: Matrix Approach to Simple Linear 

Regression Analysis Part 2: Multiple Linear Regression 6: Multiple 

Regression I 7: Multiple Regression II 8: Building the Regression Model 

I: Models for Quantitative and Qualitative Predictors 9: Building the 

Regression Model II: Model Selection and Validation 10: Building the 

Regression Model III: Diagnostics 11: Remedial Measures and Alterna- 

77


tive Regression Techniques 12: Auto-correlation in Time Series Data Part 

3: Nonlinear Regression 13: Introduction to Nonlinear Regression and 

Neural Networks 14: Logistic Regression, Poisson Regression, and Generalized 

Linear Models Part 4: Single Factor Studies 15: Introduction to 

Analysis of Variance and the Design of Experiments 16: Single-Factor 

ANOVA: Model and Tests 17: Analysis of Factor Level Effects in Single 

Factor Studies 18: ANOVA Diagnostics and Remedial Measures Part 5: 

Multifactor Studies and Blocking 19: Two-Factor Studies—Equal Sample 

Sizes 20: Two-Factor Studies—One Case per Cell 21: Randomized 

Complete Block Designs 22: Analysis of Covariance 23: Two -Factor 

Studies—Unequal Sample Sizes 24: Multifactor ANOVA Model and 

Tests 25: Random and Mixed-Effects Models Part 6: Special-Purpose 

Experimental Designs 26: Nested Designs, Subsampling, and Partially 

Nested Designs 27: Repeated Measures and Related Designs 28: Latin 

Square, Balanced Incomplete Block, and Related Designs 29: Exploratory 

Experiments-Two-Level Factorial and Fractional Factorial Designs 

30: Response Surface Experiments 

Others 

HOW TO PREPARE FOR DATA INTERPRETATION 

2nd Edition 

By Arun Sharma 

2005 / 356 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-060057-7 / MHID: 0-07-060057-0 


FEATURES 

• New section on Logical Reasoning 

• Nearly 250 new practice questions in the Logical Reasoning section 

in varying levels of difficulty 

• Nearly 1900 questions (including 650 new questions) in the Data 

Interpretation section 


APPLIED LINEAR REGRESSION MODELS 

4th Edition 

By John Neter, University of Georgia, Michael H Kutner, William 

Wasserman, and Chris Nachtsheim, University of Minnesota 

2004 / 672 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301466-1 / MHID: 0-07-301466-4 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123252-4 / MHID: 0-07-123252-4 [IE] 

Kutner, Neter, Nachtsheim, Wasserman, Applied Linear Regression 

Models, 4/e (ALRM4e) is the long established leading 

authoritative text and reference on regression (previously Neter 

was lead author.) For students in most any discipline where 

statistical analysis or interpretation is used, ALRM has served 

as the industry standard. The text includes brief introductory 

and review material, and then proceeds through regression and 

modeling. All topics are presented in a precise and clear style 

supported with solved examples, numbered formulae, graphic illustrations, 

and “Notes” to provide depth and statistical accuracy 

and precision. Applications used within the text and the hallmark 

problems, exercises, and projects are drawn from virtually all 

disciplines and fields providing motivation for students in any 

discipline. ALRM 4e provides an increased use of computing 

and graphical analysis throughout, without sacrificing concepts 

or rigor by using larger data sets in examples and exercises, and 

where methods can be automated within software without loss 

of understanding, it is so done. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 - Simple Linear Regression 1 Linear Regression with One Predictor 

Variable 2 Inferences in Regression and Correlation Analysis 3 

Diagnostics and Remedial Measures 4 Simultaneous Inferences and 

Other Topics in Regression Analysis 5 Matrix Approach to Simple Linear 

Regression Analysis Part 2 - Multiple Linear Regression 6 Multiple 

Regression I 7 Multiple Regression II 8 Building the Regression Model 

I: Models for Quantitative and Qualitative Predictors 9 Building the 

Regression Model II: Model Selection and Validation 10 Building the 

Regression Model III: Diagnostics 11 Remedial Measures and Alternative 

Regression Techniques 12 Autocorrelation in Time Series Data 

Part 3 - Nonlinear Regression 13 Introduction to Nonlinear Regression 

and Neural Networks 14 Logistic Regression, Poisson Regression, and 

Generalized Linear Models 

• Explanatory notes to difficult questions 

CONTENTS 

Part 1: Basic Modes of Data Interpretation. Chapter 1: Data Interpretation: 

An Overview. Chapter 2: Tables. Chapter 3: Bar Charts. Chapter 4: 

X-Y Charts (Also known as line graphs). Chapter 5: Pie Charts. Chapter 

6: Cases. Part 2: DI Exercises (Without Options). Part 3: Ten Minutes 

Test Papers. Part 4: Full Length Sectional Test Papers. Part 5: Model 

Test Papers. Section II: Logical Reasoning. Part 6: Theory and Concepts. 

1. Important Concepts in Logical Reasoning. Part 7: Logical Reasoning 

Exercises. 1. Level of Difficult (LOD) – 1. 2. Level of Difficult (LOD) 

– 2. 3. Level of Difficult (LOD) – 3 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








78

2007-2008 NEW Business Math Titles 

Business Math ~ Contents 

Business Math................................................................. 80 



• NELSON 

Essential of Math with Business 

Applications, Student Edition, 7e.............................80 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298599-3 / MHID: 0-07-298599-2 

79

Business Math 

New 

Business Math 

ESSENTIAL OF MATH WITH BUSINESS 

APPLICATIONS 

Student Edition, 7th Edition 

By Marceda Nelson 

2007 (May 2006) / 528 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298599-3 / MHID: 0-07-298599-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328388-3 / MHID: 0-07-328388-6 

(Instructor’s Edition to accompany Essentials of Math) 

McGraw-Hill/Glencoe Publication 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/nelson7e 

This text is organized into 60 distinct Skill Builders meant to 

prepare students with the skills and competencies they will need 

to enter the workforce or to go into business careers. Students 

gain real-world math skills by working business problems and 

applications involving interest, discounts, payroll, depreciation, 

retail selling, and checking accounts. 


• New Instructor’s CD will contain the Instructor’s Resource Manual, 

PowerPoint slides, and test bank in two formats–a printable Word version 

and an EZTest version–for ultimate course flexibility. 

• New, four-color, contemporary design to keep students’ interest and 

facilitate learning. 

• Additional and updated Skillbuilders and new USA Today articles to 

keep on the forefront of today’s business math trends. 

Features 

• Student Success Hints in the margins give students advice on how 

to study, take notes and ask for help. 

• Calculator Hints and Math Tips provide instruction and shortcuts 

for students. 

• Activities Pages at the end of each Skillbuilder that include Graph 

Activities that feature a USA Today graph and application and Challenge 

Activities that provide practice using critical thinking skills. 

• Instructor’s Annotated Edition makes teaching easier and saves valuable 

instructor time. 

CONTENTS 

Unit 1 Whole Numbers: Addition and Subtraction Unit 2 Whole Numbers: 

Multiplication and Division Unit 3 Decimals: Addition, Subtraction, 

Multiplication, and Division Unit 4 Working with Fractions Unit 

5 Percents and Other Tools of Mathematical Analysis Unit 6 Business 

and Consumer Math Unit 7 Interest and Discounts 


PRACTICAL BUSINESS MATH PROCEDURES 

8th Edition 

By Jeffrey Slater, North Shore Community College 

2006 / 672 pages 

ISBN-13 978-0-07-296713-5 / MHID: 0-07-296713-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313308-9 / MHID: 0-07-313308-6 

(with DVD, Business Math Handbook, and Wall Street 

Journal Insert MP) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111733-3 / MHID: 0-07-111733-4 

[IE with DVD, Business Math Handbook, and Wall Street Journal 

Insert MP] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313309-6 / MHID: 0-07-313309-4 

(Brief Edition, with DVD and Business Math Handbook) 

McGraw-Hill/Glencoe Publication 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/slater8e 

Practical Business Math Procedures is a comprehensive introduction 

to the concepts and applications of mathematics to 

personal and commercial business problems. The text uses 

basic arithmetic and problem solving techniques and illustrates 

their use in retailing, interest and loans, banking, payroll, taxes, 

investments, insurance, and a variety of other business situations. 

The text is well known for the motivating integration of 

interesting real world examples and photos from the Wall Street 

Journal, Kiplinger’s, and many other business journals. PBMP’s 

is the most popular and widely used book for this course and 

is carefully written and developed to support students with 

little math experience with practice quizzes, thousands of 

exercises, color coded procedures and diagrams, supporting 

tutorial videos on DVD, and the highest standards of reliability 

and cleanliness. 

CONTENTS 

1. Whole Numbers: How to Dissect and Solve Word Problems 2. Fractions 

3. Decimals 4. Banking 5. Solving for the Unknown: A How-To 

Approach for Solving Equations 6. Percents and Their Applications 7. 

Discounts: Trade and Cash 8. Markups and Markdowns; Insights into 

Perishables 9. Payroll 10. Simple Interest 11. Promissory Notes, Simple 

Discount Notes, and the Discount Process 12. Compound Interest and 

Present Value 13. Annuities and Sinking Funds 14. Installment Buying, 

Rule of 78, and Revolving Charge Credit Cards 15. The Cost of Home 

Ownership 16. How to Read, Analyze, and Interpret Financial Reports 

17. Depreciation 18. Inventory and Overhead 19. Sales, Excise, and 

Property Tax 20. Life, Fire, and Auto Insurance 21. Stocks, Bonds, 

and Mutual Funds 22.Business Statistics Appendix A: Complete set of 

Additional Practice Quizzes Appendis B: Additional Homework Assignments 

by Learning Unit Appendix C: Check Figures Appendix D: 

Glossary Appendix E: Metric Sytsem 










80

Business Math Software 

Business Math 

ALEKS FOR BUSINESS MATH USER GUIDE AND 

ACCESS CODE 

By ALEKS Corporation 

2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288513-2 / MHID: 0-07-288513-0 

(Mandatory Package, Stand-Alone) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-308064-2 / MHID: 0-07-308064-0 

(Bundle) 

Features 

• Using a sophisticated adaptive questioning system, ALEKS targets 

precisely what students are prepared to learn next. 

• ALEKS builds learning momentum, accelerates student preparedness, 

and significantly improves student retention. 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








81

Title Index 

a 

Advanced Macroeconomics, 3e, Romer.................................43 

Aleks for Business Math User Guide and Access Code, 

ALEKS Corporation.......................................................81 

Annual Editions: Economics, 34e, Cole..................................17 

Annual Editions: Labor-Management Relations 05/06, 

Overby..............................................................................41 

Applied Linear Regression Models, 4e, Neter........................78 

Applied Linear Statistical Models, 5e, Kutner.......................77 

Applied Statistics in Business and Economics with 

Student CD-ROM, Doane.................................................72 

b 

Basic Econometrics, 4e, Gujarati...........................................35 

Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 5e, Lind..........73 

Basic Statistics Using Excel and MegaStat, Orris..................72 

Basic Statistics Using Excel for use with Statistical 

Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e, Lind..........74 

Business Dynamics, Sterman.................................................49 

Business Forecasting, 5e, Wilson............................................75 

Business Information, Zagorsky.............................................77 

Business Research Methods, Blumberg.................................77 

Business Research Methods, 9e, Cooper................................76 

Business Savvy Project Manager (The), Heerkens................68 

Business Statistics, 2e, Beri....................................................73 

Business Statistics in Practice, 4e, Bowerman.......................71 

C 

Complete Business Statistics, 6e, Aczel..................................73 

Contemporary Labor Economics, 7e, McConnell..................41 

D 

Decision Making and Forecasting, Marshall..........................76 

Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e 

Simchi-Levi......................................................................62 

E 

Econometric Methods, 4e, Johnston......................................36 

Econometric Models and Economic Forecasts, 4e, 

Pindyck.............................................................................36 

Econometrics, Cameron.........................................................35 

Econometrics, Schmidt...........................................................35 

Economic Growth and Development, Van Den Berg.............44 

Economics, 8e, Begg...............................................................15 

Economics, 6e, Colander........................................................14 

Economics, 17e, McConnell...................................................11 

Economics, 16e, McConnell...................................................16 

Economics, 8e, Slavin.............................................................11 

Economics, 18e, Samuelson...................................................16 

Economics for Business, 2e, Begg..........................................28 

Economics is Everywhere, 2e, Hamermesh...........................17 

Economics of European Integration, 2e (The), Baldwin........45 

Economics of Organizations and Strategy (The), Richard.....33 

Economics of Social Issues, 17e, Sharp.................................29 

Economics of War (The), Poast..............................................18 

Economics Study Workbook, 8e, Begg...................................18 

Economy Today, 10e (The), Schiller......................................15 

Elements of Dynamic Optimization, Chiang..........................37 

Environmental Economics, 4e, Field......................................34 

Essential of Math with Business Applications, Student 

Edition, 7e, Nelson............................................................80 

Essentials of Business Statistics, 2e, Bowerman....................70 

Essentials of Econometrics, 3e, Gujarati...............................34 

Essentials of Economics, Brue................................................26 

Essentials of Economics, 6e, Schiller.....................................26 

European Union (The), Nello..................................................45 

Experiments with Economic Principles: Microeconomics 

2e, Bergstrom...................................................................18 

f 

Factory Physics, 2e, Hopp......................................................57 

Flying High in a Competitive Industry, Heracleous...............61 

Forecasting, Principles and Application, Delurgio.................76 

Foundations of Economics, 3e, Begg......................................27 

Foundations of Inventory Management, Zipkin.....................57 

Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics, 4e 

Chiang..............................................................................36 

G 

Global Operations Management, Flaherty.............................66 

Global Project Management Handbook, 2e, Cleland.............68 

A Guide to the Web for Economics, Bellamy.........................18 

H 

A History of Economic Theory and Method, 4e 

Ekelund............................................................................40 

Hong Kong Economy (The), Li..............................................46 

How to Prepare for Data Interpretation, 2e, Sharma..............78 

82

Title Index 

i 

Industrial Economics and Organization, 2e, Jacobson...........40 

Interactive Models for Operations and Supply Chain 

Management, Finch..........................................................52 

International Economics, 5e, Appleyard................................39 

International Economics, 4e, Cherunilam.............................39 

International Economics, 13e, Pugel.......................................38 

International Economics, Van Den Berg................................40 

International Trade and Investment, 2e, Gionea.....................39 

Introducing Advanced Macroeconomics, Sorensen................44 

Introduction to Business Data Mining, Olson.........................65 

Introduction to Information Systems Project Management, 

2e, Olson...........................................................................59 

Introduction to Management Science, 3e, Hillier...................54 

Introduction to Management Science, 2e, Hillier...................55 

Introduction to Management Science, Stevenson...................54 

Introduction to Operations Research, 8e, Hillier....................66 

Issues in Economics Today, 3e, Guell.....................................28 

J 

Juran’s Quality Control Handbook, 5e, Juran........................60 

L 

Labor Economics, 4e, Borjas..................................................41 

Labor Economics, 3e, Borjas..................................................42 

M 

Macroeconomics, 6e, Colander..............................................21 

Macroeconomics, 2e, DeLong................................................30 

Macroeconomics, 2e, Dornbusch...........................................30 

Macroeconomics, 9e, Dornbusch...........................................31 

Macroeconomics, 8e, Jackson................................................21 

Macroeconomics, 7e, Jackson................................................23 

Macroeconomics, 18e, Samuelson.........................................22 

Macroeconomics, 8e, Slavin.................................................. 19 

Macro Economy Today, 10e (The), Schiller...........................22 

Managerial Economics, 9e, Thomas.......................................32 

Managerial Economics, 8e, Thomas.......................................34 

Managerial Economics and Business Strategy, 5e, Baye........33 

Managerial Economics and Organizational Architecture, 

4e, Brickley.......................................................................32 

Managerial Spreadsheet Modeling and Analysis, Hesse.........55 

Managing Project and Service Development: Text and 

Cases, Thomke.................................................................58 

Managing Services, Davis.......................................................62 

Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems, 5e 

Vollmann..........................................................................57 

Matching Supply with Demand, Cachon..........................51, 64 

Microeconomics, 6e, Colander..............................................25 

Microeconomics, 7e, Jackson.................................................26 

Microeconomics, 3e, Katz......................................................32 

Microeconomics, Morgan......................................................31 

Microeconomics, 8e, Slavin....................................................23 

Microeconomics, 19e, Samuelson..........................................25 

Microeconomics and Behavior, 6e, Frank..............................31 

Microeconomics Demystified, Depken...................................21 

Micro Economy Today, 10e, (The), Schiller...........................25 

Money, Banking and Financial Markets, Cecchetti................37 

O 

Operations and Supply Management, Jacobs.........................50 

Operations Management, 5e, Davis........................................52 

Operations Management, 7e, Knod........................................52 

Operations Management, 3e, Schroeder................................50 

Operations Management, 9e, Stevenson.................................51 

Operations Management for Competitive Advantage, 11e 

Chase................................................................................51 

Operations Management Software Windows, Moses..............54 

Operations Management Video Series Vol. XII DVD, 9e 

Irwin/MH.........................................................................50 

Operations Now, 3e, Finch......................................................49 

P 

Power of Macroeconomics CD-ROM (The), Navarro...........17 

Power of Microeconomics CD-ROM (The), Navarro............17 

Practical Business Math Procedures, 8e, Slater......................80 

Practical Business Statistics, 5e, Siegel...................................73 

Principles of Economics, Frank.............................................14 

Principles of Economics, 3e, Frank........................................12 

Principles of Macroeconomics, Bernanke..............................22 

Principles of Macroeconomics, 3e, Frank..............................20 

Principles of Microeconomics, 3e, Frank..............................23 

Production, Sipper..................................................................57 

Production and Operations Analysis, 5e, Nahmias.................56 

Professional Services: Text and Cases, DeLong.....................61 

Profitable Purchasing Strategies, Steele..................................65 

Project Planning, Scheduling and Control, 4e, Lewis.............68 

Project Management, 5e, Cleland...........................................67 

Project Management, 4e, Gray...............................................57 

Project Management, 3e, Gray...............................................58 

Public Finance, 8e, Rosen.......................................................43 

Public Finance, 7e, Rosen.......................................................43 

Purchasing and Supply Management, Benton........................63 

Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e, Leenders.............64 

Q 

Quality Management, 3e, Gitlow............................................60 

Quality Planning and Analysis, 5e, Gryna.............................59 

Quantitative Methods for Business, 2e, Dewhurst.................56 

Quantitative Techniques in Management, 3e, Vohra..............55 

83

Title Index 

S 

SAP R/3 Enterprise Software, Hayen...............................53, 65 

Schaum’s Easy Outline of Business Statistics, Kazmier........74 

Schaum’s Easy Outline of Introduction to Mathematical 

Economics, Dowling.........................................................36 

Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Statistics, 2e, Stephens........74 

Schaum’s Outline of Business Statistics, 4e, Kazmier...........74 

Schaum’s Outline of Easy Outline of Principles of 

Economics, Salvatore.......................................................18 

Schaum’s Outline of International Economics, 4e 

Salvatore...........................................................................40 

Schaum’s Outline of Introduction to Mathematical 

Economics, 3e, Dowling...................................................37 

Schaum’s Outline of Macroeconomics, 3e, Diulio.................19 

Schaum’s Outline of Microeconomic Theory, 4e 

Salvatore...........................................................................44 

Schaum’s Outline of Operations Management, 2e, Monks....53 

Schaum’s Outline of Operations Research, 2e, Bronson........66 

Schaum’s Outline of Principles of Economics, 2e 

Salvatore...........................................................................19 

Schaum’s Outline of Probability and Statistics, 2e, 

Spiegel...............................................................................75 

Schaum’s Outline of Statistics and Econometrics, 2e 

Salvatore.....................................................................35, 75 

Service Management, 5e, Fitzsimmons..................................61 

Sim’s Project Player’s Manual and Access Code, Pinto.........59 

Statistical Quality Control, 7e, Grant.....................................61 

Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e 

Lind...................................................................................70 

Statistics, 6e, Sanders.............................................................74 

Structure of Economics, 3e (The), Silberberg........................37 

Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e, Bowersox.............63 

Supply Management Handbook, 7e (The), Cavinato.............67 

T 

Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 

Economics Issues, 12e, Bonello....................................... 29 

U 

Urban Economics, 6e, O’Sullivan..........................................42 

Using Statistics in Economics, Thomas.................................46 

W 

What is Design for Six Sigma, Pande.....................................60 

World Class Supply Management, 7e, Burt............................64 

World-Class Warehousing and Material Handling 

Frazelle.............................................................................67 

84

Author Index 

a 

Aczel: Complete Business Statistics, 6e.................................73 

ALEKS Corporation: Aleks for Business Math User 

Guide and Access Code.....................................................81 

Appleyard: International Economics, 5e................................39 

B 

Baldwin: Economics of European Integration, 2e (The)........45 

Baye: Managerial Economics and Business Strategy, 5e........33 

Begg: Economics, 8e...............................................................15 

Begg: Economics for Business, 2e..........................................28 

Begg: Economics Study Workbook, 8e...................................18 

Begg: Foundations of Economics, 3e......................................27 

Bellamy: A Guide to the Web for Economics.........................18 

Benton: Purchasing and Supply Management........................63 

Bergstrom: Experiments with Economic Principles: 

Microeconomics, 2e..........................................................18 

Beri: Business Statistics, 2e....................................................73 

Bernanke: Principles of Macroeconomics.............................22 

Blumberg: Business Research Methods.................................77 

Bonello: Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 

Economics Issues, 12e...................................................... 29 

Borjas: Labor Economics, 4e.................................................41 

Borjas: Labor Economics, 3e.................................................42 

Bowerman: Business Statistics in Practice, 4e.......................71 

Bowerman: Essentials of Business Statistics, 2e...................70 

Bowersox: Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e.............63 

Brickley: Managerial Economics and Organizational 

Architecture, 4e.................................................................32 

Bronson: Schaum’s Outline of Operations Research, 2e........66 

Brue: Essentials of Economics...............................................26 

Burt: World Class Supply Management, 7e...........................64 

C 

Cachon: Matching Supply with Demand.........................51, 64 

Cameron: Econometrics.........................................................35 

Cavinato: Supply Management Handbook, 7e (The).............67 

Cecchetti: Money, Banking and Financial Markets...............37 

Cherunilam: International Economics, 4e.............................39 

Chiang: Elements of Dynamic Optimization.........................37 

Chiang: Fundamental Methods of Mathematical 

Economics, 4e...................................................................36 

Chase: Operations Management for Competitive 

Advantage, 11e..................................................................51 

Cleland: Global Project Management Handbook, 2e.............68 

Cleland: Project Management, 5e..........................................67 

Colander: Economics, 6e.......................................................14 

Colander: Macroeconomics, 6e.............................................21 

Colander: Microeconomics, 6e..............................................25 

Cole: Annual Editions: Economics, 34e.................................17 

Cooper: Business Research Methods, 9e...............................76 

D 

Davis: Managing Services.......................................................62 

Davis: Operations Management, 5e........................................52 

DeLong: Macroeconomics, 2e................................................30 

DeLong: Professional Services: Text and Cases.....................61 

Delurgio: Forecasting, Principles and Application.................76 

Depken: Microeconomics Demystified..................................21 

Dewhurst: Quantitative Methods for Business, 2e.................56 

Diulio: Schaum’s Outline of Macroeconomics, 3e.................19 

Doane: Applied Statistics in Business and Economics 

with Student CD-ROM......................................................72 

Dornbusch: Macroeconomics, 2e...........................................30 

Dornbusch: Macroeconomics, 9e...........................................31 

Dowling: Schaum’s Easy Outline of Introduction to 

Mathematical Economics..................................................36 

Dowling: Schaum’s Outline of Introduction to 

Mathematical Economics, 3e............................................37 

E 

Ekelund: A History of Economic Theory and Method, 

4e.......................................................................................40 

F 

Field: Environmental Economics, 4e......................................34 

Finch: Interactive Models for Operations and Supply 

Chain Management...........................................................52 

Finch: Operations Now, 3e.....................................................49 

Fitzsimmons: Service Management, 5e.................................61 

Flaherty: Global Operations Management.............................66 

Frank: Microeconomics and Behavior, 6e.............................31 

Frank: Principles of Economics.............................................14 

Frank: Principles of Economics, 3e.......................................12 

Frank: Principles of Macroeconomics, 3e.............................20 

Frank: Principles of Microeconomics, 3e..............................23 

Frazelle: World-Class Warehousing and Material 

Handling............................................................................67 

G 

Gionea: International Trade and Investment, 2e.....................39 

Gitlow: Quality Management, 3e............................................60 

Grant: Statistical Quality Control, 7e.....................................61 

Gray: Project Management, 4e...............................................57 

Gray: Project Management, 3e...............................................58 

Gryna: Quality Planning and Analysis, 5e.............................59 

Guell: Issues in Economics Today, 3e....................................28 

Gujarati: Basic Econometrics, 4e..........................................35 

Gujarati: Essentials of Econometrics, 3e...............................34 

85

Author Index 

H 

Hamermesh: Economics is Everywhere, 2e..........................17 

Hayen: SAP R/3 Enterprise Software...............................53, 65 

Heerkens: Business Savvy Project Manager (The)................68 

Heracleous: Flying High in a Competitive Industry..............61 

Hesse: Managerial Spreadsheet Modeling and Analysis........55 

Hillier: Introduction to Management Science, 3e...................54 

Hillier: Introduction to Management Science, 2e...................55 

Hillier: Introduction to Operations Research, 8e....................66 

Hopp: Factory Physics, 2e......................................................57 

I 

Irwin/MH: Operations Management Video Series 

Vol. XII DVD, 9e...............................................................50 

J 

Jackson: Macroeconomics, 8e................................................21 

Jackson: Macroeconomics, 7e................................................23 

Jackson: Microeconomics, 7e................................................26 

Jacobs: Operations and Supply Management.........................50 

Jacobson: Industrial Economics and Organization, 2e...........40 

Johnston: Econometric Methods, 4e......................................36 

Juran: Juran’s Quality Control Handbook, 5e........................60 

K 

Katz: Microeconomics, 3e......................................................32 

Kazmier: Schaum’s Easy Outline of Business Statistics........74 

Kazmier: Schaum’s Outline of Business Statistics, 4e...........74 

Knod: Operations Management, 7e........................................52 

Kutner: Applied Linear Statistical Models, 5e......................77 

L 

Leenders: Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e............64 

Lewis: Project Planning, Scheduling and Control, 4e............68 

Li: Hong Kong Economy (The)..............................................46 

Lind: Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 5e..........73 

Lind: Basic Statistics Using Excel for use with Statistical 

Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e....................74 

Lind: Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 

13e.....................................................................................70 

M 

Marshall: Decision Making and Forecasting.........................76 

McConnell: Contemporary Labor Economics, 7e..................41 

McConnell: Economics, 17e..................................................11 

McConnell: Economics, 16e..................................................16 

Monks: Schaum’s Outline of Operations Management, 2e....53 

Morgan: Microeconomics......................................................31 

Moses: Operations Management Software Windows.............54 

N 

Nahmias: Production and Operations Analysis, 5e................56 

Navarro: Power of Macroeconomics CD-ROM (The)...........17 

Navarro: Power of Microeconomics CD-ROM (The)...........17 

Nello: European Union (The)................................................. 45 

Nelson: Essential of Math with Business Applications, 

Student Edition, 7e............................................................80 

Neter: Applied Linear Regression Models, 4e.......................78 

O 

Olson: Introduction to Business Data Mining........................65 

Olson: Introduction to Information Systems Project 

Management, 2e................................................................59 

Orris: Basic Statistics Using Excel and MegaStat.................72 

O’Sullivan: Urban Economics, 6e..........................................42 

Overby: Annual Editions: Labor-Management Relations 

05/06..................................................................................41 

P 

Pande: What is Design for Six Sigma....................................60 

Pindyck: Econometric Models and Economic 

Forecasts, 4e......................................................................36 

Pinto: Sim’s Project Player’s Manual and Access Code.........59 

Poast: Economics of War (The)..............................................18 

Pugel: International Economics, 13e......................................38 

R 

Richard: Economics of Organizations and Strategy (The)....33 

Romer: Advanced Macroeconomics, 3e.................................43 

Rosen: Public Finance, 8e.......................................................43 

Rosen: Public Finance, 7e.......................................................43 

86

Author Index 

S 

Salvatore: Schaum’s Outline of Easy Outline of 

Principles of Economics....................................................18 

Salvatore: Schaum’s Outline of International 

Economics, 4e...................................................................40 

Salvatore: Schaum’s Outline of Microeconomic 

Theory, 4e..........................................................................44 

Salvatore: Schaum’s Outline of Principles of 

Economics, 2e...................................................................19 

Salvatore: Schaum’s Outline of Statistics and 

Econometrics, 2e.........................................................35, 75 

Samuelson: Economics, 18e...................................................16 

Samuelson: Macroeconomics, 18e.........................................22 

Samuelson: Microeconomics, 19e..........................................25 

Sanders: Statistics, 6e.............................................................74 

Schiller: Economy Today, 10e (The)......................................15 

Schiller: Essentials of Economics, 6e.....................................26 

Schiller: Macro Economy Today, 10e (The)...........................22 

Schiller: Micro Economy Today, 10e, (The)..........................25 

Schmidt: Econometrics...........................................................35 

Schroeder: Operations Management, 3e................................50 

Sharma: How to Prepare for Data Interpretation, 2e.............78 

Sharp: Economics of Social Issues, 17e.................................29 

Siegel: Practical Business Statistics, 5e..................................73 

Silberberg: Structure of Economics, 3e (The).......................37 

Simchi-Levi: Designing and Managing the Supply 

Chain, 3e............................................................................62 

Sipper: Production..................................................................57 

Slater: Practical Business Math Procedures, 8e.....................80 

Slavin: Economics, 8e............................................................ 11 

Slavin: Macroeconomics, 8e.................................................. 19 

Slavin: Microeconomics, 8e....................................................23 

Sorensen: Introducing Advanced Macroeconomics...............44 

Spiegel: Schaum’s Outline of Probability and Statistics, 

2e.......................................................................................75 

Steele: Profitable Purchasing Strategies..................................65 

Stephens: Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Statistics, 2e........74 

Sterman: Business Dynamics.................................................49 

Stevenson: Introduction to Management Science...................54 

Stevenson: Operations Management, 9e.................................51 

V 

Van Den Berg: Economic Growth and Development............44 

Van Den Berg: International Economics................................40 

Vohra: Quantitative Techniques in Management, 3e..............55 

Vollmann: Manufacturing Planning and Control 

Systems, 5e........................................................................57 

W 

Wilson: Business Forecasting, 5e...........................................75 

Z 

Zagorsky: Business Information............................................77 

Zipkin: Foundations of Inventory Management.....................57 

T 

Thomas: Managerial Economics, 9e......................................32 

Thomas: Managerial Economics, 8e......................................34 

Thomas: Using Statistics in Economics.................................46 

Thomke: Managing Project and Service Development: 

Text and Cases...................................................................58 

87

Table of contents - McGraw-Hill Books

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?